Srom  t^  Sii^xatt  of 

(pxofcBBox  TJJiffiam  ^cnx^  &xcn 

IjSequeaf^eb  615  ^itn  to 
f  0e  £i6targ  of 

Qprinceton  C^eofogicdf  ^emtnarj 
-ID^  I  141 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES 


OF    THE 


BOOKS 


OF    THE 


OLD  TESTAMENT 


PRINTED  FOR  THE  USE  OF  THE   STUDENTS  OF   THE 

THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY  OF  THE  REFORMED 

(DUTCH)  CHURCH  IN  AMERICA  AT 

NEW  BRUNSWICK,  N.  J. 


Rev.  J.  G.  LANSING,  D.  D. 

Gardner  A.  Sage  Professor  of  Old  Testament  Languages 
and  Exegesis. 


NEW    BRUNSWICK,    N.    J. 

J.     HEIOINGSFELD,    PRINTER,    42    ALBANY    STREET, 

1895. 


COPYRIGHT  BY  J.  (4.  LANSING 
1895 


Introductory  Statement 


UPON 


OLD  TESTAMENT  PHILOLOGY, 


I.— The  Original  Languages  of  the  Old  Testament. 

The  Old  Testament  was  originally  written  in  the  He- 
brew language,  with  the  exception  of  a  few  portions, 
which  were  written  in  Chaldee.  The  Chaldee  portions 
are  Dan.  2:4—7:28;  Ezra  4:8— G:  18;  7:12—26;  Jer. 
10:11. 

The  Hebrew  language  is  a  member  of  the  large 
family  of  languages  called  Shemitic. 

II.— -The  Shemitic  Languages* 

The  Shemitic  languages  belong  to  Palestine,  S^^'ia, 
Phoenicia,  Mesopotamia,  Babylonia,  Arabia  and  Ethi- 
opia. 

These  languages  may  be  divided  into  three  groups, 
viz.,  North  Shemitic,  Central  Shemitic  and  South 
Shemitic. 

XoRTH  Shemitic. 

1.  Eastern,     a.  Bab^^lonian.     b.  Assyrian. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


^East  Aramaic 


2.  AVesteru.  Aramaic. 


West  Aramaic 


a.  Syriac.  (Dialect 

of  Edessa). 
h.  Mandean. 
c.  Nabatliean. 

{a.  Samaritan. 
h.  Jewish  Aramaic 
(Daniel,  Ezra, 
Targnms,  Tal- 
mud). 

c.  Palmyrene. 

d.  Egyptian    Ara-. 

maic. 


Central  Shemitic. 


a. 


Old  Phoenician,     h.  Late  Phoeni- 


1.  Phoenician, 
cian  or  Punic. 

2.  Hebrew. 

3.  Moabitish  and  other  Canaanitisli  dialects. 

South  Shemitic. 
1.  Northern.     Arabic. 

Sabsean  or  Himyaritic.  \  ^'  Trfvi^iJ 


2.   Southern. 


t  Geez,  or  Ethiopic 


I  b.  Hakili  (Ehkilli). 

a.  Old  Geez. 
h.  Tigre. 

c.  Tigrina. 

d.  Amharic. 

e.  Harari. 


The  Shemitic  languages  were  developed  from  one 
original  mother-tongue,  which  has  become  lost,  except 
as  it  is  preserved  in  these  Shemitic  forms  of  speech. 

The  Shemitic  languages  in  all  probability  emigrated 
from  a  common  centre  in  the  desert  on  the  South  of 
Babylonia,  the  Arabic  group  separating  first,  next  the 
Aramaic,  then  the  Hebrew,  while  the  Babylonian  gained 
ultimately  the   mastery  of  the   original  Akkadian  of 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  5 

Babylonia,  and  the  Assyrian  founded  the  great  empire 
on  the  Tigris. 

The  principal  linguistic  features  common  to  the  8hem- 
itic  languages  are  as  follows : 

1.  Roots  consist  of  tliree  consonants,  generally  accom- 
panied by  a  vowel. 

2.  Inflections  are  obtained  mainly  by  internal  modifi- 
cations. 

o.  The  fundamental  signification  is  contained  in  the 
consonantal  root. 

4.  Modifications  of  this  signification  are  obtained 
mainly  b}^  changing  the  vowels  of  the  root,  doubling 
root  letters,  and  shortening  or  lengthening  the  root. 

5.  Moods  and  cases  so  far  as  they  exist  are  expressed 
by  the  three  primary  pure  short  vowels. 

6.  Instead  of  tenses  there  are  two  states,  Perfect  and 
Imperfect,  relating  not  to  time,  but  to  the  completeness 
or  incompleteness  of  the  act  expressed  by  the  verb. 

7.  Particles  are  few,  and  therefore  the  clauses  of  a 
sentence  are  simple. 

8.  There  is  a  wondrous  wealth  of  so-called  synonyms. 

9.  An  intense  realism  is  another  marked  feature. 

10.  There  is  a  striking  correspondence  between  and 
indeed  a  subservience  of  the  language  to  the  thought : — 
the  idea,  thought,  emotion  being  the  principal  thing, 
and  bursting  forth  freely  and  boldly  without  any  exter- 
nal restraint  in  speech. 

III. -The  Alphabet  and  Alphabetical  Writing. 

The  discovery  of  the  Alphabet  and  of  Alphabetical  Writ- 
ing belongs  to  the  ancient  Egyptians.  The  art  of  writ- 
ing was  practiced  before  the  times  of  the  patriarchs  and 


6  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

probably  by  the  patriarchs  themselves.  For  while  Moses 
is  the  first  one  spoken  of  in  the  Bible  as  a  writer,  the 
art  is  not  represented  as  anything  new ;  as,  besides,  we 
read  of  the  seal-ring  of  Judah,  implying  a  knowledge  of 
the  art.  That  Moses  and  the  Israelites  at  the  time  of 
the  Exodus  understood  the  art  of  Alphabetical  AVriting 
is  unquestionable.  The  special  calling  of  the  Shoterim 
of  Moses'  day  was  to  write.  In  Deuteronomy  is  an  in- 
junction to  write  an  abstract  of  the  law,  implying  an 
ability  to  write.  In  the  book  of  Joshua  we  learn  that  a 
copy  of  the  law  of  Moses  was  written  on  stones  prepared 
for  the  purpose.  In  Judges  we  are  told  of  a  young 
man  who  is  able  to  write  down  a  long  list  of  names  com- 
prising the  eldership  and  the  jDrinces  of  Succoth.  After 
the  time  of  David  the  practice  of  writing  in  all  its  forms 
was  common  with  every  class  of  the  people. 

From  the  time  of  Isaiah  it  would  appear  that  besides 
the  customar^^  written  character  there  was  another  rep- 
resenting a  more  running  hand,  and  possibly  letters  of  a 
smaller  size.  (Isa.  8:1.)  Others  find  in  Isaiah's  "a 
man's  pen,"  an  indication  that  already  the  larger  Ara- 
maic character  had  been  introduced,  and  that  he  was 
directed  to  use  the  old,  rather  than  the  new  style.  This, 
however,  is  questionable;  although  the  Aranmic  was 
doubtless  understood  by  some  persons  in  Israel  at  this 
date.  This  Aramaic  character,  which  is  the  one  now 
solelj"  in  use  in  our  Hebrew  Bible,  supplanted  the  origi- 
nal Hebrew  alphabet  after  the  Babylonian  Exile.  The 
latter  however  still  exists,  in  its  general  features,  in  the 
Samaritan  alphabet,  the  inscriptions  of  the  Moabite 
Stone,  belonging  to  the  ninth  century  B.  C,  and  on  ex- 
tant coins  of  the  Maccabsean  period. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  7 

IV.— The  Hebrew  Language. 

The  name  Hebrew  is  derived  by  some  from  Eher  the 
ancestor  of  Abraliam  (Gen.  10:24,  25;  11:14;  14:13), 
and  hy  others  from  the  Hebrew  word  eher — beyond.,  and 
ibree — the  one  from  beyond^  referring  to  Abraham's  mi- 
gration, and  translated  "  the  Hebrew  "  in  Gen.  14:13. 

The  Hebrew  language  was  already  considerably  de- 
veloped when   Abraham   entered    Canaan.     This   lan- 
guage, akin  to  his  own,    Abraham   in   all   probability 
learned  from  the  Canaanites;   that  is,  he  adopted  the 
language  of  the  Canaanites.     The  expression  "Hebrew 
Language "  is  not  found  in  the  Old  Testament.     It  is 
there  called  the  "language  of  Canaan,"  a  strong  inci- 
dental proof  of  the  origin  of  the  language  itself.     Most 
scholars  are  agreed  that  some  dialect  of  the  Hebrew  was 
spoken  in  Canaan  at  the  time  of  Abraham's  migration 
thither.     This  theory  is  confirmed  by  the  circumstance 
that  the  Phoenician  language,  still  preserved  in  numer- 
ous inscriptions,  is  strikingi}-  analogous  to  the  Hebrew, 
in  vocabulary,  and  in  many  characteristic  formations  of 
nouns  and  verbs.     The  language  spoken  by  Abraham 
previous  to  his  migration  was  also,  like  the  Hebrew, 
Shemitic ;  but  it  was  probably  that  which  is  now  being 
brought  to  light  in  connection  with  the  Babylonian  and 
Assyrian  monuments  of  the  East.    This  ancient  Assyrian 
and  Babylonian  are  nearer  to  the  Hebrew  and  Phoenician 
than  they  are  to  the  other  Shemitic  languages.     The 
original  dialect  of  Canaan  was  undoubtedly  largely  de- 
veloped and  adapted  to  its  higher  use  in  connection  with 
the  immigration  of  Abraham  and  the  peculiar  history 
of  the  Israelitish  people.    By  Jacob  and  his  descendants 
the  Hebrew  language  was  carried  into  Egypt,  preserved 


8  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

there  during  their  sojourn,  and  then  brought  back  again 
to  its  original  home  in  Canaan. 

In  relation  to  the  rest  of  the  Shemitic  languages,  the 
Hebrew  is  remarkable  for  its  antiquity,  purity  and  sim- 
plicity. In  richness  both  of  diction  and  grammatical 
forms  it  occupies  a  place  midway  between  the  poverty  of 
the  Aramaic  and  the  wealth  of  the  Arabic.  For  the 
most  part  it  has  admitted  foreign  words  only  in  the  case 
of  foreign  objects.  Especially  has  it  developed  a  rich 
store  of  ideas  in  the  sphere  of  religion.  Alongside  of  its 
prose  composition,  and  the  language  of  common  life,  it 
early  developed  a  peculiar  poetical  style  constructed  for 
the  most  part  on  the  simple  principle  of  the  parallelism  of 
members.  Like  all  the  Shemitic  languages,  the  Hebrew 
language  has  suffered  no  amazing  changes,  but  has  re- 
mained substantially  unmodified,  either  by  accretion 
from  other  languages,  or  by  any  great  growth  or  devel- 
opment within  itself,  during  its  entire  literary  period. 
And  finally  the  Hebrew  language  is  above  all,  in  its 
essential  spirit  and  genius,  a  religious  language,  the  holy 
tongue  of  God's  holy  people. 

But  while,  like  the  rest  of  the  Shemitic  languages,  the 
Hebrew  language  has  undergone  no  amazing  change, 
still  three  stages  or  periods  of  linguistic  and  literary  de- 
velopment are  noticeable  in  it;  viz.,  the  Mosaic,  the 
Davidic  and  Solomonic,  and  the  Exilian  and  Post- 
Exilian. 


T,— Hebrew   Language  and  Literature  in  the  Mosaic  Period. 

The  language  of  the  age  of  Moses  bears  the  stamp  of 
greater  antiquity  as  compared  with  subsequent  periods. 
It  contains  archaic  and  poetic  words  and  forms  seldom 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  9 

found  elsewhere.  The  number  of  words,  forms  of 
words  and  phrases  are  greater.  There  is  a  poetical  col- 
oring to  the  prose,  and  a  primitive  originality  to  the 
poetry.  Some  words  are  afterwards  found  to  have 
slightly  changed  or  developed  their  signification  or  form. 
A  slight  difference  is  also  found  between  the  Book  of 
Genesis  and  the  remaining  Books  of  the  Pentateuch,  not 
so  much  in  grammatical  respects,  but  in  that  Genesis 
contains  a  considerable  number  of  words  and  phrases 
which  in  the  time  of  Moses  had  already  gone  out  of  use, 
and  had  been  replaced  bj'  others. 

In  respect  to  literature,  Moses,  the  founder  of  the  He- 
brew State,  was  also  the  creator  of  the  Hebrew  Litera- 
ture. To  him  is  attributed  not  only  the  reduction  to 
writing  of  the  whole  legislation  that  takes  its  name  from 
him,  but  also  the  composition  in  writing  of  the  entire 
Pentateuch.  How  much  of  the  historical  accounts  from 
primitive  times  came  down  to  Moses  orally,  and  how  much 
had  been  written  down  earlier  than  the  time  of  Moses, 
we  cannot  determine.  Moses  gave  Israel  command- 
ments, statutes,  and  judgments  which  he  wrote  in  "the 
Book  of  the  Covenant."  He  also  collected  and  arranged 
the  traditions  of  j^rimitive  and  earlier  times.  He  en- 
tered in  the  Book  of  the  Law  all  the  weighty  events  of 
his  own  time,  both  for  historical  and  didactic  purposes. 
And,  in  addition,  the  Books  of  Moses  contain  prophetic 
utterances,  poetical  productions  and  songs,  either  com- 
posed and  written  by  Moses,  as,  e.  (/.,  his  parting  song 
and  blessing  (Deut.  Chs.  32,  33),  or  transcribed  and 
incorporated  by  him,  as  e.  ^.,  Balaam's  prophecies  (Xu. 
Chs.  22-24),  and  single  fragments  of  songs  out  of 
"The  Book  of  the  Wars  of  the  Lord"  (Xu.  21:14,  IT, 
27-30). 


10  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

VI.— Hebrew  Language   and   Literature  in  the  DaTidic  and 
Solomonic  Period. 

The  second  or  interinediate  period  of  the  Hebrew 
language  and  literature  reaches  from  Samuel  to  Heze- 
kiah  (B.  C.  1100-700).  It  is  the  Golden  Age  of  the 
Hebrew  language  and  literature,  attaining  its  zenith 
under  David  and  Solomon,  whose  rich  mental  endow- 
ments in  the  department  of  literature  contributed 
greatl}'  to  the  cultivation  and  development  of  the 
language. 

Alread}^  in  the  Book  of  Joshua,  the  last  Book  of  the 
Hexateuch,  linguistic  development  begins  to  be  observ- 
able, in  the  disappearance  of  archaisms,  in  new  concep- 
tions and  expressions,  and  in  peculiar  formations  of 
words.  This  linguistic  development  becomes  of  greater 
importance  under  Samuel,  in  the  Books  of  Judges,  Ruth 
and  Samuel,  where  we  find  new  conceptions  and  words, 
formed  in  the  course  of  the  progressive  development  of 
the  domestic,  civil,  political,  and  religious  life  of  the 
nation ;  besides,  a  large  number  of  words  in  the  Books 
of  Samuel,  that  do  not  previously  occur  in  prose,  but 
belong  mainly  to  poetical  and  prophetical  language. 
The  language  attained  to  its  highest  degree  of  culti- 
vated use  in  connection  with  the  poetry  that  flourished 
under  David  and  Solomon,  and  in  which  is  seen  a 
decided  enlargement  and  enrichment  of  the  vocabulary, 
the  grammatical  forms  and  the  intellectual  force  of  the 
language.  It  develops  new  roots  and  words,  new  forms 
and  formations  of  words,  and  new  words  in  derivative 
significations.  And  not  only  poetry,  but  prophecy  also 
contributed  largely  to  the  cultivation  of  the  language 
by  means  of  its  enlarged  vocabulary,  its  oratorical  style, 
and  its  powerful  imagery  in  the  announcement  of  divine 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  11 

truth.  This  high  degree  of  cultivation  attained  In'  the 
language  during  this  period,  and  as  displayed  in  its 
poetic  and  prophetic  literature,  is  owing,  in  part,  to  the 
increase  of  its  roots  and  its  formations  of  words,  accord- 
ing to  its  own  laws  for  making  these ;  and,  in  part,  to 
the  adoption  of  words  and  forms  from  the  kindred 
Arabic  and  Aramaic  dialects.  This  latter  class  of 
words,  of  course,  belonged  to  the  common  Shemitic 
language,  but  the  words  had  been  retained  only  by  one 
or  other  of  the  branches  into  which  the  race  became 
diAided,  and  especially  by  the  Arabic  branch,  until  they 
again  became  appropriated  by  the  Hebrews. 

The  Hebrew  literature  of  this  period  embraces  the 
historical  and  poetic  writings  falling  between  the  time 
of  Moses,  and  that  of  David,  the  Davidic  Psalms,  and 
the  older  projjhetic  and  poetic  writings,  including  the 
lives  and  writings  of  David,  Solomon,  Isaiah,  Amos, 
Hosea,  Joel,  Jonah,  Micah  and.  Nahum.  From  the  death 
of  Moses  till  the  time  of  Samuel  the  literature  is  chiefly 
historical,  with  occasional  bursts  of  exalted  poetry  as, 
e.  g.,  the  songs  of  Deborah  and  Hannah.  Under 
Samuel  and  his  "schools  of  the  prophets"  a  theocratic 
literature  becomes  revived  and  greatly  promoted. 
Under  David  and  Solomon,  who  were  endowed  with 
such  rich  and  profound  mental  attainments,  lyric  and 
didactic  poetry  flourishes.  As  affairs  became  dis- 
ordered towards  the  end  of  Solomon's  reign,  and  a 
growing  decadence  in  religious  life  became  more 
observable,  prophetic  literature  rose  continually  into 
increasing  importance.  Prophecies  became  more  ex- 
tended and  more  imi^ressive  in  subject  matter.  This 
prophetic  literature  revolves  about  the  two  great  themes 
of  prophecy;  on  the  one  hand  prevailing  sin,  and  the 


12  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

divine  purifications  and  punishments  therefor;  and  on 
the  other  hand  the  gracious  and  glorious  designs  of  the 
theocracy,  when,  after  purification  by  these  judgments, 
dsijs  of  blessedness  and  glory  should  dawn  by  the 
mission  of  Messiah  to  redeem  Israel,  and  to  bring  the 
saving  knowledge  of  the  Lord  to  all  nations.  This 
prophetic  literature  beginning  with  the  ninth  century, 
attains  its  climax  in  Isaiah,  during  the  Assj-rian  period. 
This  prophetic  literature  designed  not  only  for  the  times 
in  which  it  was  produced,  but  chiefly  for  the  future, 
contained  also  much  of  historical  matter  written  in  a 
theocratic  spirit.  Prophetic  writings  appeared  in  refer- 
ence to  the  reigns  of  most  of  the  kings,  in  which  his- 
torical narratives  of  the  weightiest  events  were  united 
with  the  prophetic  utterances  which  they  called  forth, 
as  e.  g.,  "The  words  of  Samuel,  Gad,  Nathan,  Shem- 
aiah,  Iddo,  Jehu,"  etc.  Individual  prophets  also  com- 
posed separate  historical  works,  from  a  prophetic  point 
of  view,  upon  individual  reigns,  as  e.  g.,  Isaiah's  his- 
tory of  Uzziah  (2  Chron.  26 :  22)  and  the  prophet  Iddo's 
Midrasli  (commentary  R.  V.)  upon  the  reign  of  Abijah 
(2  Chron.  13:22).  Besides  there  were  court  annalists 
who  recorded  the  principal  undertakings  and  events  of 
different  reigns  for  the  state  archives,  and  from  which 
records  were  subsequently^  elaborated  the  general 
"  Chronicles  of  the  Kingdoms." 

VII.— Hebrew  Language  and  Literature  in  the  Exilian  and 
Post-Exilian  Period. 

The  third  period  of  the  Hebrew  language  and  litera- 
ture extends  from  the  time  of  the  Babj^lonian  Exile  to 
the  times   of   the   Maccabees,   and  is  marked  by  the 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  13 

approximation  of  the  Hebrew  to  the  kindred  Aramaic 
and  Chaldee. 

With  the  Assyrian  invasions  the  Aramaic  dialect 
began  to  spread,  and  to  act  as  a  restraint  upon  the 
continued  independent  development  of  tlie  Hebrew 
language.  Hebrew  words  and  grammatical  formations 
became  supplanted  by  newer  ones  for  the  most  part 
Aramaic;  the  understanding  of  the  old  language  became 
obscured;  its  force  and  ox)erations  became  weakened, 
while  grammatical  niceties,  and  the  distinction  of  prose 
and  poetical  diction  became  lost.  During  the  exile  the 
Aramaic  or  Chaldee  gained  such  an  ascendencj^  over  the 
Hebrew,  that  on  their  return  only  the  more  educated 
of  the  people  still  understood  the  mother-tongue,  while 
the  nation  that  had  grown  up  in  exile  sjioke  Aramaic 
or  Chaldee,  and  Hebrew  ceased  to  be  the  living  language 
of  the  people. 

In  the  literature  of  this  period  may  be  seen  to  a 
greater  or  less  extent  the  approximation  of  the  Hebrew 
to  the  kindred  Aramaic  and  Chaldee,  thus  in  Ezra, 
Nehemiah,  Chronicles,  Esther,  Haggai,  Zechariah, 
Malachi,  Jeremiah,  Ezekiel,  Daniel  and  the  later 
Psalms.  The  literature  of  this  period  was  first  of  all 
prophetic,  the  prophets  rebuking  the  people  for  ingrati- 
tude; pledging  them  the  certain  fulfillment  of  the 
divine  promises;  and  foretelling  the  purifying  judgments 
that  awaited  the  old  theocracy,  the  close  of  the  mission 
of  the  prophets  of  Israel,  and  the  announcement  of 
Messiah's  forerunner  with  His  own  appearing  for  tlie 
judgment  of  the  ungodl}^  For  a  short  time  poetry  gave 
utterance  to  the  praises  of  God  in  a  number  of  temple- 
songs  and  then  became  extinct.  Finally,  the  i)i'<)ph('lie 
spirit  soon  entirely  disapi^eared  from  history.      With 


14  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Malaclii  the  spirit  of  the  ancient  i)roi)hets  passed  awny 
from  Israel,  and  abont  400  B.  0.  Hebrew  canonical 
literature  came  to  an  end. 

VIII.— Moabitish,  Old  aud  Late  Phoeuiciaii. 

To  the  Central  Shemitic  group  belong  also  the  Moab- 
itish, the  Old  Phoenician,  and  the  Late  Phoenician  or 
Punic  languages. 

The  alphabet  was  of  EgyiDtian  origin.  It  was  com- 
municated by  the  Egyptians  to  the  Phoenicians.  From 
the  Plupnicians  it  was  received  by  the  nations  round 
about  them. 

What  were  the  forms  of  the  Phoenician  letters  used  on 
the  eastern  side  of  the  Jordan  in  the  time  of  Ahab,  we 
learn  from  the  celebrated  Moabite  Stone.  The  forms 
employed  in  Israel  and  Judah  on  the  western  side  could 
not  have  differed  much ;  so  that  in  these  forms  or  char- 
acters we  see  in  general  the  mode  of  Avriting  employed 
by  the  earlier  prophets  of  the  Old  Testament.  The 
Moabite  Stone  was  discovered  in  1869  among  the  ruins 
of  Dhiban,  the  ancient  Dibon.  The  Stone  is  of  black 
basalt,  and  contains  an  inscription  of  thirtj-four  lines 
in  the  letters  of  the  Phoenician  alphabet.  The  inscrip- 
tion is  a  record  of  Mesha,  king  of  Moab,  of  whom  we 
read  in  2  Ki.  Ch.  3,  that  after  Ahab's  death  he  "re- 
belled against  the  king  of  Israel,"  and  was  vainly 
besieged  in  his  capital,  Kirharaseth,  by  the  combined 
armies  of  Israel,  Judah  and  Edom.  Mesha  describes  the 
successful  issue  of  his  revolt,  and  the  revenge  he  took 
upon  the  Israelites  for  their  former  oiij^ression  of  his 
country.  In  many  respects  the  inscription  reads  much 
like  a  chapter  from  one  of  the  historical  Books  of  the 
Old  Testament.     Xot  only  are  the  phrases  the  same,  but 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  15 

the  words  and  grainmatical  forms  are,  witli  one  or  two 
exceptions,  all  found  in  Scrii^tural  Hebrew.  From  wliieli 
we  learn  that  the  language  of  Moab  differed  less  from 
that  of  the  Israelites  than  does  one  English  dialect  from 
another.  The  storj^  told  by  the  Stone,  and  the  account 
of  the  war  against  Moab  given  in  the  Bible,  supplement 
one  another. 

But  as  the  writing  of  two  persons  will  differ,  so  the 
writing  of  the  Moabites  on  the  east  side  of  the  Jordan 
and  the  writing  of  the  Jews  on  the  west  side  must  have 
differed  to  some  extent.  Besides  there  must  have  been 
some  difference  between  the  cursive  writing  of  a  papy- 
rus roll  and  the  carefully  carved  letters  of  a  monument 
like  Mesha's.  This  seems  to  be  implied  by  Isa.  8:1. 
But  until  the  discovery  of  the  Siloam  inscription  we 
were  not  possessed  of  any  Hebrew  inscription  of  authen- 
tic pre-exilic  date.  The  inscription  is  as  old  as  the  time 
of  Isaiah,  and  maj^  be  older.  It  was  discovered  in  1880. 
The  Pool  of  Siloam  is  supplied  with  water  through  a 
tunnel  excavated  in  the  rock.  This  tunnel  communi- 
cated with  the  so-called  Spring  of  -the  Virgin,  the  only 
natural  spring  of  water  in  or  near  Jerusalem.  It  rises 
below  the  walls  of  the  city,  on  the  western  bank  of  the 
Kidron  valley;  and  the  tunnel  through  which  its  waters 
are  conveyed  is  consequently  cut  through  the  ridge 
that  forms  the  southern  part  of  the  Temple  Hill.  The 
Pool  of  Siloam  lies  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  ridge,  at 
the  mouth  of  the  valley  called  that  of  the  Cheesemakers 
(Tyropoeon)  in  the  time  of  Josephus.  The  inscription 
occupies  the  under  part  of  an  artificial  tablet  in  tlie  wall 
of  rock,  about  19  feet  from  where  the  conduit  opens  out 
upon  the  Pool  of  Siloam,  and  on  the  right  hand  side  of 
one  who  enters  it,  i.  e. ,  the  southern  side.     The  inscrip- 


16  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

tion  consists  of  eight  lines  and  relates  to  the  excavation 
of  the  tunnel.  It  was  executed  either  in  the  reign  of 
Hezekiah,  2  Ki.  20:20;  2  Chron.  32:30,  or  Ahaz,  Isa.  8:0, 
or  possiblj"  Solomon.  With  the  exception  of  one  word 
the  language  of  the  inscription  is  the  purest  Biblical 
Hebrew,  and  the  writing  and  characters  those  used  by 
the  earlj^  prophets. 

The  Old  Phoenician  and  the  Late  Phoenician  or  Punic 
languages  differ  but  little  from  the  Hebrew,  but,  on  the 
whole,  represent  a  later  stage  of  grammatical  structure 
than  the  language  of  the  Old  Testament.  The  Phoeni- 
cian literarj'  remains  are  for  the  most  part  confined  to 
coins,  toj)Ographical  names  preserved  by  classical  writers, 
proper  names  of  persons,  and  monumental  inscriptions. 
The  longest,  oldest  and  most  important  monumental 
inscription  is  on  the  sarcophagus  of  Eshmunazar,  king 
of  Sidon,  and  the  date  of  which  falls  between  1000  and 
700  B.  C. 

IX.— The  Aramaic  or  North  Shemitic. 

Taking  the  Hebrew  language  as  occupy  ing  geographi- 
cally the  Middle  Territory,  the  Arabic  prevailed  to  the 
South,  and  the  Aramaic  to  the  Xorth  or  North-east. 

The  two  dialects  constituting  the  Aramaic  language 
with  which  we  are  most  familiar  are  the  Syriac  and  the 
Chaldee.  The  Chaldee  is  again  classified  into  the  Bibli- 
cal Chaldee,  those  portions  in  Ezra,  Daniel,  etc.  cited, 
and  the  non-Biblical  Chaldee,  i.  e.,  the  languages  of  the 
Targums  or  Chaldee  paraphrases. 

The  Aramaic  language,  taking  the  place  of  the  Phoe- 
nician, became  the  language  of  intercourse  and  com- 
merce between  the  people  of  the  North.  The  language 
became  adopted  by  the  Jews  when  they  were  carried 


INTRODUCTION     OUTLINKS.  17 

away  into  tlieir  ca[)livity  in  the  Nortli.  It  continued 
to  be  the  language  of  the  Jews  during  the  Persian, 
Greek  and  Roman  periods,  and  was  tlie  eoniinon  s})ee('li 
of  Palestine  in  the  time  of  Christ. 

Harsh  in  its  consonants,  poor  in   its  vowels,  weak  in 
its  system  of  conjugations,  marked  by  a  general  poverty 
of  forms  and  vocalization,  and  notiid'requently  weakened 
and  corrupted  by  pleonasm  and  tlu?  introduction  of  for- 
eign words, — the  Ai'amaic  is  tlie  least  opulent  and   least 
cultivated  of  all  the  Shemitic  languages.     Still,  oii  the 
other  hand,   it  is  a  language  admirably  adapted  by  its 
simplicity,  perspicuity,  precision,  and  detiniteness,  with 
all  its  awkwardness,  for  the  associations  of  every  day  life. 
The  Chaldee  or  eastern  Aramaic,  known  to  us  from  its 
Jewish  monuments  (Daniel,   Ezra,   the  Targums,  etc.), 
differs  frequently  from  the  Syriac  in  the  province  both 
of   the   grammar   and   of   the   lexicon.     The  S3Tiac  or 
western   Aramaic,    possessed   a   considerable  literature 
from  the  middle  of  the  second  centurj-  and  onwards  to 
the    thirteenth,    being    especialh'    rich    in    works    on 
theology  and  ecclesiastical  histor3^     Its  most  flourishing 
center  was  Edessa. 

The  Assyrian  or  Assyro-Babylonian  language,  belong- 
ing also  to  the  North  Shemitic  grouj:)  dates  back  to  a  re- 
mote antiquity,  and  strongly  resembles  the  Ilebi-ew. 
It  continued  in  use  until,  like  the  Hebrew  and  Phoeni- 
cian, it  was  supplanted  by  the  Aramaic,  and  became 
lost.  Its  rediscovery  or  decipherment  was  made  possi- 
ble by  the  help  of  trilingual  inscriptions,  just  as  the  de- 
cipherment of  the  Egyptian  hierogl}'])hics  was  made  by 
the  help  of  the  trilingual  Rosetta  stone  discovered  in 
1799.  The  system  of  Assyrian  writing  was  originally 
like  the  Egyptian,  hieroglyphic  and  jMctoi-ial.  The 
[2] 


18  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Assyrian  characters  are  composed  of  wedges ;  hence  the 
name  cuneiform  (from  cuneiis  =  wedge) .  These  wedges 
are  both  single  and  donble,  and  as  to  position  are  hoii- 
zontal,  i^erpendicnlar  and  sloping.  The  characters  con- 
tain from  one  to  twenty  wedges  each,  and  represent 
either  syllables  or  words.  These  are  ideograms,  i.  e., 
signs  of  objects  or  ideas,  and  phonograms,  /.  e.,  signs 
for  sounds.  The  Assj-rian  literature  is  considerable  and 
is  inscribed  on  bricks,  prisms,  slabs,  statues,  obelisks, 
walls  of  temples  and  palaces,  etc.  The  oldest  known 
writing  belongs  to  the  time  of  Sargon  T.  about  B.  C.  3800. 

To  the  Aramaic  or  North  Shemitic  group  belong  also  the 
Samaritan  and  the  Palmyrene. 

The  Samaritans  were  a  mixed  people,  arising  from  the 
fusion  of  the  Israelites  who  remained  in  the  land  after 
the  breaking  u\)  of  the  kingdom  of  Israel  and  the  depor- 
tation of  its  inhabitants  by  the  Assyrians,  with  the  for- 
eign Aramaean  colonists  who  were  planted  there  by  the 
conquerors.  Not  only  the  people,  but  also  the  language 
is  mixed.  That  is,  the  Samaritan  occuijies  an  interme- 
diate position  in  respect  to  Hebrew  and  Aramaic,  and  is 
marked  especially  by  changes  in  the  gutterals,  and  b}^ 
the  large  number  of  non-Shemitic  words  it  contains. 
The  Samaritan  literature  is  confined  to  the  Samaritan 
Pentateuch,  the  Samaritan  Targum,  and  certain  Chron- 
icles, Liturgies,  and  Hj^mns. 

The  Palmj^rene  is  known  to  us  in  the  Palmyrene 
inscriptions  of  the  ruins  of  Palmyra  or  Tadmor.  Tlie 
inscriptions  are  chiefly  bilingual,  in  an  Aramaic  much 
like  the  common  dialect,  the  date  of  the  earliest  being 
A,  D.  49. 

The  Mandeans  dwelt  in  the  vicinitj^  of  the  Tigris  and 
Euphrates,  while  the  Nabatheans  extended  from  the 
North  Ax'abian  or  Syrian  desert  south  to  Petra  and  the 


INTRODUCTION     OUTLINES.  19 

Gulf  of  .Vkaba.     Tlu' launuaiic   is  closely  alli<'(l   to  llic 
Syriac. 

The  Egyptian  Aramaic  apitroxiinalcs  Ihc  (lialdcc. 

X.— The  Arabic  or  Sonth  Shemitic. 

Of  all  the  Sheinitie  toiij»ues  the  Ai'aluc  is  ilic  most 
opulent,  tlie  most  loi>ieal,  the  most  widely  dilTused,  and 
the  most  important  in  the  study  of  the  other  Shemitie 
languages.  It  is  so  on  account  of  its  antiquity,  its 
purity,  its  attinity,  its  living  character,  its  immense  lit- 
erature, its  fertilit}^  in  all  directions,  and  its  logical 
structure  and  development.  Arabic  writings  antedat- 
ing the  ^luhammadan  and  Christian  eras  exhibit  a  lan- 
guage already  perfect  in  form  and  application.  The 
Arabic  retains  more  that  is  common  to  all  the  Shemitic 
languages  than  does  any  other  Shemitic  language.  Not 
onl}^  separate  nouns,  but  the  radical  materials  of  lan- 
guage, such  as  numerals,  prepositions,  pronouns,  etc. ; 
and  not  onl}^  separate  verbs,  but  grammatical  inflections, 
show  the  great  antiquity  of  the  Arabic  in  which  they 
have  been  preserved,  while  becoming  lost  in  other 
Shemitic  branches.  The  Hebrew  of  the  Pentateuch, 
and  the  Assyrian  as  it  appears  to  us  even  in  the  oldest 
inscriptions,  show  greater  signs  of  linguistic  impairment 
and  disintegration  than  does  the  post-classical  Arabic. 
In  the  rejection  of  the  short  vowels  at  the  end  of  a 
word;  in  the  disappearance  of  many  varieties  of  infec- 
tion; in  the  loss  of  an  earlier  wealth  of  forms  and  sig- 
nitications,  by  assimilation,  substitutions  and  omissions, 
the  Hebrew  and  other  Shemitic  tongues  have  suffered 
loss,  while  the  Arabic  has  remained  pure  and  rich  in  all 
these  respects.  The  remarkable  afhnity  between  the 
Arabic  and  Hebrew  is  well  known.  No  two  Shemitic 
tongues  are  so  closely  related.     More  than  two-thirds  of 


20  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

tlie  Hebrew  roots  are  to  be  found  in  the  Arabic  under 
corresponding  letters.  The  proportion  is  much  greater 
if  we  allow  for  the  changes  of  the  weak  and  cognate 
letters.  In  fact  over  ninet}'  per  cent,  of  Hebrew  and 
Arabic  words  have  a  common  origin.  The  Arabic  con- 
tains by  far  the  larger  proportion  of  the  roots  that  are 
common  to  all  the  Shemitic  languages.  In  the  copious- 
ness of  its  vocabular}^,  in  the  fertility  of  its  literature  of 
all  kinds  the  Arabic  surpasses  almost  all  tongues.  Es- 
pecially in  its  grammatical  and  lexical  laws  for  linguistic 
construction  and  development  is  the  Arabic  of  greatest 
richness  and  importance.  No  Shemitic  tongue  is  so 
important,  and  in  some  cases  absolutely  essential  to  the 
student  of  the  Old  Testament  Scrij)tures,  not  only  in 
respect  to  grammar  and  lexicon,  but  also  in  respect  to 
exegesis  and  interpretation. 

To  the  Arabic  or  South  Shemitic  grouj)  belongs  also 
the  Himyaritic,  or  Himyaritic  Arabic  of  the  south  which 
dates  back  many  centuries  B.  C,  and  still  exists  archa- 
ically in  the  monumental  inscrij)tions  of  Yemen  and 
Hadramaut. 

To  the  Arabic  belongs  also  the  Ethiopic  (called 
Geez)  in  Abyssinia,  a  branch  of  the  Himj'aritic,  simpler 
in  its  structure  than  the  Arabic,  and  in  general  use  in 
Abyssinia  as  a  written  language  until  the  end  of  the 
sixteenth  century,  when  it  was  supplanted  by  the 
Tigre  and  Amharic  dialects. 


Literature. — KeiVs  Introduction  to  the  Old  Testament. 
Bleek's  Introduction  to  the  Old  Testcunent.  Harmmi's  Introduc- 
tion to  the  Holy  Scriptures.  Schaff's  Theological  Propcedeutic. 
Weidner's  Exegetical  Theology.  BisselVs  Biblical  Antiquities. 
Briggs'  Biblical  Study.  Clarke's  Semitic  Alphabets.  Sayce's 
Fresh  Light  from  the  Ancient  Moimnients.  Drysdale's  Early 
Bible  Songs.     Bible  Cyclopccdias,  etc. 


Introduction  Outlines 


OF 


OLD   TESTAMENT  BOOKS, 


GENESIS. 


I.  Name.— In  Hebrew  the  name  of  the  Book  is  taken 
from  the  first  word  of  the  first  verse,  viz.,  Braysheeth 
=  In  a  beginning.  The  name  Genesis  comes  from  the 
LXX  (Septuagint)  Version,  and  is  derived  from  the 
Greek  rendering  of  Gen.  2 : 4,  the  particular  word  being 
Geneseos  ==  Genesis  =  Generations. 

II.  Position.— The  first  of  the  sacred  canonical  Books, 
called  the  Bible ;  the  first  of  the  five  Books  of  Moses, 
called  the  Pentateuch ;  and  the  first  of  the  six  Books 
comi:>osed  of  the  Pentateuch  and  the  Book  of  Joshua, 
called  the  Hexateuch.  Standing  at  the  head  of  the 
Canon,  of  the  Hexateuch,  and  of  the  Pentateuch,  Gene- 
sis is  introductoiy  to  all  these,  not  only  according  to 
position  but  also  according  to  its  general  theme  or  sub- 
ject matter. 

III.  Theme.— As  its  name  implies  the  Book  of  Genesis 
is  the  Book  of  Beginnings.  It  treats  of  the  beginnings 
of  the  human  race,  and  the  beginnings  of  the  Hebrew 
Theocrac}^  In  the  main  it  treats  of  the  beginnings  of 
the  Hebrew  Theocracy.  In  doing  so  it  traces  the  ances- 
try of  Israel  back  to  the  lirst  appearance  of  man  upon 


22  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

the  earth,  while  it  also  defines  the  position  and  relation 
of  the  nationality  of  Israel  to  the  other  nations  of  the 
earth. 

IV.  Authorship.— Two  principal  views  obtain  in  re- 
gard to  the  authorshij)  of  Genesis  and  the  Pentateuch. 

1st.  The  more  recent  vicAv  of  the  Higher  Criticism 
which  assigns  a  composite  authorship  to  the  Hexateuch. 
Accordino:  to  this  view  the  Hexateuch  is  to  be  ascribed 
to  different  writers,  sources,  documents,  in  the  main  as 
follows : 

(a)  P  =  Priest's  Code  : — represents  the  supposed 
original  source  of  the  Hexateuch :  begins  with  Gen. 
1:1;  comprises  as  its  most  essential  part  those  law^s  of 
Exodus,  Leviticus  and  Numbers  that  relate  to  the  priest- 
hood and  the  Mosaic  institutions  generallj^:  embraces 
about  one  half  of  the  matter  of  this  part  of  the  Bible. 

(h)  J  =  Jehovist: — begins  at  Gen.  2:4^  "in  the  day 
that  Jehovah,"  etc. :  regarded  as  being  partial  to  the 
title  of  Jehovah  for  God,  as  the  preceding  document,  P, 
is  to  Elohim  :  its  matter  for  the  most  part  historical, 
though  with  a  tendency  to  prophecy. 

(c)  J'  =  First  Jehovist  : — does  not,  by  itself,  stand 
for  a  separate  document,  but  simply  for  an  earlier  source 
of  J:  begins  with  Gen.  4: 16''  "  and  dwelt  in  the  land  of 
Xod,"  etc. 

((;)  E  =  Elohist  : — appears  as  an  independent  docu- 
ment, first  in  Gen.  Chap.  20,  though  afterwards  occupy- 
ing mucli  space,  and  largely  supplanting  P :  the  matter 
is  for  the  most  part  historical,  like  J,  though,  like  P, 
using  the  title  Elohim  for  God,  whence  its  name. 

(e)  JE  =  Jehovist — Elohist  : — matter  embracing  an 
alleged  combination  of  the  two  documents  J  and  E  in 
such  a  manner  that  they  are  no  longer  separable :  appears 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  23 

first  in  Gen.  15 : 1-3 :  forms  the  basis  of  Dt.  =  Deuter- 
onom}^ 

(/)  D  and  Dt  =  Deuteronomist — Deuteronomy  : — 
occupies  the  body  of  tlie  Book  by  that  name :  based  upon 
J  E :  notices  of  P,  including  11,  introduced  towards  the 
end  of  the  Book  by  one  of  the  final  redactors :  composed 
before  J  E  and  P  were  united  into  a  single  work. 

(g)  H  =  Code  of  Holiness: — an  older  body  of 
priestl}^  legislation  incorporated  in  P :  lies  at  the  basis  of 
Lev.  Chaps.  17-26:  included  in  Dt.  where  notices  of  P 
are  introduced. 

(7i)  D*^  =  Deuteronomic  Editor  : — enters  into  the 
Book  of  Joshua:  basis  of  Joshua  J  E,  afterwards  P com- 
bined with  it :  before  J  E  was  combined  with  P,  the  mat- 
ter passed  through  the  hands  of  a  writer  imbued  with 
the  spirit  of  Deuteronomy,  and  emphasizing  the  Mosaic 
ordinances,  who  also  expanded  the  matter  at  hand,  mak- 
ing Deuteronomic  additions  of  his  own. 

(/)  R  ==  Redactor  : — first  appears  in  a  single  word, 
Elohim,  in  Gen.  2:4'':  used  for  every  sort  of  editorial 
addition  and  change,  earlj^  or  late,  made  by  an  indefinite 
number  of  editors  or  redactors  and  found  in  any  of  the 
alleged  sources,  including  the  transferrence  of  matter 
from  one  source  to  another. 

It  is  further  to  be  observed  in  regard  to  this  document- 
hypothesis. 

(a)  That  the  three  principal  original  sources  or  docu- 
ments of  the  Hexateuch  are  considered  to  be  J.  E.  P. 

(h)  That  these  three  principal  sources  circulated  at 
first  as  an  independent  work,  and  so  became  more  or 
less  altered  before  tliey  were  combined  together  in  their 
present  form. 

(c)  That  as  respects  the  age  of  the  several  sources,  the 


24  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

general  tliough  not  unanimous  opinion  is  that  their 
chronological  order  is  J.  E.  P.,  but  that  none  of  them 
took  fixed  form  till  long  after  tlie  Mosaic  period.  The 
usual  date  assigned  to  J  and  E  is  about  800-750  B.  C, 
while  P  is  regarded  as  being  Post-exilian. 

(d)  That  after  the  final  redaction  there  is  still  an  in- 
dication of  glosses,  l.  e. ,  of  matter  that  found  its  way 
into  the  text,  and  first  appearing  in  Gen.  2: 19  with  the 
words  "  living  creature." 

{e)  That  the  matter  of  Gen.  Chap.  14  remains  un- 
classified with  any  of  the  other  docnments,  but  is  gen- 
erally assigned  to  the  editor  who  worked  it  over  on  the 
basis  of  the  E  document. 

The  principal  arguments  adduced  in  support  of  this 
document-hypothesis  as  to  the  origin  of  the  Hexateuch 
are  chiefly  four,  viz. , 

(a)  Differences  in  the  use  of  the  divine  names. 

(6)  Differences  in  respect  to  language,  vocabulary  and 
style. 

(c)  Differences  in  point  of  view  relating  to  theological 
and  other  matter. 

(cZ)  Differences  in  the  accounts  given  of  one  and  the 
same  event  or  series  of  events. 

2nd.  The  older  and  more  generally  accepted  view  is 
that  the  authorship  of  the  Pentateuch  is,  in  the  main, 
to  be  ascribed  to  Moses.  The  principal  lines  of  argument 
pursued  in  supporting  this  view  are  the  following:— 

(a)  The  argument  from  scripture : — that  is,  the  testi- 
mony offered  by  the  Pentateuch  itself,  and  by  the  other 
portions  of  the  Scriptures  to  the  Mosaic  authorship  of 
the  Pentateuch, — a  testimony  ver}^  diversified  as  to  na- 
ture and  large  in  amount. 

(h)  The   argument   from   language: — as,    e.    (/.,     tlie 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  25 

archaic  character  of  the  language  in  respect  to  words, 
forms,  expressions ;  the  style  in  which  the  Pentateuchal 
laws  are  framed,  and  the  terms  in  which  they  are 
couched,  attesting  their  Mosaic  origin. 

{c)  The  argument  from  literary  form  :— that  is,  there 
is  in  the  Pentateuch  a  demonstrable  unity  of  structure, 
and  such  an  interdependence  of  parts  as  requires  a  sin- 
gle rather  than  a  fragmentary  origin  to  account  for  it. 

((/)  The  argument  from  histor}^: — such,  e.  g.y  as  that 
relating  to  chronological  order  and  data ;  the  nature  and 
cotemporaneousness  or  proximity  of  events;  events  in 
the  age  immediately  succeeding  the  age  of  Moses  and 
presupposing  the  Mosaic  legislation  and  history,  etc. 

(e)  The  argument  from  doctrinal  development: — that 
is,  the  doctrinal  teaching  of  the  Pentateuch  is  elemen- 
tary, fundamental,  and  is  expanded  in  the  Scriptures 
following ;  hence  it  follows  that  the  Pentateuch  antedates 
the  rest  of  the  Old  Testament,  and  lies  at  the  basis  of 
the  divine  doctrine  more  full}^  unfolded  in  the  Books 
that  follow. 

(/)  The  argument  from  Egyptology: — that  is,  the 
large  and  accurate  knowledge  disj^layed  in  the  Penta- 
teuch upon  Egyptian  subjects  and  affairs  requires  such 
a  person  as  Moses  is  represented  to  be  for  its  author. 

V.  Divisions.— According  to  its  subject  matter  the 
Book  of  Genesis,  may  be  regarded  as  having  two  general 
divisions  as  follows : — 

1.  Chs.  1-11.     The  beginnings  of  the  human  race. 

2.  Chs.  12-50.  The  beginnings  of  the  Hebrew  The- 
ocracy. 

The  Book  of  Genesis  may  be  further  subdivided  upon 
the  basis  of  the  principal  characters  that  appear  in  this 
history  of  beginnings,  as  follows : — 


26  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

1.  Chs.  1-3.  Adam,  the  first  ancestor  of  the  human 
race. 

2.  Chs.  4-9.  Noah,  the  second  ancestor  of  the  human 
race. 

3.  Chs.  10 : — 25 :  18.  Abraham,  the  first  ancestor  of 
the  Hebrew  Theocracy. 

4.  Chs.  25:19-35:29.  Isaac,  the  second  ancestor  of 
the  Hebrew  Theocracy. 

5.  Chs.  36-50.  Jacob,  the  third  ancestor  of  the 
Hebrew  Theocracy. 

VI.  Contents.— Ch.  1.  Creation  of  heaven  and  earth ; 
creation  of  vegetable,  animal  and  human  life;  man, 
male  and  female,  and  his  dominion. 

Ch.  2.  Review  of  the  act  of  creation;  location  of 
man  in  Eden;  man  and  woman. 

Ch.  3.  Man's  temptation,  fall,  curse  and  expulsion, 
but  including  a  promise  of  redemption. 

Ch.  4.  Descendants  of  primitive  man;  Cain  and 
Abel  and  Abel's  murder  b}'  Cain;  the  line  of  righteous 
Abel  perpetuated  in  Seth,  third  son  of  Adam  and  Eve. 

Ch.  5.  Descendants  of  Seth,  traced  in  genealogical 
succession,  to  Noah  and  his  three  sons,  Shem,  Ham  and 
Japheth. 

Ch.  6.  The  multiplication  and  corruption  of  human- 
ity. The  divine  judgment  and  the  preijaration  for  its 
execution.  Noah,  the  one  righteous  man  instructed  to 
build  the  ark. 

Chs.  7-8.  The  Deluge;  its  coming,  duration  and  ces- 
sation. Deliverance  of  the  inmates  of  the  ark,  and 
Noah's  sacrifice. 

Ch.  9.  God's  blessing  of,  and  covenant  with  Noah. 
Noah's,  sons;  the  curse  of  Canaan,  the  son  of  Ham, 
and  the  blessing  of  Shem  and  Japheth.     Noah's  age. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  27 

Chs.  10:1—11:0.  Sons  of  Xoali  and  llio  nations 
sprnng  frojn  tlioin.  The  dispersion  of  mankind  oxer  tlie 
earth. 

Ch.  11:10-32.  Line  of  Shem  to  Terah,  the  father 
of  Abraham.  (Tenerations  of  Terali  and  liis  death  in 
Haran. 

Ch.  12.  God's  call  of  and  covenant  with  Abraham. 
The  famine  in  Canaan,  and  the  migration  of  Abraham, 
with  Sarah  his  wife  to  Egypt.  Abraham  summoned  be- 
fore Pharaoh. 

Ch.  13.  Abraham's  return  to  Canaan.  Separation 
of  Abraham  and  Lot,  son  of  his  brother  Ilaran.  God's 
renewal  of  the  covenant  with  Abraham. 

Ch.  14.  Abraham's  war  witli  the  heathen  kings  for 
the  deliverance  of  Lot.  Melchizedek  greets  and  blesses 
Abraham.     Abraham  and  the  king  of  Sodom. 

Ch.  15.  God,  the  defender  of  Abraliam,  the  cham- 
pion of  the  faith.  Abraham's  desire  for  an  lieir,  followed 
by  God's  promise  that  his  seed  shall  be  as  the  stars  of 
heaven ;  a  divine  proof  given  and  the  divine  promise 
repeated. 

Ch.  16.  God's  promise  renewed  to  Abraham.  Change 
of  the  name  Abram  to  Abraham.  The  covenant  of 
faith  and  the  sign  of  the  covenant,  circumcision.  Name 
of  Sarai  changed  to  Sarah.  Ishmael  blessed,  but  Isaac 
the  seed  of  promise. 

Chs.  18,19.  Abraham  at  Mamre.  Theopluuiy.  The 
promise  of  a  son  to  Abraliam  and  Sarah's  doubt.  Judg- 
ment pronounced  upon  Sodom  and  Gomorrali.  Abia- 
liam's  intercession.  Fall  of  tlie  cities  of  llie  i)lain. 
Lot's  deliverance.  Lot  and  his  daughters.  Moab  and 
Ammon. 

Chs.   20,  21.     iVl)rahaiH  and  .Vl)iinelech,  king  of  Gerar. 


28  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Sarah's  exposure  and  preservation.  Abraham  intercedes 
for  Abinielech.  Birth  of  Isaac.  Expulsion  of  Ishmael. 
Treaty  of  peace  at  Beersheba,  with  Abinielech. 

Ch.  22:1-19.  The  trial  of  Abraham's  faith.  The 
sealing  both  of  Abraham's  faith  and  the  divine  promise. 

Chs.  22:20—23:20.  Descendants  of  Nahor,  Abra- 
ham's brother.     Death  and  burial  of  Sarah. 

Chs.  24: — 25:10.  Abraham's  instructions  as  to  the 
marriage  of  Isaac.  Isaac's  marriage  to  Rebekah.  Abra- 
ham's second  marriage.  Keturah  and  her  sons.  Death 
and  burial  of  Abraham. 

Ch.   25 :  11-34.     Isaac  and  Ishmael.     Jacob  and  Esau. 

Ch.  26.  Isaac  in  Gerar.  The  Abrahamic  iDromise 
renewed  to  him.  Exposure  of  Rebekah.  Isaac  yields 
to  the  Philistines;  migrates  to  Beer-Sheba.  Treaty  of 
peace  with  Abinielech.     Esau's  marriage. 

Chs.  27: — 28:9.  Isaac  favors  his  firstborn,  Esau. 
Rebekah  and  Jacob  deprive  him  of  the  theocratic  bless- 
ing. Esau's  blessing.  His  hosj)itality  to  Jacob.  Prepa-- 
ration  for  Jacob's  flight  and  his  journe}^  with  a  view  to 
effecting  a  theocratic  marriage. 

Ch.  28 :  10-22.  Jacob's  journey  to  Mesopotamia. 
The  vision  of  the  heavenly  ladder. 

Chs.  29  :— 30 :  24.  Jacob  and  Laban's  younger  daughter 
Rachel.  Contracts  between  Laban  and  Jacob.  Jacob's 
involuntary  marriage  with  Leah.  The  double  marriage. 
Leah's  sons.  Rachel's  dissatisfaction.  The  concubines. 
Children  of  Jacob  until  the  birth  of  Joseph,  Rachel's 
firstborn. 

Chs.  30:25 — 31:55.  New  treaty  between  Jacob  and 
Laban.  Jacob  commanded  of  God  to  return  home. 
Jacob's  flight.  Laban's  persecution.  An  alliance  con- 
cluded.    Departure. 

Chs.   32: — 33:10.     Jacob's   journey   home.     Met   b}^ 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  20 

(tO(Vs  host  of  aiii>els.  His  fear  of  Ksaii.  His  wrostliiiii- 
witli  (tO(1.  His  iiaiiie  changed  to  Tsraol.  His  reconcilia- 
tion with  Esau. 

Chs.  33  :  17—35  :  -31.  Jacob  in  C^anaan,  first  in  Succoth, 
then  in  Shecheni.  Dinaii.  Simeon  and  Levi.  Fanati- 
cism. Jacob  leaves  for  Bethel.  Jcnirney  from  Bethel  to 
beyond  Bethlehem.    Benjamin's  birth.    Death  of  Rachel. 

Ch.  35:  "32-29.  Reuben's  sin.  Jacob' sons.  Here- 
turns  to  Isaac  at  Hebron.    Death  and  burial  of  Isaac. 

Ch.   36.     The  i>enerations  of  Esau. 

Ch.  37.  Jacob  and  Joseph.  Joseph's  dream.  Joseph 
sold  into  Egypt. 

Ch.  38.  Judah's  temporary  separation  from  his 
brothers.     Judah's  sons.     Tamar. 

Chs.  39 : — 41 :  52.  Joseph  in  the  house  of  Potiphar. 
In  prison.  Interprets  the  dreams  of  his  fellow  pi-isoners. 
Interf)rets  the  dreams  of  Pharaoh.  Is  promoted  to  the 
premiership  of  Egypt.  Marries  Asenath,  daughter  of 
the  priest  of  On.     Manasseh  and  Ephraim  born. 

Chs.  41 :  53 — 45 :  28.  The  seven  years  of  famine.  First 
journey  of  Jacob's  sons  to  Egypt.  Second  journey  with 
Benjamin.  Joseph  makes  himself  known.  The  return 
to  Jacob,  and  his  joy. 

Chs.  46,  47.  Israel  goes  to  Egypt  with  his  sons,  and 
settles  in  Goshen.  Jacob  before  Pharaoh.  Joseph's 
political  economj^     Jacob  arranges  for  his  burial. 

Chs.  48,  49.  Jacob's  illness.  He  blesses  the  sons  of 
Joseph.  His  blessing  on  his  own  sons.  Judali  and  his 
brethren.     Jacob's  last  charge,  and  his  death. 

Ch.  50.  Days  of  mourning.  Jacob's  funeral.  Jos- 
eph's generous  treatment  of  his  bi-others.  Joseph's  last 
charge  and  death. 

VII.  Doctrine.— The  doctrines  made  prominent  in  the 
Book  of  Genesis  are 


30  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

(a)  The  creation  of  man  by  God. 

(h)  The  introduction  of  sin  and  its  consequences  into 
the  world  by  the  fall  of  man. 

(c)  The  divine  ground-plans  and  promises  for  the 
redemption  of  man. 

VIII.  Messianic— The  Messianic  prophecies  in  the 
Book  of  Genesis  are  as  follows : 

1.  Gen.  3:13-15.  The  Protevangelium.  The  Seed 
of  the  woman. 

2.  Gen.  5:28-32.  Lamech-Noah.  Line  of  Seth. 
The  Comforter. 

3.  Gen.  9:18-27.  Salvation  through  the  race  of 
Shem. 

4.  Gen.  12:1-3.  The  call  and  blessing  of  Abraham 
out  of  Shem. 

5.  Gen.  2G:l-5.  The  covenant  with  Isaac  of  Abra- 
ham's sons. 

6.  Gen.  28:10-17.  The  covenant  with  Jacob  of 
Isaac's  sons. 

7.  Gen.  49:8-12.  The  Blessing  of  Judah  out  of  Jac- 
ob's twelve  sons. 

See  Messianic  under  Exodus. 


Literature.  — 2.  Introductions.  KeiVs  Introduction  to  the 
Old  Testament ;  Harman's  Introduction  to  the  Holy  ScyHptures ; 
Driver's  Introduction  to  the  Literature  of  the  Old  Testament ;  and 
the  commentaries.  2.  Commentaries.  Lange's  Commentary; 
Delitzsch  Commentar  ueber  die  Genesis ;  Keil,  in  Keil  and  Del- 
itzsch  series;  Speaker's  Commentary.  3.  Criticism.  Green's 
Moses  and  the  Prophets,  and  the  Higher  Criticism  of  the  Penta- 
teuch. BisselVs  The  Pentateuch  its  Origin  and  Structure,  and 
Genesis  in  Colors;  Davidson's  Introduction  to  the  Old  Testament ; 
Driver's  Introduction;  Brigg's  Higher  Criticism  of  the  Hexa- 
teuch  ;  -Sayce's  Higher  Criticism  and  the  Monuments ;  Zenos'  Ele- 
ments of  Higher  Criticism;  Anti-Higher  Criticism,  by  Drs.  Os. 
good,  Gi^een,  Chambers,  and  others. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


31 


gp:nealogical  tables  to  genesis. 

I.  The  Antediluvian  Patriarchs. 
Table  to  Gen.  Ch.  5,  Comp.  9:  39.     According-  to  the  Hebrew  Text. 


Names  of 

Age  at  birth 

Remainder 

Whole  dur- 

Year of 

Year  of 

the 

of 

of 

ation  of 

birth 

death 

Ten  Patriarchs 

Firstborn. 

Life. 

800 

lafe. 

A.M. 

A.  M. 

Adam, 

130 

930 

1 

930 

Seth, 

105 

807 

912 

130 

1042 

Enosh, 

90 

815 

905 

235 

1140 

Kenan, 

70 

840 

910 

325 

1235 

Mahalalel, 

65 

830 

895 

395 

1290 

Jared, 

162 

800 

962 

460 

1422 

Enoch, 

65 

300 

365 

622 

987 

Methuselah, 

187 

782 

969 

687 

1656 

Lamech, 

182 

595 

777 

874 

1651 

Noah, 

500 

450 

950 

1056 

2006 

To  the  Flood  =  100  years. 

From  Adam  to  the  Flood  =  1656  years. 

1656  A.  M.  =  Shem's  98th  year. 

II.  The  Postdiluvian  Patriarchs. 

Table  to  Gen.  Ch.  11.  Comp.  Chs.  21,  25,  29,  31,  35,  47. 
According  to  the  Hebrew  Text. 


Names  of 

Age  at  birth 

Remainder 

Wliole  dur- 

Year of 

Year  of 

the 

of 

of 

ation  of 

birth 

death 

Patriarchs. 

Firstborn. 

Life. 

Life. 

A.M. 

A.  M. 

Shem, 

100 

500 

600 

1558 

2158 

Arpachshad 

35 

403 

438 

1658 

2097 

Shelah, 

30 

403 

433 

1693 

2126 

Eber, 

34 

430 

464 

1723 

2187 

Peleg, 

30 

209 

239 

1757 

1996 

Ren, 

32 

207 

239 

1787 

2026 

Serug, 

30 

200 

230 

1819 

2045 

Nahor, 

29 

119 

148 

1849 

1997 

Terah, 

70 

135 

205 

1878 

2083 

Abram, 

100 

75 

175 

1948 

2123 

Isaac, 

60 

120 

180 

2048 

2228 

Jacob, 

65 

82 

147 

2108 

2255 

31  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


EXODUS. 

I.  Ufarae.—  We-elleh  shemoth  =  And  these  the  names. 
According  to  the  Jews  this  name  is  given  to  the  Book 
from  its  opening  words.  From  the  Ynlgate  we  have 
the  name  Exodus,  so  called  from  the  chief  event  related 
in  it,  /.  e.,  the  departure  of  the  Israelites  from  Egypt. 

II.  Position.— The  connection  between  the  Book  of 
Exodus  and  that  of  Genesis  is  close.  Exodus  continues 
the  historical  account  with  which  Genesis  closes.  In 
Genesis  God  enters  into  covenant  with  Abraham,  prom- 
ising him  that  his  posterity  shall  inherit  the  land  of 
Canaan,  and  that  in  his  seed  all  the  families  of  the 
earth  should  be  blessed.  In  the  same  Book,  however, 
this  promise  is  followed  by  the  statement  to  Abraham 
that  before  his  descendants  shall  possess  that  land, 
they  shall  be  strangers  in  another,  in  which  thej^  shall 
serve  and  be  afflicted,  that  this  nation  whom  they  served 
God  would  judge,  after  which  they  should  come  forth 
with  great  substance  in  the  fourth  generation.  To  this 
corresponds  the  first  chapter  of  Exodus,  and  thus  the 
connection. 

III.  Theme.— The  Book  treats  of  the  histor}^  of  the 
Israelites  as  a  nation  from  the  death  of  Joseph  to  the 
erection  of  the  Tabernacle  by  Moses  in  the  second  year 
of  the  Exodus.  It  opens  with  a  reference  to  Jacob's 
descent  into  Egypt,  after  which  follows  the  historical 
account  of  the  oppression  of  the  Israelites,  their  deliver- 
ance from  the  Egyptians  through  the  divinely  com- 
missioned Moses,  the  wanderings  in  the  desert,  the 
giving  of  the  law  from  Sinai,  the  instructions  for  build- 


INTRO  nUCTION     OUTLINES.  33 

ing  the  altars  of  saci-iiico  and  tlic  tabernacle,  and  various 
precepts. 

IV.  Authorship.— See  AnfJiorshii)  under  Genesis. 

V.  Divisions.— The  IJook  divides  itself  into  three 
principal  parts  which  may  be  respectively  titled — Bond- 
age, Redemption,  Establishment; — as  follows: 

1.  C1is.  1-11.  IJondage.  Events  preliminary  to  the 
deliveranc(^  of  the  Israelites  from  Egypt. 

'I.  Chs.  1  'I : — 11) :  'I.  liedemption.  The  last  ])lague,  tlie 
departure  of  the  Israelites  from  P^gypt,  and  their  jour- 
uej'  to  Sinai. 

3.  Chs.  19  :  3 — 40 :  3S.  Establishment.  Israel  at  Sinai. 
The  establisliment  of  the  Theocracy. 

VI.  Contents.-  1.  Chs.  1,  2.  Increase  of  Jacob's 
posterity  in  Egyi)t.  Measures  instituted  by  a  new  king- 
to  check  this  increase,  liirth,  education  and  flight  of 
Moses. 

2.  Chs.  3,  4.  The  divine  vaW  of  Moses  to  be  the  de- 
liverer of  Israel,  and  his  return  to  Egypt  in  obedience 
to  this  call. 

3.  Chs.  5:1-21.  The  first  attempt  on  the  part  of 
Moses  and  Aaron  to  prevail  upon  Pharoah  to  let  the 
Israelites  go  results  oidy  in  increasing  the  Israelites'  bur- 
dens. 

4.  Chs.  5  :  22 — 7  :  7.  Additional  preparation  of  Moses 
and  Aaron  for  their  mission,  together  with  a  table  of 
their  genealogies. 

5.  Chs.  7:8 — 11:10.  Narrative  of  the  successive  signs 
and  i:)lagues  b}'  which  the  deliverance  of  Israel  from 
Egypt  was  eifected. 

6.  Chs.  12,  13.  The  last  plague ;  the  departure  from 
Egypt.  The  institution  of  the  Passover,  and  the  feast 
of  Unleavened  Bread.     The  death  of  the  firstboi'ii,      The 

[3J 


34  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

journey  from  Ramses  to  Suceoth.  Tlie  law  respecting 
the  dedication  of  the  firstborn.  The  march  from  Siic- 
coth  to  Etham. 

7.  Chs.  14,  lo.  The  passage  of  the  Red  Sea.  Moses' 
song   of   triumph.     The  journey  to  Marah  and  Elim. 

8.  Chs.  10-18.  The  journey  from  Elim  to  Sinai. 
The  quails  and  manna ;  the  miraculous  suppl}^  of  water 
at  Rephidim.  The  conflict  with  Amalek.  The  arrival  of 
Jethro  and  the  council  given  by  him  to  Moses  respecting 
the  civil  government  of  the  people. 

9.  Chs.  10  :— 24: 11.  The  establishment  of  the  Theoc- 
racy at  Sinai  on  the  basis  of  the  Ten  Commandments, 
and  of  a  code  of  laws  regulating  the  social  life  and  relig- 
ious observances  of  the  i:)eople  called  the  Book  of  the  Cov- 
enant; followed  by  the  promise  of  an  angel  to  guide  the 
people,  and  the  people's  ratification  of  the  Covenant. 

30.  Chs.  24:12— 31:18.  Instructions  to  Moses  on 
Sinai  respecting  the  tabernacle,  the  ark,  the  mercj^  seat, 
the  altar  of  burnt  offering,  the  consecration  of  Aaron 
and  his  sons  as  priests,  the  altar  of  incense,  the  laver, 
the  holy  oil,  the  selection  of  Bezaleel  and  Oholiab  to  ex- 
ecute the  skilled  work  that  w  as  necessarj^  and  the  deliv- 
erance to  Moses  of  the  two  Tables  of  the  Law. 

11.  Chs.  32-34.  The  incident  of  the  golden  calf;  the 
intercession  of  Moses  on  behalf  of  the  people,  and  the 
renewal  of  the  covenant. 

12.  Chs.  35,  40.  The  construction  of  the  Tabernacle 
and  its  appurtenances  in  accordance  with  the  direc- 
tions given,  and  its  erection  on  the  first  day  of  the  second 
year  of  the  Exodus. 

VII.  Doctrine.— The  doctrines  more  prominently 
brought  out  in  the  Book  of  Exodus  are 

1.   Redemption  through  the  shedding  of  blood. 


INTKODUCTTON     OUTf.lNES.  35 

•3.    The  lluMX'ralic  oriiani/at  ion  of  llic  riMlrcined. 

0.  Divine  law  i'e(iuirini>'  iiiaiTs  obedienee. 

4.   Divine  ordinances  reiiulatinii'  man's  woiship. 

VIII.  Messianic— The  liook  of  Kxodns  contains  no 
direct  Messianic  Pi'o])liecy.  Tiiere  is  un(iiiestional)ly, 
however,  a  strong  Messianic  (dement  of  a  typoloiiical 
character.     Tlie  tyi)es  of  Scripture  may  be  (dassilied  as 

1.  Personal;  that  is,  Scriptur(^  chai'acters  whose  lives 
illustrate  some  truth  or  principle  of  redemj)tion;  and  in 
so  far  point  forward  to  the  personal  Redeemer,  who  is 
the  antitvpe.  Such,  c.  g.,  are  Adam,  Melchizedek, 
Abraham  in  the  liook  of  (Genesis,  and  Moses,  Aaron, 
the  Priest  in  the  I>ook  of  Exodus. 

2.  Historical ;  that  is,  where  great  historical  events 
are  made  to  foreshadow  the  greater  things  that  are  to 
come;  as,  e.  (/.,  the  deliverance  from  Egypt,  the  wilder- 
ness journe}^  the  conquest  of  Canaan,  etc. 

o.  Institutional;  such,  e.  g.,  as  the  passover,  the 
priesthood,  the  altar,  the  sacrifices,  etc. 

The  types  of  Genesis  are  for  the  most  part  personal 
and  historical;  while  those  of  Exodus  are  found  under 
all  three  heads  of  the  classification.  Thus  we  liave  per- 
sonal types,  as,  e.  f/.,  Moses  and  Aaron  ;  historical  types, 
as,  e.  (/.,  tiie  deliverance  from  Egypt,  and  tlu' wilderness 
journey;  institutional  types;  as,  e.  </.,  the  priesthood, 
and  the  sacrifices.  The  great  truth,  doctrine  taught  by 
the  types  of  Exodus  is — redemption  to  God  b}'  blood  and 
through  a  personal  Redeemer.  The  blood  of  the  pas- 
chal lamb  is  at  the  basis  af  Israers  relation  with  (4od, 
while  it  also  prefigured  the  redemi)tion  that  Christ  was 
to  accomplish.     Ex.  15:13,  1(5,  17;  1  Cor.  5:7. 


Literature.  -  CV>///7;/(;'y/^n'n^s  ;  Lfinge  :  Keil  (ind  Dc/itzsch  : 
Speaker  s  Commeutarn.  On  Iii/nxlnrfioii  tiinJ  Criticism  iice  Lit- 
erature under  Genesis. 


36  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

TABLE    OF    SACRED    SEASONS,    FEASTS,    SACRIFICES. 

See  Ex.  Chs.  12,  13,  23,  34.     Lev.  Chs.  2,  4,  5,  6,  13,  14,  15,  17, 
19,  23.     Num.  Chs.  9,  15.  19,  28,  29.     Deut.  Ch.  16. 

I.  Sacred  Seasons  and  Feasts. 

1.  The  Sabbath.     Gen.  2:2,  3.     Ex.  20:8-11. 

(a)  The  Sabbatical  Month,  /.  e.,  7th  month. 

(b)  The  Sabbatical  Year,  i.  e.,  7th  year. 

(c)  The  Year  of  Jubilee,  i.  e.,  the  50th  year,  following  7X7. 

2.  The  Passover.     Ex.  Ch.  12. 

3.  The  Feast  of  Unleavened  Bread.  Ex.  Chs.  12,  13.  Lev.  23. 
Num.  28.     Deut.  16. 

4.  The  Feast  of  Weeks,  or  Pentecost.  Lev.  Chs.  15,  23.  Num. 
Ch.  28. 

5.  The  Feast  of  Tabernacles.     Lev.  Ch.  23.     Num.  Ch.  29. 

6.  The  New  Moon,  or  Trumpets.     Num.  10: 10. 

7.  The  Day  of  Atonement.  Ex.  Ch.  30.  Lev.  Chs.  16,  23. 
Num.  Ch.  29. 

8.  The  Feast  of  Purim.  One  of  the  later  feasts.  Esth.  3 :  7,  13 ; 
9:24,  27. 

9.  The  Feast  of  Dedication.  A  late  feast.  Dates  from  the  re- 
consecration  of  the  altar  and  temple  at  Jerusalem  after  their  de- 
filement by  Antiochus  Epiphanes. 

II.  Sacrifices.  Offerings,  etc. 

A.  Classified:  Animal  and  vegetable,  or  bloody  and  unbloody 
offerings. 

1.   The  Vegetable  Offerings :  included 

{a)  The  regular  meal  and  drink  offering.     See  below. 

{b)  The  first  sheaf  at  the  Passover. 

(c)  The  shew  bread,  and  the  pentecostal  loaves. 

B.  Animal  Sacrifices.     The  ceremony  of  offering  required 

(a)  The  presentation  of  the  victim, 

(b)  The  laying  on  of  hands  by  the  offerer. 

(c)  The  slaying  of  the  victim. 

{d)  The  sprinkling  of  the  blood  of  the  victim. 

(e)  The  burning  of  some  part  of  the  animal  on  the  altar. 

These  Animal  sacrifices  included 

1.  The  Burnt  Offering.     Lev.  Chs!  8,  9,  14,  etc. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  37 

2.  The  Peace  or  Thank  Offerini^-.     Two  kinds,    required  and 
voluntary. 

3.  The  Sin  Offering.     Lev.  Chs.  4,  5.     Ideas ;— atonement,  sat- 
isfaction, restitution. 

4.  The  Trespass  or  (luilt  Offering.     Idea;— atonement,  expia- 
tion.    Offered  for 

(a)  Unwitting  sin  as  to  "  holy  things."     Lev.  5:  15,  16. 
{b)  Unintentional  transgression  of  a  divine  command.     Lev 
5:17-19. 

(c)  Unjust  treatment  of  a  neighbor.     Lev.  6:2-7. 

(d)  Criminal  intercourse  indicated  in  Lev.  19:  20-22. 

(e)  In  the  ceremony  for  purifying  a  leper.     Lev.  Cli.  14. 
(/)  In  case  of  defilement  of  a  Nazarite.     Num.  6:  6-12. 

(g)  In  case  of  men  who  had  married  foreign  wives.    Ezra  10:19. 

C.  "Holy  "  and  "  Most  Holy  "  Offerings. 

1.  Most  Holy;  e.  g.,  burnt,  sin  and  trespass  offering,   and  the 
lambs  at  pentecost  for  a  public  peace  offering, 

2.  Holy;  e.  g.,  the  remaining  public  peace  offerings. 

D.  The  Meal  Offerings.     Two  kinds,  viz., 

1.  Those  constituting  offerings  of  themselves,  viz., 

(a)  The  offering  mentioned  in  Lev.  2:  1-3.     Voluntary. 

(b)  The  oblation  mentioned  in  Lev.  2  :  4.    Voluntary. 

(c)  Similar  offering  mentioned  in  Lev.  2:5,  6.     Voluntary. 

(d)  The  meal  offering  mentioned  in  Lev.  2:  7.     Voluntary. 

(e)  The  meal  offering  of  first  fruits.    Lev.  2  :  14-16.    Voluntary. 
(/)  The  meal  offering  of  jealousy.     Num.  Ch.  5.     Voluntary. 
(g)  The  sin  offering  of  poverty.     Lev.  5:11-13.     Required. 
(h)  The  consecration,  and  daily  offering  of  the  high  priest. 

Lev.  6 :  19-23.     Required. 

( 0  The  meal  ofering  in  purification  of  a  leper.     Lev.  14  :  10,  20. 
Required. 

2.  Those  brought  with  and  as  accompaniments  of  other  offer- 
ings, I.  e.,  with 

(a)  The  daily  morning  and  evening  sacrifices. 
(6)  The  additional  daily  festival  sacrifices  including  the  Sab- 
bath. 

(c)  The  burnt  offering  on  presenting  the  first  fruits  at  passover 
and  pentecost. 

(d)  The  burnt  and  sin  offerings  for  the  unwitting  sin  of  the 
congregation. 


38  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

(e)  The  Nazarite's  offering  upon  comi)leting  his  vow. 

E.  The  Daily  Sacrifices.     They  were 

{a)  A  burnt  offering  of  a  lamb  with  its  meal  offering. 
{b)  The  meal  offering  of  the  high  priest. 

(c)  The  offering  of  incense  at  the  altar  of  incense. 

(d)  The  drink  offering  for  the  preceding  meal  offering. 

(e)  On  the  Sabbath  two  lambs,  burnt  offerings,  with  meal  and 
drink  offerings. 

F.  Ceremonial  Purifications.     Three  kinds  of  ceremonial  im- 
purities required  animal  sacrifices,  viz., 

(a)  Contact  with  the  dead  of  men  or  animals.     Num    19: 1-22. 

(b)  Leprosy  in  men,  houses  or  clothing.     Lev.  Chs.  13,  14. 

(c)  Morbid  fiuxes  of  the  human  body.     Lev.  Ch.  15. 

G.  Vows.     Not  required  but  regulated  by    ScrijDture.     Two 
kinds,  viz., 

(a)  Positive  vows : — the  dedication  of  something  to  Jehovah. 
Gen.  28:20-22. 

(b)  Negative   Vows: — abstaining    from    something    to    honor 
Jehovah,  e.  g.,  Nazarite  vow. 

H.   Circumcision. 


LEVITICUS. 


I.  Name.— PFa-F/A'yvj//  =  And  he  called.  The  Book 
is  so  called  by  the  Jews  from  its  opening-  word.  The 
name  Leviticus  comes  from  the  ^"ulgate,  and  is  so  called 
because  tlie  Book  treats  mainly  of  the  Levitical  service. 

II.  Position.— The  Sinaitic  legislation,  begun  in  Exo- 
dus, is  further  developed  in  Leviticus.  Tlie  tabernacle 
being  built,  and  Aaron  and  his  sons  being  read}'  for  tlie 
consecration  to  tlie  divine  service,  Moses  issues  instruc- 
tions relative  to  the  offerings  to  be  made  to  Jello^'ah, 
and  sets  forth  the  duties  of  the  jiriests. 


I. 

Chs.  l-T. 

•) 

Chs.  8-10. 

3. 

Chs.  11-10, 

4. 

Chs.  ir-20, 

5. 

Chs.  21-->5. 

0. 

Ch.  26.     T 

INTRODUCTION     OUTLINES.  3») 

III.  Theme.-  Priestly  U\i>ishili()n  as  to  divine  service. 

IV.  Authorship.— See  A  ufJiorsJu'/)  under  (ienesis. 

V.  Divisions.— Tlie  main  divisions  of  tlu'  iJook  arc: 
Tiie  law    ol"  tile  saeriliee. 

The  law  of  i)riestly  eonseeration. 
The  law  of  i)urilieation. 
The  law  of  holiness. 
The  law^  of  priestly  purity. 
he  hiw  of  obedience. 
7.   Ch.  27.   The  law  of  vows  and  tithes. 

VI.  Contents.— 1.   Ch.  1.     Tlie  burnt  offering. 

2.  Ch.  2.     The  ineal  offering. 

3.  Ch.  3.     The  peace  offering. 

4.  Ch.  4.  Tiie  (unintentional)  sin  offering:  including 
{a)  The  sin  of  the  chief  priest.  (/>)  The  sin  of  the 
whole  people,  (c)  The  sin  of  a  ruler,  (d)  The  sin  of 
an  ordinary-  Israelite. 

5.  Ch.  5.  Examples:  including  (a)  Regulations  as 
to  the  sin  offering.  (b)  Regulations  as  to  the  guilt 
ofifering. 

6.  Chs.  6,  7,  Priestly  directions :  including  (a)  Di- 
rections in  sacrificing  the  burnt  offering.  (/>)  Directions 
in  sacrificing  the  meal  offering,  (c)  The  High  Priest's 
dail}^  meal  offering,  (d)  Directions  to  be  observed  in 
the  sin  offering.  (e)  Rites  as  to  the  guilt  offering. 
(/)  The  peace  offering,  {(j)  Things  not  to  be  eaten. 
{k)  Historical  subscription  to  these  commands. 

7.  Chs.  8-10.  The  consecration  and  inauguration  of 
the  priests:  including 

(a)  Ch.  8.  Aaron  and  his  sons  consecrated  according 
to  Ex.  20:1-37. 

(b)  Ch.  '.>.      Aaron  and  liis  sons  enter  ui)()n  llicii"  oHicc. 
((•)    Ch.  10:1-7.      Punishment  of   Nadab  and  Al)ihu. 


40  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

(d)  Ch.  10:8-11.  Priestly  prohibition  as  to  wine 
while  officiating. 

(e)  Ch.  10:12-15.  The  priest's  portion  in  the  meal 
offerings  and  jjeace  offerings. 

(/)  Ch.  10:1(3-20.  The  flesh  of  tlie  people's  sin  offer- 
ing to  be  eaten  by  the  priest. 

8.  Chs.  11-16.  Laws  of  purification  and  atonement: 
including 

(a)  Ch.  11.     Clean  and  unclean  animals. 

(b)  Ch.  12.     Purification  after  childbirth. 

(c)  Chs.  P),  14.  Diagnosis,  kinds  and  purification  of 
leprosy. 

(d)  Ch.  15.  Purification  after  certain  natural  secre- 
tions. 

(e)  Ch.  10.  Rules  as  to  tlie  observance  of  the  Da}^ 
of  Atonement. 

9.  Chs.  17-20.  Israel's  law  of  holiness  distinguishing- 
it  from  heathen  nations:  including 

(a)  Ch.  17:1-9.  Animal  sacrifices  to  be  offered  at 
the  central  sanctuary. 

(b)  Ch.  17 :  10-lG.  Blood  and  the  flesh  of  animals 
dying  naturally,  or  torn  by  beasts,  not  to  be  eaten. 

(c)  Ch.  18.  Unlawful  marriages,  nnchastity  and  Mo- 
lech  worship. 

(c?)  Ch.  19.  Laws  regulating  religious  and  moi'al  con- 
duct. 

(e)  Ch.  20.  Penalties  for  transgressions  of  the  law 
of  holiness. 

10.  Chs.  21,  22.  Rules  concerning  priests  and  offer- 
ings: including 

(d)  Ch.  21:1-15.     Rules  relative  to  domestic  life. 

[b)  Ch.  21 :  10-24.  Priestly  rules  as  to  bodily  per- 
fection. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  41 

(c)  Cli.  '22:1-10.  Coiulitious  of  ])aiiakiii,ii'  of  sacri- 
ficial food, 

((/)  Ch.  "22:17-25.     Perfection  of  sacrilicial  aniuuiLs. 

{e)  Ch.  22:2(')-30.  Special  injunctions  touchiiin' sacri- 
fices. 

(/')  Ch.  22::)1-:}:).     Closing  appeal. 

11.  Ch.  23.  Tlie  calendar  of  feasts;  including  {(t) 
Ch.  23:1-8.  The  Sabbatli  and  unleavened  bread.  (/>) 
Ch.  23  :  11-14.  The  sheaf  of  first  fruits,  (c)  Ch.  23 :  15- 
22.  Feast  of  Weeks,  (r/)  Ch.  23:23-25.  New  Year's 
Day.  {e)  Cli.  23:20-32.  Day  of  Atonement.  (/)  Ch. 
23:33-30.  Feast  of  Booths  or  Tal)ernacles.  (y)  Ch. 
23:37,38.  Subscription.  (h)  Ch.  23:39-43.  Addi- 
tional instructions  as  to  the  Feast  of  Booths. 

12.  Ch.  24.  Treats  of  {a)  Ch.  24:1-4.  The  lamps 
in  the  tabernacle,  {h)  Ch.  24:5-0.  The  Shewbread. 
(c)  Ch.  24:10-23.  J^aws  relative  to  blasphemy,  and 
certain  cases  of  injury. 

13.  Ch.  25.     Treats  of 

(a)  Ch.  25:1-7.     The  Sabbatical  years. 

(J))  Cli.  25:8-55.  The  year  of  Jubilee,  followed  by 
instructions  relative  to  the  rigiit  of  redemption  and 
usury. 

14.  Cli.  20.     Treats  of 

(a)  Ch.  20:1,  2.  The  prohibition  of  idolatry  and  the 
observance  of  the  Sabbath. 

(h)  Ch.  20:3-45.  Exhortation  following  the  delivei'- 
ance  of  the  foregoing  code. 

(r)    CMi.   20:40.     Subscrii)t ion. 

15.  Ch.  27.     Regulations  relative  to  vows  and  tithes. 
VII.  Doctrine.— The  doctrines    more  esi)ecifdly   em- 
phasized in  the  Book  of  Leviticus  are 

1.   Access  to  God  through  niediatoi-ial  agencies. 


4:2  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

2.  Sill,  before  and  after  justification,  and  its  deserts. 

3.  The  holiness  of  God,  and  the  holiness  that  God 
requires  through  the  sanctification  of  his  people. 

VIII.  Messianic— As  in  the  l)Ook  of  Exodus,  so  in 
the  Book  of  Leviticus  there  is  no  direct  Messianic 
prophecy ;  but  there  is  a  xDcrvading  and  complex  Messi- 
anic element  of  a  typological  character.  The  priest, 
the  altar,  the  victim,  the  blood,  the  fire,  the  water, 
the  incense,  etc.,  all,  declaring  by  their  very  nature 
and  multiplicity  their  own  insufticienc}^  point  for- 
ward to  Him  who  was  Priest,  and  Offerer,  and  Vic- 
tim in  one,  and  who  in  his  person,  and  b}"  his  work, 
became  the  one  efficient  Mediator  between  God  and 
man,  the  man  Christ  Jesus.  He  was  the  substitution, 
as  the  life  of  the  Levitical  victim  was  substituted  for 
that  of  the  offender.  He  received  the  imputation  of 
the  punishment  due  the  sinner,  as  the  head  of  the 
Levitical  victim  received. the  imputed  penalty  of  the 
guilty  party  by  the  symbolic  laying  on  of  the  hands  of 
the  offerer.  And  as  the  Levitical  victim  was  slain  in 
the  execution  of  the  penalty  incurred  by  the  offender, 
so  He  suffered  death  for  the  sinner.  John  10:11,  17, 
18;  Heb.  10:10;   11:14;  Gal.  2:20. 

See  Messianic  under  Exodus. 


Literature. — Commentaries.  Lanqe ;  Keil  and  Delitzsch; 
Speaker's  Commentary ;  Ginsburg  in  Ellicotfs  Commentary.  On 
Introduction  and  Criticism  see  under  Literature  for  Genesis. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  43 


NUMBERS. 

I.  Name.— 7:>V////(//.a/'  =  ///  the  desert.  The  Book  is 
so  called  by  the  Jews  from  the  fifth  word  of  the  first 
verse;  sometimes  called  Wayedaher  =  And  he  said, 
from  the  first  word  of  vei'.  1.  Called  in  the  J. XX  Arifh- 
moi,  and  in  the  Vul<>ate  Xinneri,  hence  the  name  J\'//v/i- 
hers.  So  called  from  the  double  enumeration  of  the 
Israelites  in  Chs.  1-4  and  'h\. 

II.  Position.-  -The  Book  of  Numbers  continues  the 
historical  narrative  of  the  Israelites  to  the  fortieth  year 
of  the  Exodus.  The  Book  opens  on  the  first  day  of  the 
second  month  in  the  second  year.  There  follows  an 
account  of  the  departure  from  Sinai;  the  arrival  in  the 
wilderness  of  Paran  (or  Kadesh);  the  mission  of  the 
spies;  the  defeat  at  Hormah ;  the  arrival  in  the  desert 
of  Zin  (or  Kadesh) ;  and  .Varon's  death. 

III.  Theme.— The  history  of  Israel  from  the  time  of 
the  departure  from  Sinai  to  the  arrival  at  the  frontiers 
of  the  Promised  Land. 

1\,  Authorship.— See  Authorship  under  (Genesis. 
V.  Divisions.— The  main  divisions  of  the  Book  are 

1.  Chs.   1:1-^10:10.      Preparations  for  leavin«>' Sinai. 

2.  Chs.  10:11 — 14:45.  The  joui-ney  from  Sinai  to 
tlie  borders  of  the  Promised  Land. 

;].  Chs.  15-11).  Legrd  enactments,  and  historical 
events. 

4.   Chs.  •><)-:)<).     The  liistory  of  the  last  year. 

V^I.  Contents.  — 1.  Ch.  1.  Census  of  the  twelve  tribes 
exclusive  of  the  Le\ites.      Result  of  this  census,  nundjer 


44  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

of  males  above  twenty  years  old,  603,550.  The  Levites, 
not  included  in  this  census,  are  appointed  guardians  of 
the  Tabernacle,  and  located  in  the  center  of  the  camp. 

2.  Ch.  2.  Position  of  the  tribes  in  the  camp,  and 
their  order  on  the  march. 

3.  Chs.  3,  -4.  Separate  census  of  the  Levites,  who  are 
delegated  to  assist  the  priests,  in  lieu  of  the  firstborn, 
in  doing  the  service  of  the  Tabernacle.  Their  number, 
position  and  duties. 

4.  Chs.  5,  G.  Laws  relative  to: — {a)  Exclusion  of  the 
unclean  from  the  camp,  (b)  Restitutions  to  be  made  to 
the  priest,  (c)  Wifely  unfaithfulness.  (c1)  The  Naza- 
rites.     {e)   Form  of  priestly  benediction. 

5.  Ch.  7.  Offerings  of  the  twelve  princes  of  the  tribes 
at  the  dedication  of  the  Tabernacle,  viz., 

(a)  Six  litters  for  the  transport  of  the  materials  of  the 
Tabernacle  by  the  Gershomites  and  Merarites. 

(b)  Vessels  for  use  at  the  altar,  and  animals  for  sac- 
rifice. 

6.  Ch.  8.     Instructions  relative  to 

(a)  The  superintendence  of  the  golden  candlestick. 

(b)  The  consecration  of  the  Levites  to  their  service. 

(c)  The  term  of  service  for  the  Levites,  i.  e.,  from 
twenty-five  to  fifty  years  of  age. 

7.  Ch.  9.     Treats  of 

(a)  A  second  observance  of  the  Passover  a  month 
after  the  general  observance  of  the  Passover  at  the 
regular  time,  and  for  the  benefit  of  those  who  were  pre- 
vented, by  defilement,  from  observing  it  at  the  regular 
time. 

(b)  The  regulations  of  the  march  and  halt  by  the 
cloud  and  fire. 

8.  Ch.  10.     Treats  of 


INTRODUCTION     OUTLINES.  45 

{(()  The  uses  of  the  silver  trumpets  in  givinu-  siiiiials 
for  marches,  halts,  assemblies,  wars  and  festivals. 

(h)  Departure  from  Sinai,  and  tlie  order  of  tlie  maieli. 

(c)  Services  of  Ilobab,  fatlier-in-hiw  of  Moses,  secured 
as  guide  through  the  wilderness. 

((/)  The  chant  accompanying  tlie  moving  and  resting 
of  the  ark. 

9.  Chs.  11,  12.     Treat  of 

(a)  The  murmurings  of  the  people  at  'J'aberah  and 
Kibro  th-hattaavah. 

{h)  The  appointment  of  seventy  elders  to  assist  Moses. 
{c)    Quails  sent  to  satisfy  the  people. 

(d)  The  Leprosy  of  IVIiriam. 

10.  Chs.  13,  14.  The  spies  and  the  j)eople:  embrac- 
ing, the  sending  of  the  spies;  their  report;  the  people's 
refusal  to  enter  Canaan;  their  consequent  rejection; 
their  rash  attack  upon  the  Amelekites ;  their  defeat. 

11.  Ch.  15.     Treats  of 

(d)  Enactments  relative  to  the  Meal  and  Drink  offer- 
ings and  other  sacrifices. 

(6)  An  example  of  punishment  for  Sabbath-breaking. 
[c)  Instructions  as  to  "fringes"  or  "tassels." 

12.  Chs.  16,  17.  Xarrative  of  the  rebellion  of  Korah, 
Dathan  and  Abiram,  followed  by  a  confirmation  of  the 
priestly  prerogatives  enjoyed  by  the  tribe  of  Levi. 

13.  Ch.  18.  Treats  of  (a)  Duties  and  relative  posi- 
ti(ni  of  priests  and  Levites.  (h)  Revenues  of  the  priests 
defined,     (c)   Tithes. 

14.  Ch.  19.  Instructions  as  to  purification  after  de- 
filement. 

15.  Chs.  20 : 1 — 22  :  1 .  Death  of  Miriam ;  murmurings 
of  the  people  for  water;  sin  of  Moses  and  Aaron  at 
Meribah;   Edom's  refusal  to  pass  the  Israelites;   deatli 


46  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

of  Aaron,  and  investiture  of  Eleazar  as  liis  successor; 
defeat  of  the  king'  Arad ;  impatience  of  the  people;  the 
brazen  serpent;  Silion's  refusal  to  pass  Israel;  defeat  of 
Sihon  and  Og;  arrival  at  the  plains  of  Moab. 

10.   Chs.  22:2— 24:25.     History  of  Balaam. 

17.  Ch.  25.  The  fall  of  Israel  into  idolatry  and  im- 
morality.    The  zeal  of  Phinehas  rewarded. 

IS.  Cli.  20.  Second  census  of  Israel.  Number  of 
males  above  twenty  years  old,  and  exclusive  of  the 
Levites,  001,730.  Xumber  of  Levites,  males,  from  one 
month  old,  23,000. 

19.  Ch.  27.     Treats  of 

(a)  Legislation  respecting  the  inheritance  of  daughters. 
(6)  Moses  warned  of  his  death,  and  Joshua  appointed 
his  successor. 

20.  Chs.  28,  29.     Calendar  of  sacrifices. 

21.  Ch.  30.     The  law  of  vows. 

22.  Ch.  31.     The  conquest  of  Midian. 

23.  Ch.  32.  ^Apportionment  of  the  transjordanic  ter- 
ritor}^  to  the  tribes  of  Gad,  Reuben,  and  the  half  tribe 
of  Manasseh. 

24.  Ch.  33.  Review  of  the  journey  from  Ramses  to 
the  plains  of  Moab  followed  b}"  instructions  as  to  the 
occupation  of  Canaan. 

24.  Ch.  34.  Boundaries  of  Canaan  and  the  names  of 
those  appointed  to  allot  its  territory. 

20.  Ch.  35.  Appointment  of  fort^'-eight  cities  for  the 
Levites,  and  of  six  among  them,  three  on  each  side  of 
the  Jordan,  as  Cities  of  Refuge  with  regulations  pertain- 
ing thereto. 

27.   Ch.  30.      Regulations  respecting  heiresses. 

A^IT.  Doctrine.— The  docti-ines  more  especially  empha- 
sized are 


INTRODUCTION     OUTLINES.  47 

1.  Divine  Providence; — as  witnessed  in  tlie  niainten- 
anee  of  the  liost  of  Israel,  for  forty  years,  in  the  wilder- 
ness of  the  \vanderin,i»s. 

'I.  Divine  Law; — its  transi»ressi()n,  i)enalty,  remedy, 
so  abundantly  illustrated  in  this  Hook. 

3.  The  pilgrim  life  of  the  peoj)!*'  of  (iod;  defining  at 
onee  the  character  of  this  world,  and  im plying  the  exist- 
ence of  another. 

VIII.  Messianic— The  direct  ^lessianic  ijropliecy  in 
the  Book  of  Numbers  is  that  uttered  by  Balaam  in 
•24:  lo-H)  concerning  the  people  of  God  as  constituting 
a  theocratic  kingdom,  whose  Messianic  Ruler  is  yet  to 
appear,  and  to  whose  scepter  all  nations  will  be  sub- 
dued. 


'Ltiteratnre.  —  Comiiientanes:  Lcoiye;  Keil :  SjK'aker's  Com- 
mentary; Kalisch  on  the  Prophecies  of  Balaam.  For  Introduc- 
tion a)id  Criticism  see  under  Genesis. 


DEUTERONOMY. 

I.  Name.— ^//e//  Hadharim  ==  These  tJie  words.  This 
title  of  the  Book  is  taken  from  its  initial  words.  The 
p]nglish  title  Deuteronomy  like  the  LXX  and  Vulgate  is 
derived  from  the  inexact  rendering  of  the  words  in 
17:18  3Ii.sJnia  hcdforcdi  hazoili  =  a  repetdion  or  diijdi- 
cate  of  fliis  laiv. 

II.  Position.— The  liook  records  the  events  of  the 
last  month  of  the  forty-j^ears  wanderings  of  the  Israel- 
ites, and  so  directly  connects  itself  with  wliat  precedes 


48  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

in  the  history  of  tlie  nation.  The  Book  closes  with  the 
termination  of  Moses'  mission  as  the  hero  of  that  his- 
tory. 

III.  Theme.— The  disconrses  of  Moses  to  the  Israelites 
on  the  borders  of  the  Promised  Land,  and  just  previous 
to  his  death.  These  discourses  set  before  the  people  the 
laws  which  the\"  are  to  obe}',  and  the  spirit  in  which 
they  are  to  obey  them,  when  they  are  settled  in  the 
Promised  Land. 

IV.  Authorship.— See  Auihorsliip  under  Genesis. 

V.  Divisions.— The  general  divisions  of  the  Book  are 

1.  Chs.  1:1 — 4:4:3.  Historical  introduction,  tirst  dis- 
course, and  historical  appendix. 

2.  Chs.  4:44 — 26:19.  Historical  introduction,  second 
discourse,  and  hortatory  appendix. 

3.  Chs.  27:1 — 34:12.  Historical  introduction,  third 
discourse,  and  historical  appendix. 

VI.  Contents.— 1.  Ch.  1:1-5.  Historical  introduction 
setting  forth  as  to  the  discourses  following, — the  speaker, 
persons  addressed,  place  where,  and  time  when  they 
were  delivered.  Speaker,  Moses  ;  persons  addressed, 
all  Israel ;  place,  the  land  of  Moab ;  time,  the  eleventh 
month  of  the  last  year  of  their  wanderings,  /.  e.,  the 
fortieth  year  after  their  Exodus  froui  Egypt. 

2.  Chs.  1 :  0 — 4 :  40.  First  discourse  of  Moses  consist- 
ing of 

(«)  A  review  of  the  events  of  the  forty-years  wander- 
ings, particularly  those  events  that  had  a  more  especial 
bearing  upon  their  occupanc}^  of  the  Promised  Land. 

(6)  An  enumeration  of  the  campaigns  in  which  they 
had  been  engaged,  and  in  which  their  victories  had  al- 
ways depended  upon  their  obedience;. the  underlying 
principle  of  which  Moses  illustrates  by  reminding  them 


TNTKODrcriON     ()rTI>I\KS.  49 

ol"  tlu'  exclusion  ol'  the  foinicr  uciuM-at ion  from  tlie 
Proniised  Land  (mi  a('(*oiinl  ol"  cliso))c'dieiH'e,  and  also  the 
like  exclusion  of  himself,  not  so  much  liowever  because 
he  was  disobedi<Mit,  l)ut  l)ecaus(^  'Mlie  Loi'd  was  wroth 
witli  me  for  your  sakes." 

(c)  I'pon  the  basis  of  tliis  ])ast  histoi'v,  experience, 
Moses  concludes  witli  a  i)i-actical  and  ))()werful  appeal 
to  remember  and  ob(\v  the  di\ine  coniniandment  im- 
pressed ui)oii  them  at  Horeb. 

o.  C1i.  4:41-40.  Historical  api)en(lix  recordinii'  the 
appointment  by  Moses  of  three  (Mties  of  Refui>e  east  of 
the  .Jordan. 

4.  ( "h  4:44-40.  Hist oi'ical  introduction  to  the  second 
discouise  of  Moses  as  that  which  is  to  treat  of  the 
leii'islation  proper,  and  in  view  of  the  occupation  of 
Canaan. 

5.  Chs.  5-20.  Second  discourse  of  Moses  embracing 
the  legislation  proj^er,  and  consisting  of  two  principal 
parts : — 

(d)  Chs.  5-11.  The  decalogue,  as  the  basis  of  the 
whole  ^losaic  Code,  and  especially  an  exposition  of  the 
first  commandment,  its  spirit  and  the  spirit  in  which  it 
was  to  be  observed  by  the  nation. 

(h)  Chs.  12:1 — 2(3:  15.  Code  of  special  laws  treating 
of — Religious  Statutes,  Olticial  Functions,  and  Social 
Usages. 

{(')  Ch.  2'i:l<i-l!».  To  these  two  pai-ts  of  the  chief  dis- 
cour.se,  an  appeal  is  added,  ui-ging  obedience^  and 
])romising  reward. 

(1.  Chs.  27-oO.  Third  dis<'()urs<M)f  Moses,  closely  con- 
nected with  the  pi'cceding  discourse,  wiiih'  in  it  the 
elders  of  Israel  are  associated  with  Moses.      It  com])rises 

{(i)  Cli.  27.  Description,  in  anticipation,  of  the  ac- 
[41 


50  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

ceptaiu'f  l)y  tlic  nation  of  tlic  preccMlinm'  code,  after 
taking-  possession  of  Canaan. 

(I>)  C'hs.  28:  ] — 29:  1.  In  view  of  the  preceding  code, 
a  settinii"  fortli  of  the  consequences  to  foHow  its  observ- 
ance or  neglect. 

(c)  Chs.  29  :  2— :3() :  20.  The  body  of  the  final  discourse 
treating  of  tlie  estaljlislnnent  of  a  fi-esh  covenant  be- 
tween God  and  the  people,  the  promise  of  pardon  upon 
penitence,  and  the  choice  set  before  Israel. 

7.  Ch.  81:1-29.  The  farewell  of  Moses,  including 
the  commission  of  Joshua,  and  the  delivery  of  the  Deu_ 
teronomic  law  to  the  Levitical  priests. 

8.  Chs.  31:30—32:52.  The  Song  of  Moses  closing 
with  historical  notices. 

9.   Ch.  33.     The  Blessing  of  Moses. 
10.   Ch.  U.     The  Death  of  Moses. 
Vir.  Doctrine.— The   two   principal   doctrinal  teach- 
ings empliasized  are 

1.  Obedience; — its  spirit,  imperativeness  and  blessed- 
ness. 

2.  Disobedience; — its  origin,  heinousness  and  entail- 
ment of  miser}^ 

VIII.  Messianic— In  Deut.  18 :  15-19  occurs  the  di- 
rect personal  Messianic  promise  of  the  Prophet  like  unto 
Moses,  wherein  the  Messiah,  as  the  future  Mediator  of 
salvation,  is  set  forth  in  his  prophet  character  as  after- 
wards he  is  in  his  kingly. 


Literature. — Commentaries  :  Keil  and  Delitzsch  ;  Lange  ; 
Speaker  8  Commentary.  On  Introduction  and  Criticism  see  under 
Genesis. 


INTKdDrCTION    OUTMNES,  "i  I 

JOSHUA. 

I.  Historico-Prophetical  Books.— Tlic  Pciitalcucli, 
accoi'diiiu'  1<)  the  .lews,  constitutes  tlic  lirst  ureal  divis- 
ion of  tlie  Old  'I'estanient,  and  is  called  tlie  Torah,  or 
TJie  Lair.  The  second  ^i-eat  division  of  the  Old  Testa- 
nienl.  accordiii.u  lo  liie  Jews,  enihi-aces  tlie  l>ooks  of 
.Joshua.  .Indues,  1st  and  2nd  Samuel,  and  1st  and  2nd 
Kings.  Tile  collective  name  given  to  the  Books  of  this 
second  division  \sX('heiin  BlsJionlm,  that  is,  the  Earlier 
or  Former  Prophef.s.  The  Pentateuch  contains  an  ac- 
count of  the  founding  of  tlie  Old  Testament  kingdom  of 
God.  and  the  laws  of  that  kingdom  gi\en  of  (iod  to  and 
through  Closes.  These  Books  of  tlie  "  Former  Proph- 
ets" trace  the  historical  development  of  this  kingdom 
of  (Tod  from  the  death  of  ^Moses,  the  mediator  of  tlie 
old  covenant,  to  the  dissolution  of  the  kingdom  of 
.Tiidali,  and  the  Babylonian  captivity ; — a  i)eriod  of  nearly 
nine  hundred  years.  These  Books  are  called  the  pro- 
phetical liooks  of  History,  because,  in  the  main,  they 
describe  the  history  of  the  Old  Testament  covenant 
nation  and  kingdom  of  iUxl  in  the  light  of  the  divine 
])lan  of  salvation,  setting  forth  the  divine  revelation,  as 
it  was  accomplished  in  the  historical  development  of 
Israel.  II(Mice  these  Jiooks  do  not  contain  a  general 
history,  a  complete  and  detailed  account  of  the  natui'al 
development  of  the  Israelitish  nation  from  a  political 
point  of  \iew,  but  trace  the  histoi-y  of  the  ])eopIe  of 
(4od,  oi"  Isi-ael,  in  its  theocratic  develoj)ment  as  a  coven- 
ant nation,  and  as  the  channel  of  that  salvation  which 
was  to  be  manifested  to  all  nalions  in  the  fulness  of 
time.     Whatever  has   no  diiccl.    \ilal   connection  with 


0-4  INTRODUCTION     OUTLINES. 

this  loftier  purpose  and  peeiiliar  vocation  of  Israel,  is 
omitted,  or  briefly  referred  to,  and  onl}-  that  recorded 
which  affected  beiielicently  or  otherwise  the  develop- 
ment of  the  divine  kingdom  in  Israel. 

II.  Name.—  Yeliosh  ua  =  Josh  jig  =  Jeliovah-Sa  vioii  r. 
The  l>ook  of  Joshua  derives  its  name  from  Joshna,  the 
successor  of  Moses,  and  the  leader  of  the  Israelites  in 
the  conquest  of  Canaan. 

III.  Position.-  While  on  tlie  one  hand  the  Book  of 
Joshua  bears  an  independent  character,  still  it  is  also 
intimately  related  to  the  Pentateuch  in  the  nature  of  its 
contents,  in  its  literary  structure,  and  in  its  furnishing 
the  account  of  the  final  stage  in  the  history  of  the 
Origines  of  the  Hebrew  nation.  It  is  thus  closely  con- 
nected with  the  Book  of  Deuteronomy  inasmuch  as  it  is 
a  continuation  of  the  history  of  Israel  from  the  death 
of  Moses  to  the  death  of  Joshua. 

IV.  Theme.— Being  prophetico-historical  the  Book  of 
Joshua  is  not  simp)ly  a  continuation  of  the  historj^  of 
Israel  under  the  leadership  of  Joshua.  The  chief  design 
of  the  Book  is  to  set  forth  Jehovah's  covenant  faithful- 
ness in  the  fulfillment  of  his  promises,  so  that,  by  his 
almighty  help,  the  people  of  Israel  make  conquest  and 
take  possession  of  the  land  of  Canaan  as  their  promised 
inheritance. 

V.  Date.— As  to  the  date  of  its  composition,  Joshua 
was  evidently  written  before  the  time  of  Ahab  (915-896 
B.C.)  by  a  comparison  of  Josh.  0:20  with  1  Ki.  16:34. 
It  was  evidently  written  before  the  time  of  Solomon  as 
at  the  time  of  the  writing,  the  Canaanites  were  still 
dwelling  in  (4ezer  (Josh.  16:10),  whereas  during  Solo- 
mon's reign  (1013-973  B.  C.),  Pharaoh  drove  the  Canaan- 
ites from  thence  and  destroyed  them  (1  Ki.  9:16).     As 


INTRODUCTION     OUTLINES.  53 

at  the  time  of  the  writing-  of  Joshua  tlie  Jebnsites  were 
still  inhabiting  Jerusalem  (Josh.  15:  (;;j),  whereas  David 
drove  these  Jebnsites  out  of  Jerusalem  (2  Sam.  5:6-9), 
therefore  the  com|)osition  of  Josluia  antedates  David's 
reign  (1053-1013  B.  C).  Joshua  was  evidentl^^  written 
before  Judges,  inasmuch  as  Judges  begins  where  Joshua 
leaves  off,  and  inasmuch  as  Judges  seems  to  make  quo- 
tations from  Joshua,  and  to  give  abridged  statements  of 
historical  incidents  more  circumstantially  related  in 
Joshua.  Moreover  the  date  of  the  composition  cannot 
have  been  manj-  yeai'S  after  the  death  of  Joshua,  inas- 
much as  the  writer  in  0:25  speaks  of  Rahab  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  imply  that  she  was  still  living;  while  in 
5:1  he  refers  to  himself  as  if  he  were  among  those  who 
crossed  the  Jordan. 

VI.  Authorship.— The  autliorship  of  Joshua  cannot 
be  determined  with  certainty.  According  to  Higher 
Criticism  it  proceeded  from  the  same  complex  source  as 
the  Pentateuch,  in  the  main  from  the  hands  of  the 
Deuteronomist.  (See  Authorship  under  Genesis.)  Aside 
from  other  considerations,  the  differences  in  language 
decidedly  antagonize  this  view.  Certain  portions  of 
Joshua  were  doubtless  written  by  Joshua  himself;  and 
what  he  wrote  probably  served  as  the  basis  for  the  Book 
as  we  now  have  it,  the  authorship  of  which  might  pos- 
sibly be  assigned  to  Kleazai-  or  Phinehas. 

VII.  Biography  and  the  Monuments.-  Joshua,  the 
assistant  and  successor  of  Moses,  was  the  son  of  Nun, 
of  the  tribe  of  Ephraim,  and  was  born  in  Egypt.  lie 
is  lirst  mentioned  as  being  the  victorious  commander  of 
the  Israelites  in  their  battle  against  the  Amalekites  at 
Rephidim.  Ex.  17:8-1G.  He  accompanied  Moses  j^art 
of  the  way  when  the  latter  ascended  Sinai  to  receive  for 


54  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

the  first  time  the  two  Tables  of  the  Law.  Was  one  of 
the  twelve  sent  to  explore  the  land  of  Canaan  and  one 
of  the  two  who  brought  back  a  favorable  report.  Nu. 
13:  17;  14:  G.  Shortly  before  his  death,  Moses,  being  so 
directed  (Nu.  27:18),  invests  Joshua  with  definite  au- 
thority, in  connection  with  Eleazar  the  priest,  over  the 
people.  Deut.  3 :  28.  After  this  God  directly  charges 
Joshua  by  the  mouth  of  Moses  (Deut.  31,  14;  23),  which 
charge  is  renewed  under  the  direction  of  God  (Josh. 
1 :  1),  whereupon  Joshua  assumes  command  of  the  peo- 
ple at  Shittini,  sends  spies  into  Jericho,  crosses  the 
Jordan,  fortifies  a  camp  at  Gilgal,  circumcises  the  peo- 
ple, keeps  the  Passover,  and  is  visited  by  the  Captain  of 
the  Lord's  Host.  The  Book  that  bears  his  name  con- 
tinues and  completes  the  biograph}'  of  Joshua  as  the 
hero  of  the  wars  of  conquest  for  the  possession  of 
Canaan. 

One  of  the  most  important  of  recent  discoveries  is  that 
of  the  Tell  Amarna  Tablets  unearthed  in  1887  from  the 
ruins  of  the  palace  of  Amenoi)his  IV.,  midway  between 
Thebes  and  Memphis,  about  180  miles  by  river  south  of 
Cairo,  Egypt.  The  tablets  are  brick,  dating  about  1480 
B.  C,  inscribed  in  Aramaic,  resembling  Assyrian.  The 
inscriptions  consist  of  a  large  mass  of  i^olitical  corres- 
pondence, letters  written  by  Phoenicians,  Amorites  and 
IMiilistines  to  Amenophis  III.  of  Egypt.  The  events 
recorded  in  these  letters  include  the  conquest  of  Damas- 
cus by  the  Hittites,  of  Ph(Pnicia  by  the  Amorites,  and 
of  Judea  by  the  Hebrews.  They  refer  to  the  conquet>t 
of  the  country  between  Mt.  Seir  on  the  east,  Ajalon, 
Lachish,  Ascalon  and  Gezer  on  the  west,  and  Shilohand 
Himmon  on  the  north.  They  also  contain  the  name  of 
one  ot  lh("   kings   killed  by  Joshua,  viz.,  Japhia  (Josh. 


INTRODUCTION     OUTLINES.  55 

10:3),  and  also  tlie  iiaiuo  of  Jabin,  king- of  Ilazor,  wlioin 
Joshua  attacked  (.losli.  11:1).  In  these  letters  the 
Hebrews  are  ealled  Abiri,  and  are  said  to  have  conie 
from  the  desert,  and  from  Mt.  Seir.  Tlie  date  of  these 
letters  is  exactly  that  which  is  to  be  derived  from  the 
Bible,  1  Ki.  0:1,  for  the  Hebrew  invasion  of  Canaan. 

VIII.  Divisions.— The  principal  divisions  are  two: — 

1.  C1is.  I-l'^  Account  of  tlie  passage  of  the  Jordan, 
and  the  series  of  victories  by  wliicli  the  conquest  of 
Canaan  was  effected. 

2.  Chs.  13-24.  Account  of  the  distribution  of  the 
land  among  the  tribes,  and  of  the  closing  events  in 
Joshua's  life. 

IX.  Contents.— 1.  C1is.  1,  2.  Preparations  to  cross 
Jordan  and  make  conquest  of  Canaan.  Joshua  divinely 
encouraged.  Promised  help  from  the  2^  east-Jordan 
tribes.  Mission  of  the  spies  to  Jericho  and  compact 
with  Rahab. 

2.  Chs.  3,  4.  Passage  of  the  Jordan.  Two  monu- 
ments erected  commemorating  the  event.  Gilgal  head- 
quarters of  the  Israelites. 

3.  Chs.  5-8.  Joshua  circumcises  the  people  and  ob- 
serves the  Passover  at  Gilgal.  He  receives  instructions 
as  to  to  the  conquest  of  Jericho.  Tiie  city  taken  and 
"devoted,"  Rahab  and  her  household  being  spared. 
Joshua  advances  against  Ai,  and  is  repulsed  on  account 
of  Achan's  offense.  Achan  having  been  punished,  Ai 
is  possessed.  Joshua  erects  an  altar  on  Ebal,  and  car- 
ries out  the  instructions  of  Deut.  27:2-8. 

-4.  Ch.  0.  The  Gibeonites,  by  craft,  secure  iniinunity 
for  their  lives,  and  are  retaiiu^d  in  the  community  as 
slaves. 

5.     Ch.     10.       The     con([U('st     ol"     Southeni     Canaan. 


0(3  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Joshua  defeats  at  Beth-liorou  the  tive  kiiii>s  of  Jerusa- 
lem, Hesliboii,  Jarniuth,  Lacliish,  Egloii.  Afterwards 
he  gets  possession  of  Makeddah,  Libiiah,  Lacliish, 
Gezer,  Eglou,   Hebron,   Debir. 

6.  Ch.  11.  The  conquest  of  Northern  Canaan. 
Joshua  defeats  Jabin,  king  of  Hazor,  at  tlie  waters 
of  Merom,  and  takes  the  towns  belonging  to  liini.  Re- 
view of  Joshua's  victories. 

7.  Ch.  I'l.  Supplementary  list  of  kings  (U'feated  ])y 
the  Israelites,  east  and  west  of  Jordan. 

8.  Ch.  13.  ]>eing  instructed  Joshua  proceeds  to  dis- 
tribute tlie  conquered  territory.  Limits  and  cities  of 
the  transjordanic  tribes. 

9.  Ch.  14.  Joshua  and  Eleazar  prepare  to  distribute 
the  land  l)y  lot.  Caleb  receives  his  portion  at  Hebron 
according  to  Dent.  1  loti, 

10.  Ch.  15.  l^orders  of  Judah.  Caleb's  conquest  of 
Hebron.  OthnieFs  conquest  of  Kirjath-sepher  (Debir). 
Cities  of  Judah  arranged  by  districts. 

11.  Chs.  16,  17.  The  children  of  Joseph,  /.  e.,  west 
half  of  Manasseh  and  Ephraim.  South  border  of  the 
two  tribes  treated  as  one.  Borders  of  Ephraim  with 
cities  belonging  to  it  but  located  in  Manasseh.  Borders 
of  ^Manasseh  with  cities  belonging  to  it  but  located  in 
Issachar  and  Asher.  Permission  to  the  joint  tiibes  to 
extend  their  territor}'. 

12.  Ch.  18.  Assembling  of  Israelites  at  Shiloli.  Tent 
of  meeting  erected.  Joshua  directs  a  surve}'  of  the  land 
still  undistributed.  Its  distribution  b}-  lot  to  the  seven 
remaining  tribes.     Borders  of  Benjamin. 

13.  Ch.  10.  Lots  of  Simeon,  Zebulon,  Issachar, 
Asher,  .  Xaphtali  and  Dan.  Assignment  of  Timnath- 
serah  in  Ephraim  to  Joshua. 


IXTRODUrXION    OUTLINES.  57 

14.  rii.  -H).     Tlu'  appointment  of  cities  of  refn«>e. 

1').  Cii.  'U.  'I'lie  forty-eight  cities  assigned  by  tlie 
Israelites  to  the  tribe  of  Levi  accoidinii  to  Num.  1)5:1-8. 

IC).  Ch.  "-v^t^.  Division  of  tlie  land  com[)lete(l.  The '.ij 
tribes  dismissed  to  their  liome  east  of  the  Jordan.  Inci- 
dent of  the  altar  erected  at  the  point  of  the  crossing  of 
the  Jordan. 

K.  ("h.  'l'-\.  First  ol"  Joshua's  two  closing  discourses. 
Kxhoi'ls  the  people  to  faithfulness  to  tlie  law,  and  to 
abstain  from  intercoui'se  with  the  native  inhal)itants  of 
Canaan, 

15.  Cii.  -M.  Joshua's  second  closing'  discourse  deliv- 
ered at  Shechem.  Review  of  (lod's  mercies  from  patri- 
archal da3's.  People  pledge  themselves  to  obedience. 
A  stone  witnessing  thereto  erected  at  Shechem.  Death 
and  burial  of  Joshua.  Burial  of  Joseph's  bones  at 
Shechem.      Death  and  burial  of  Eleazar. 

X.  Doctrine.— The  doctrines  emphasized  are 

1.  Faithfulness  on  the  part  of  God  to  fulfill  covenant 
promises. 

2.  Faithfulness  on  the  part  of  the  godly  to  possess 
the  promised  inheritance. 

XT.  Messianic— The  Messianic  (dement  in  the  Book 
of  Joshua  is  of  a  typological  nature.  See  Messianic 
under  Exodus.  As  a  type,  the  Book  of  Joshua  finds  its 
antitype  in  the  Epistle  to  the  Ephesians. 


Literature.— Xe//,    ///    Keil  and    DelitzscJi    Commentaries. 
Lamje.     Spcctkcr's  aiifJ  Pulpit  (/(niniirutai-ies. 


58  INTRODUCTION     OUTLINES. 


JUDGES. 


I.  l^ame.— Shaft ini^  Judges.  The  Book  takes  its  name 
from  the  men  who  judged  or  rnled  in  Israel  in  the  period 
between  Joshua  and  Samuel,  and  whose  transactions  the 
Book  chiefl}'  relates.  The  Book  is  not  a  complete  his- 
tory of  the  times,  but  only  accounts  of  part  of  the  nation 
at  any  one  time. 

JI.  Position.— Tlie  second  of  the  historico-i^rophetical 
Books.  See  under  Joshua.  Continues  the  annals  of 
the  Israelitish  nation  from  the  death  of  Joshua  to  the 
death  of  Samson,  and  the  rise  of  Samuel  the  prophet. 

III.  Theme. —The  general  theme  of  the  Book  is, — 
Calamit}'  following  upon  apostasy; — Deliverance  follow- 
ing upon  obedience.  To  illustrate  this  theme  the  autlior 
brings  together  the  most  important  data  of  Hebrew  his- 
tory between  Joshua  and  Eli. 

IV.  Date.— Tiie  Book  of  Judges  was  evidently  written 
between  the  time  of  Saul,  and  the  middle  of  the  reign  of 
David,  from  the  following  comparisons: — 

1.  Judg.  1 :  21  compared  with  2  Sam.  5:  ij-S.  Accord- 
ing to  the  former  the  Jebusites  inhabiting  Jerusalem  had 
not  been  driven  out.  According  to  the  latter  David 
took  tlie  stronghold  of  Zion,  and  drove  out  tlie  Jebusites. 

2.  Judg.  1:29  compared  with  1  Ki.  1):1G.  According 
to  the  former  the  Canaanites  had  not  been  driven  out  of 
Gezer.  According  to  the  latter,  Pharaoh,  during  the 
reign  of  Solomon,  captured  Gezer,  burnt  it  withhre,  and 
slew  the  Canaanites  dwelling  in  it. 

o.  Tlie  expression  in  Judg.  17  :  (3 ;  1 S  :  1 ;  19:1;  21  :  25, 
that  "  In  those  davs  there  was  no  king  in  Israel,"  where 


INTRODUCTION     OUTLINES.  59 

tliere  seems  to  be  a  comparison  between  tlie  times  of  the 
Kiiiiis  and  those  of  tiie  .hulges,  and  from  wliieli  itwonld 
appear  tliat  the  l>ook  was  not  written  Ix'fore  the  time  of 
Saul. 

4.  ''Tile  ('ai)ti\ity  of  tlie  land"  in  18:  oO,  refers  to 
tlie  victory  i^ained  over  tlie  Israelites  by  the  Philistines, 
and  the  disastrous  results  to  Israel  that  followed  it,  as 
further  explained  by  ver.  31  following. 

V.  Authorship.  -Of  the  authorship  of  Judges  nothing- 
is  positively  known.  The  weight  of  probability  assigns  it  to 
Samuel,  and  the  date  of  its  composition  about  the  begin- 
ning of  David's  reign.  As  the  Book  covers  a  long  histori- 
cal period,  the  author  can  have  drawn  his  matei'ials  only 
from  written  sources,  or  oral  ti'adition,  most  likely  the 
former  in  view  of  the  historical  precision  that  marks 
most  pai'ts  of  the  Book. 

VI.  The  Judges.— The  Judges  were  leaders,  deliverers 
and  governors  in  Israel;  not  simply  administrators  of 
civil  jurisprudence,  but  virtual  rulers.  1.  Sam.  8:5,  6. 
The  Judges  were  not  always  the  general  authority  chosen 
by  prescribed  law,  nor  was  the  position  an  hereditary  one. 
During  the  period  of  the  Judges  there  were  six  periods 
of  servitude.     The  chronology  is  as  follows: — 

.Judg.  3:  7-11.    Ist  Servitude  to  Cushan-Rishathaim For   8  years. 

Judg.  :5 :  7-11.    Deliverance  by  Otlmiel,  Judge 40 

Judg.  3  :  12-30.    2nd  Serv.  to  Eglon  of  Moab.  Amnion,  Anialek.  18 

Judg.  3: 1-2-3J.    Deliverance  by  Ehud,  Judge  with  Shamgar...  80 

J  udg.  Chb.  4,  .'i.    :3rd  Serv.  to  Jabin  of  Hazor  in  Canaan 20 

Judg.  Chs.  4,  .5.    Deliv.  by  Deb^rali  and  Barak,  Barak,  Judge.  40 

.Jadg.  () :  1— S:  ^2.    4th  Servitude  to  Midian,  Amalek,  &c 7 

Judg.  6  : 1— 8  :  :i2.    Deliverance  by  Gideon.  Judge 40 

Judg.  s  :  :33— 9  :  37.     Abinielecli  reigns 3 

Judg.  10  :  1,  2.    Tola,  Judge t.'3 

Judg.  10  :  ;3-.5.    Jair,  Judge '^2 

Judg.  10  :  6—12  :  7.    .")th  Servitude  to  Ammonites,  Philistines...  is 

Judg.  lo:C-)2:7.    Deliverance  by  Jephtah.  Judge G 

Judg.  12:8-10.    I.jzan,  Judge 7 

Judg.  12:  11,  12.    Elon,  Judge 10 


60  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Judg.  12  :  13-15.    AMon.  Judge For  8  years. 

.ludg.  Chs.  13-16.    6th  Servitude  to  Philistines 40 

Judg.  Chs.  13-16.    DeUverance  by  Samson,  Judge 20 

1  Sam.  1  :  1-4:  18.    Eh,  Judge 40 

1  Sam.  7  :  2.    7th  Servitude  (of  the  Ark)  to  Philistines 20 

1  Sam.  7  :  l.")— 25 :  1.    Deliverance  by  Samuel,  Judge 12 

An  exact  ehroiiology  of  the  period  of  the  Judges  is 
as  yet  unattaiiied,  in  order  to  make  the  sum  total  of  the 
above  years,  plus  the  forty  years  wanderings,  the  seven 
years  of  Joshua's  conquest,  and  the  eighty  years  of  Saul's 
and  David's  reigns,  harmonize  with  the  statement  in  1  Ki. 
6:1,  which  assigns  480  years  to  the  period  from  the  Exo- 
dus to  the  fourth  \^ear  of  Solomon's  reign.  Nor  does  the 
statement  in  Acts  13  :  20  settle  the  disputed  points.  One 
explanation  is  that  some  of  the  periods  named  in  the 
Judges  are  synchronous.  Another  is  that  the  years  of 
Israel's  servitude  to  their  heathen  oppressors  are  not 
reckoned  in  the  480  years  of  1  Ki.  6:1.  The  succession 
of  events  is  regular  till  the  close  of  Samson's  judgeship, 
where  it  is  suddenly  broken  off,  and  not  resumed  till 
the  history  reopens  with  First  Samuel. 

VII.  Divisions.— The  principal  divisions  are  three: — 

1.  Introduction; — C'hs.  1 :  1 — 3  :  7. 

2.  History  ;— Chs.  3:8—16:31. 

3.  Appendix; — Chs.  17-21. 

VIII.  Contents.  -1.  The  Introduction  is  twofold: — 
general  and  special. 

((/)  Chs.  1:1 — 2:5.  General  introduction  setting  forth 
the  historical  connection  with  what  precedes  in  Joshua, 
and  furnishing  a  summaiy  of  the  results  of  Joshua's 
wars  of  conquest. 

(6)  Chs.  2 :  6 — 3  :  7.  Special  introduction  setting  forth 
the  historical  connection  with  what  immediately  follows, 
and  treating  of  the  people's  sins,  punishments  and  deliv- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  61 

orances  dui-iiiu'  llu'  period  of  llic  .Indies,  1  litis  iiilrodiie- 
inii'  the  special  history  tiiat  follows. 

•2.  (1is  3:8— KJ:;)!.  History  of  the  Jiid-cs  and  of 
theiiwars  of  deliveraiiee.     See  ehroiiolo^ieal  tableabove. 

;>.  C'lis.  1T-"21.  Appendix.  'Die  histoiy  of  tlie. Judges 
al)ru[)tly  interrupted  at  the  close  of  C'h.  10,  is  not  re- 
sumed till  1  Sam.  opens.  C'hs.  17-21,  falling  between, 
and  forming-  a  sort  of  appendix,  are  still  not  mere  ap])en- 
dix,  for  they  form  an  essential  part  of  the  body  of  the 
work,  while  the  events  they  chronicle  occured  in  the 
earliest  part  of  tlie  period  of  the  Judges.  These  events 
are  mainly  two,  riz., 

((/)  Chs.  17,  18.  Account  of  the  worship  of  images 
by  Micah,  the  Ephraimite,  and  the  transportation  of 
tliat  worship  by  the  Danites  to  Laish-Dan. 

{b)  Chs.  19-21.  Account  of  the  infamous  conduct  of 
the  inhabitants  of  Gibeah,  and  the  war  of  revenge  which 
was  waged  by  Isi'ael  against  the  tribe  of  Benjamin  as  a 
punishment  for  the  crime. 

The  Book  of  Joshua  may  also  be  divided  into  foui* 
periods  based  upon  the  four  principal  appearances  of 
the  Angel  of  Jehovah. 

IX.  Doctrine.— The  doctrines  em[)hasized  are, — 

(a)  Disobedience  incurring  divine  judgments  wliich 
are  both  punitive  and  corrective. 

[b)  Penitence  and  obedience  securing  ])ard()n  and 
power  over  ones  enemies. 

X.  Messianic— There  is  no  direct  Messianic  element 
in  the  ]>ook  of  Judges  save  that  connected  with  the  doc- 
trine of  the  Angel  of  Jehovah. 


JuiterSLtnre.  —  C'o)!} iiientaries  of    K<i!  (iikI  IhlUzsrh,    L(iii</( 
Speaker's  and  Pulpit, 


Q-i  INTKOOrCTlON     OUTLINES. 


RUTH.  . 

I.  Name.— Tn  Hebrew  as  in  Kiiglisli,  RtifJi.  'J'he  IJook 
takes  its  name  from  its  principal  eliaracter. 

II.  Position.— Tn  the  Hebnnv  IMble  tlie  IJook  of  Kntli 
stands  among-  the  Ketubim  or  Hagiographa.  According 
to  the  LXX  and  A.  V.  tlie  Book  is  placed  between 
Judges  and  Samuel,  which  is  its  proper  place,  as  it  is  a 
supplement  to  the  former,  and  an  introduction  to  the 
latter. 

III.  Time.— The  events  described  in  the  Book  occurred 
during  the  period  of  the  Judges,  probably  during-  the 
judgeship  of  Gideon. 

IV.  Design.— The  chief  design  of  the  Book  is  to  give 
the  ancestrv  of  David  which  is  not  fui-nished  by  the 
])Ooks  of  Samuel,  except  as  to  the  names  of  his  father 
Jesse,  and  his  brethren.  (1  Sam.  10:  1-1  o).  Especially 
included  in  this  its  chief  aim,  the  Book  is  designed  to 
show  how  Ruth,  a  daughter  of  Moab,  and  a  member 
therefore  of  a  people  not  only  outside  of  Israel,  but 
theocratically  hostile  to  Israel,  obtained  not  only  an 
eminent  position  among  .lehovalTs  people,  but  became 
also  an  ancestor  of  the  illustrious  king,  David. 

V.  Authorship  and  Date.— The  authorship  of  the 
Book  is  not  known.  As  to  date  of  composition,  the 
weight  of  internal  evidence  assigns  it  to  the  time  of 
David.  The  social  usages  portrayed  in  the  l^ook  assign 
it  to  a  pre  rather  than  a  post-exilic  date.  The  so-called 
Aramaisms  are  ancient  Arabic  forms,  preserved  in  the 
modern  Arabic,  and  moreover  forms  that  occur  in  the 
Hexateuch  and  the  Books  of  Samuel. 


INTRODUCTION     OUTLINES.  (W^ 

VI.  Divisions  and  Contents.— Aie  as  follows: — 

].  C'h.  1.  P^liineleeh  of  I>ethleheni,  his  wife  Naomi, 
and  their  two  sons,  go  to  Moab,  where  Kliineleeh  dies. 
The  two  sons  marry  the  Moabitesses,  Orpah  and  Hnth. 
The  two  sons  dying,  Naomi  determines  to  retui-n  lo 
]>ethlehem,  but  bids  her  daughters-in-law  remain  in 
their  own  country.  Ori)ah  does,  but  Ruth  determines 
to  accompany  Xaomi  back  to  Ijethlehem. 

•L  (hs.  -2-4.  After  their  return  to  Bethlehem,  Ruth 
gleans  in  the  fields  of  Boaz,  a  relative  of  Elimelech. 
Boaz  thus  becoming  acquainted  with  Ruth,  marries  her. 
The  offspring  of  their  union  was  Obed,  father  of  Jesse, 
and  grandfather  of  David. 

VII.  Doctrine.-  The  doctrinal  thoughts  emi)hasized 
are 

(d)  (xod  calls  and  honors  whom  he  will. 
(b)  Faith  in  (Tod  and  devotion  to  the  godly. 

VIII.  Messianic.— While  there  is  no  direct  Messianic 
prophecy  in  the  Book  of  Ruth,  still  there  is  a  Messianic 
trait  in  the  fact  that  Ruth,  a  heathen  woman,  of  a  nation 
so  hostile  to  Israel  as  Moab  was,  and  on  account  of  her 
faithful  love  to  the  peo^^le  of  Israel,  and  her  entire  con- 
fidence in  Jehovah,  the  God  of  Israel,  should  have  been 
thought  worthy  to  be  made  the  tribe-mother  of  the  great 
and  godly  king  David,  and  a  lineage-mother  of  Jesus 
according  to  the  flesh. 


Liiter ature. — Cominevtaries :    Keil    and  Delitzsch  :  Laugc  ; 
Speaker' s  and  Pulpit  Commentaries  :  Wright's  Rnth   iit  Ilehreir. 


(J4  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


FIRST  AND  SECOND  SAMUEL, 

I.  Name.— The  name  of  the  two  Books  arises  from 
the  fact  that  Samuel  is  theii'  principal  character,  both 
as  concerns  himself,  and  the  part  he  took  in  consecrat- 
ing the  two  kings,  Saul  and  David  to  the  kingly  office. 
The  two  Books  formed  originally  a  single  Book.  By  the 
LXX  the  two  Books  of  Samuel,  and  the  two  Books  of 
Kings  were  regarded  as  a  complete  history  of  the  two 
kingdoms  of  Israel  and  Judah,  and  the  entire  work  was 
divided  by  them  into  four  Books  of  the  Kings.  Hence 
the  title  "The  First  Book  of  Samuel  otherwise  called 
the  First  Book  of  Kings,"  etc.  The  Books  however  re- 
tain the  general  title  they  bore  in  the  Hebrew  MSS.,  ?'.  e., 

1  and  'I  Samuel,  and  1  and  2  Kings. 

II.  Position.— The  Books  of  Samuel  are  closely  re- 
Lited  to  Judges  preceding  and  Kings  following.  The 
Book  of  Judges  treats  of  the  affairs  of  the  Hebrew  State 
after  the  conquest,  when  the  nation  was  composed  of 
independent  provinces,  and  had  a  tribal  form  of  govern- 
ment. Then  came  the  change  from  the  tribal  to  the 
monarchical  form  of  government,  which  radical  change 
occurred  under  the  regency  of  the  prophet  Samuel,  and 
is  set  forth  in  the  hrst  Book  bearing  his  name.  The 
Books  of  Samuel  and  Kings  are  closely  related  in  tiiat 

2  Sam.  closes  and  1  Kings  opens  with  events  connected 
Avith  the  close  of  David's  reign. 

III.  Time.— The  period  of  history  included  by  the 
Books  of  Samuel  opens  with  an  account  of  Sjimuers 
birth  and  early  call,  and  extends  to  the  close  of  David's 


INTR()L)U(^TT()N     OUTLINES.  G5 

l)iil)lie  life.      Tlu'  dcalli  of  Saul  is  the  liistorically  divid- 
iiiii'  point  l)el\V(H'ii  1  and  '*  Sainiiel. 

IV.  Theme.-  As  in  tlie  case  of  Ihc  otiicr  propliclieo- 
historieal  IJooks,  (see  under  Josliua),  tlie  design  is  not 
to  trace  the  liistory  of  the  nation,  in  the  ordinary  sense, 
but  to  trace  the  course  of  divine  revehition;  to  set  forth 
God's  nietliod  of  dealini;'  witli  his  chosen  nation  that  lie 
might  instruct  and  establish  them  in  ways  of  righteous- 
ness, and  so  lay  a  foundation  for  the  world-wide  work 
of  Messiah.  The  historj'  therefore  is  not  so  much  the 
history  of  the  Kingdom  of  Israel,  as  the  history  of  the 
Kingdom  of  God. 

V.  Date.— There  is  nothing  in  the  Books  that  point  to 
a  period  later  than  the  close  of  David's  reign,  or  the 
tirst  j)art  of  Solomon's  reign,  as  the  date  of  composition. 
The  statement  in  1  Sam.  9:9  does  not  indicate  a  later 
date  than  this,  for  while  Samuel  is  called  a  "seer"  (1 
Sam.  9:9),  Xathan  and  Gad,  both  contemi^oraries  of 
David,  are  called  "prophets"  (1  Sam.  22:5;  2  Sam. 
7:2).  The  statement  in  1  Sam.  27 :  6  is  no  proof  that 
the  composition  should  be  assigned  to  a  date  after  the 
accession  of  Rehoboam,  and  the  division  of  the  kingdom 
into  the  kingdoms  of  Judah  and  Israel,  for  aside  from 
the  fact  that  the  LXX  and  Pe&hito-Syriac  read  king  and 
not  kings  in  the  passage,  is  also  the  fact  that  the  dis- 
tinction between  Israel  and  Judah  existed  already  in 
the  time  of  David,  and  grew  out  of  the  fact  that  David 
belonged  to  the  tribe  of  Judah,  over  which  alone  lie  had 
first  ruled  seven  and  one-half  years,  during  a  part  of 
which  time  Ishbosheth,  SauTs  son,  reigned  over  Israel. 
1  Sam.  IS:  10;  2  Sam.  24:  1.  The  expression  "  unto  this 
daj^  "  does  not  n<x*essarily  inii)ly  a  long  perio<l  of  time. 

VI.  Autliorship.— The    autlu)rslii[)    of    the    Books    is 
[5] 


6(j  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

unknown.  P\)ur  theories  are  advanced:  (1)  Samuel; 
(2)  Samuel,  Nathan  and  (rad;  {'^)  Nathan;  (4)  C'om- 
X^osite. 

VII.  Divisions.— The  two  Books  of  Samuel  may  be 
divided  aeeording  as  the  contents  <^i'oup  themselves 
about  the  three  x:)iincii)al  characters  Samuel,  Saul  and 
David,  as  follows: — 

1.  1  Sam.  Chs.  1-12.  Samuel  and  the  establishment 
of  the  Monarchy. 

2.  1  Sam.  Chs.  13-31.  Saul  and  the  beginnings  of 
the  Monarchy. 

3.  2  Sam.  Chs.  1-24.  David  and  the  succession  of 
the  Monarchy. 

VIII.  Contents.— 1.  1  Sam.  Chs.  1-12.  Samuel  and 
the  establishment  of  the  Monarch}  . 

Samuel's  birth  and  consecration  (Cli.  1).  Hannah's 
prayer  (2: 1-10).  Eli's  evil  sons,  and  the  prediction  of 
the  fall  of  Eli's  house  (2  :  11-36).  The  judgment  of  Eli's 
house  declared  to  him  by  Samuel  (3:1-18).  Samuel 
prophet  of  Israel  in  Shiloh  (3:  19-21).  Double  defeat  of 
the  Israelites,  and  capture  of  the  Ark,  by  the  Philis- 
tines; death  of  Eli's  two  sons,  of  Eli,  and  birth  of  Icha- 
bod  (-4:1-22).  Punishment  of  the  Philistines,  and  re- 
capture of  the  Ark  (5: 1-7  :1).  Samuel's  reformation 
and  its  inauguration  at  Mizj)ah  (7 :  2-6).  The  invading 
Philistines  defeated;  Israelitisli  possessions  restored; 
peace  established ;  Samuel's  judgeship  of  Israel  in  a  cir- 
cuit of  four  cities  yearly  (7:7-17).  Samuel  appoints 
Ms  sons  judges;  their  evil  conduct  leads  to  the  demand 
of  a  king;  Samuel  protests,  then  divinely  directed, 
yields  (8 :  1-22).  Saul,  visiting  Samuel,  the  latter  anoints 
him  king,  then  calls  a  national  assembly  at  Mizpah  when 
Saul  is  publicly  elected  by  lot  as  king,  but  has  not  the 


INTRODUCTroX    OUTLINES.  07 

allegiance  (>r  all  Isi-ai^l  (C'hs.  0,  l(i).  Saul  aids  llic  iikmi 
of  Jabesli  (iilcad,  defeats  the  Ainnionites,  is  reeogiii/cd 
king  by  all  tlie  people  at  (Jilgal,  where  Samuel  renews 
the  kingdom  (("h.  11).  Saniuers  address;  juslilieshis 
course,  urges  (idelity  io  (Un\  and  Ihe  king;  miracle 
(Ch.   P2). 

2.    1  Sam.  (lis.    ]:)-;)] .      Saul    and    the   beginnings   of 
the  Monarch}-. 

Saul  and  .Jonathan  defeat  Ihc  Philistines  at  (ieba;the 
Philistines  mass  a  greal  ai'm\-,  whei'eu])on  Israel  is  dis- 
mayed, ami  Saul  impatient  at  Samuefs  delay,  himself 
otters  sacrifice,  for  which  act  of  disobedience  he  is  re- 
jected of  (4od  (lo.-l-li).  Jonathan  defeats  Philistines 
at  Michmash,  and  for  disobeying  Saul  is  si)ared  at  the 
demand  of  the  people  (13:  15 — 1-t:  45).  SauTs  victories, 
cliildren,  relatives  (14:40-52).  Disobeying  the  order  to 
utterly  destroy  Anmlek,  Saul  is  rejected  from  the  king- 
dom (Ch.  15).  Samuel  anoints  David  to  be  king;  for 
mental  relief  Saul  sends  for  David  (C4i.  10).  Philistines 
against  Israelites  in  vale  of  Elah ;  David  slays  (Toliath 
(Ch.  1?).  .Jonathan's  and  David's  friendship,  and  Saul's 
murderous  jealousy  of  Da\i<l  (Ch.  IS).  David  flees  lo 
Samuel,  is  sought  by  Saul:  learns  of  SauTs  continued 
enmity  from  .Jomithan  (Clis.  1!),  20).  David  flees  to 
Ahimelech  at  Xob,  to  Iving  Achish  of  Gath,  to  the  cave 
of  Adullam,  to  >[iz[)ah,  to  llareth;  Saul's  massacre  of 
Ahimelech  and  the  priests  (Chs.  21,  2:1).  David  de- 
livers Keibdi  then  flees  fi'om  Saul  to  the  wilderness  of 
Ziph,  then  to  Kn-gedi  where  1h'  spares  SauTs  life  (Chs. 
2.3,  24).  Samuers death  and  burial;  David,  Xabal,  Abi- 
gail (Ch.  25).  David  spares  Saul;  finds  refuge  with 
Achish;  Philistines  arm  ;  Saul  consults  the  witch  of  En- 
dor;  Achish  dismisses  David  because  of  l^hilistine  sus- 


68  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

picions ;  his  vengeance  on  Amalekites  who  had  desolated 
Ziklag  (Chs.  26-30).  Death  of  Saul  and  Jonathan  on 
Mt.  Gilboa  (Ch.  31). 

3.  2  Sam.  Chs.  1-24.  David  and  the  succession  of 
the  Monarchy. 

David's  lament  over  Saul  and  Jonathan  (Ch.  1). 
David  made  king  of  Judah  at  Hebron ;  Ishbosheth  king 
of  Israel ;  battle  between  their  followers  (Ch.  2).  David's 
power  increases ;  his  six  sons ;  Abner  forsakes  Ishbosheth 
for  David,  is  slain  by  Joab,  lamented  by  David  who 
punishes  the  slayers,  after  which  David  made  king  of 
all  Israel  (3 : 1-5 :  3).  David  captures  fortress  of  Zion 
from  Jebusites ;  his  friendship  with  Hiram ;  defeats  Phil- 
istines; ark  removed  to  "City  of  David"  (5:4-6:23). 
Xathan  forbids  David  to  build  the  Lord's  house;  the 
Lord  will  build  David's  house  (dynasty) ;  David's  prayer 
(Ch.  7).  David's  wars,  victories,  ministers;  friendship 
for  Mephibosheth ;  war  with  Amnion  (Chs.  8-10).  David's 
sin,  punishment,  penitence ;  Solomon  born ;  Ammon  de- 
feated (Chs.  11.  12).  Ammon's  criminal  assault  on  Ta- 
mar ;  Ammon  slain  by  Absalom's  order ;  Absalom's  flight ; 
restored  after  three  years  by  Joab  (Chs.  13,  14).  Ab- 
salom's rebellion ;  David's  flight;  ark  returned  to  Jerusa- 
lem; Ziba's  treachery;  Shimei's  cursing;  Ahitophel's 
suicide  (Chs.  15-17).  Battle  in  forest  of  Ephraim;  Ab- 
salom's death ;  David's  sorrow ;  his  return  to  Jerusalem ; 
Shimei,  Mephibosheth,  Barzillai ;  rivalry  (Chs.  18,  19). 
Revolt  of  Sheba ;  Joab  slays  Amasa ;  Sheba's  head  pre- 
sented to  Joab;  David's  ministers  (Ch.  20).  Three 
years  famine ;  satisfaction  to  Gibeonites ;  bones  of  Saul 
and  his  sons  buried;  Philistine  giants  slain  (Ch.  21). 
David^s  song  (Ch.   22;  Psa.    18).     David's  last  words; 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  69 

names  and  deeds  of  his  lieroes  (Ch.  23).     The  census 
and  pestilence;  the  altar  and  offerinfi:  (Ch.  24). 

IX.  Doctrine.— The  othcialand  national  institution  of 
the  office  of  prophet  and  king  in  the  sphere  of  revela- 
tion, and  the  development  of  the  Kingdom  of  God. 

X.  Messianic— ^lessianie  prophecy  in  the  ]>ooks  of 
Samuel  treats  for  the  most  part  of  the  Messianic  King 
and  Kingdom.  We  have  (a)  In  1  Sam.  2 : 1-10,  The 
prayer  for  it.  (h)  In  1  Sam.  2:27-36,  The  first  divine 
intimation  of  its  coming,  (c)  In  2  Sam.  Ch.  7,  The 
covenant  with  David  constituting  him  and  his  seed, 
as  the  famil}^  house,  d^^nasty  in  whom  this  Messianic 
promise  is  to  be  developed,  and  through  whom  it  is  to  be 
realized  and  forever  established,  [d)  In  2  Sam.  23:1-7, 
The  theocratic  king,  and  his  theocratic  rule. 


Literature.— Co7?i?nen^ane6' ;  Lange  ;  Keil  and  Delitzsch  ; 
Pulpit  and  Speaker's  Commentaries ;  Driver's  Hebrew  Text  of 
Samuel ;  Edersheim's  Israel  binder  Samuel,  Said  and  David. 


^       I     r^ 


U 


u 


'-^    T-1      ..    O'*    ^ 


-^".-        U 


1  ^ 


-Si  O  ■^  C*>  O"? 


10     T-H  f^ 


^  I  1^^  I 


II    i  ci  ^' 

■rH  OJ  T-^  (73  -^ 


^^? 


■m         CJ  Ol  X\  oi 

rCi  OJ  '^i   C>3 


23m2233S3 


O  -r^  '^'i  -^  "^^  C^l  < 

^  ^  M  x"  "'^  --■  :s 

i^'o    I','    I  7- 
§^  ;^  ^  t'  :c  i-c  I 

T-^  r-i  C^  ,_ 

;=;  ^  cv-j  ^  30  00  oi 


7^      I 


.  10 
•^  CI 
Oi     I 


CJO 


MU 


mwmmwwwmm 


WW 


www 

CQ  CI  o 


0} 

0 

50 

^ 

1^ 

H 

a. 

M 

H 

W 

^- 

E< 

go 

?t'ot'X?C?C«C>CO-r^Ot-w:COJiOC^»-'5'^ir-M'CCCOi>OOOt- 
^  J 'r  —  t-  i>  LO  i-O  IC  it  CJ  C?  CJ  C?  tH  tH  OS  Oi  00  GO  00  00  }>  iO  CO  cc 

oooc::::c;c:c:  —  c:c:c;ci3iOiOoaoooacooaoooQ03DX' 


bi 

^:   I   :    :    : 

^ 

!>i 

^ 

0  0  0  t-  c?  r 

1 

Ill's 'oi 

t<i 


CO 

.  ^ . .  i-  - 


re  -rH  I-  -*  t-  o  ir 


>?  X  ^  X  -^  o 


7.^ 


(^7    .. 

:d  CO 

'^'  o  ^       "? 


.    ».0    C<J    O   T-H         .   -tH 

C?  -rH  (M  ',?•■?  CO  00     I 

T-l      I       I       I       I    CO      I 

I    CO  ^  CO  I-     I    'OC 
X'  T-l  T-H  CJ  Ci  lO  CO 


<:c  i- 


-^ 

p 

CC  trr 

I'-r  »c  o  i?r  )•?*  lb*  ir:? 

T-l    T-H    1— 1    T-H    T—    T- (    1— ( 

a 
o 

32 

33335i2S 

C?  -^^  CI  Ci  07  c:?  C^ 

1 

0 

•>: 

^1 

Oded. 

Micah. 

Micah. 

&&^\^^Mi 

II 

Si 

O  O  O  05  c-  ^  o 
t-  t-  t-  iO  lO  i-O  ^ 

t- 1-  J>  t^  t-  f  t- 

JO 

(^i 

o 

CO 

TH 

CO 

<?! 

1 

CJ 

1 

T— 1 

1 

T-l 

JO  o » 

ri 

4 

^ 

^' 

CO 

cc 

!l  22^ 

o 

o 

:o 

?^ 

f-I 

fj^J. 

X) 

g 

6 

CO 

o 

c? 

Q     Q 

C7 

6 

CI 

c< 

Cv? 

GO 

c.go, 

:c 

t- 

. 

.  CO       . 

'tp 

iO 

o 

(?i  CD  C>  CO 

CM 

Ci 

1 

J 

M 

tH 

1— ( 

1 

■^ 

OJ 

CC 

TO 

1—1 

GO  O 

jr^-'i? 

cc 

-^' 

-+ 

O^ 

c< 

c? 

Ci 

53333333 

01  (M  07  C^  O^  -M  C3 

c> 

rd^  r^ 


§. 

3     S      ■      ris^'o!^ 

j;- 

SS    j;3;5 

xrx 

■S 

1 

% 

3 

^'rd                   .         .         . 

■i:) 

cc  ci^rd^^ 

S 

■Sfl.5.2.5.5 

:« 

r-< 

^ 

c3  S  a  S   fl   C3 

0) 

"1 

1 

h- 1 

:3 

1 

0^    <3J    0;    3j    <D    C 

1 

CO:CT-^C5C50iXX 

cQOi^ccoocic: 

t- 

S 
^ 

t-  o  to  :c  CO  to  )o  'O 

s. 

s 

« 


fl  fl  ^  - 

iir 

«o  ^  o  c< 


e  - 
s  ^ 


5  CO 


+3    cc  4J    jc 


C5  iO  C? 

c?  »o 


T-H   CO   1-1  CO   T-H 

CC  T^  T^  ^ 


6  ,-^A        "^     ,_   r-l   ,— <   ,_H   r-i   rCj   rd 

f^*  (11     nS       C       OJ     3^     1^     0^     U     rr*     (Tl 


A 

^ 

^  '5 

^    N 

r- 

■H~ 

^   cc 

^^ 

g"N 

5r!  N 

^P 

N  ^  !^  fin  fin  ^  <'1 


5^     ^  r=3 


ct   r-.   n   n   i) 


c  d"  O)  D  a; 
I  ^-5  "-5  i-s  t-j  CS] 


73  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


FIRST  AND  SECOND  KINGS. 

I.  l^ame.—Melakim  =Kin(js.  'Hie  liooks  are  so 
named  from  their  embracing  the  liistory  of  the  kings  of 
Judah  and  Israel.  The  two  Hooks  originally  eonstitnted 
but  one  Book. 

II.  Position.— The  Books  are  closely  related  to  the 
Books  of  Samuel  in  that  they  continue  the  history  of 
the  Israelitish  Monarchy,  tracing  it  through  the  various 
stages  of  its  prosperity,  decline  and  fall. 

III.  Time.— The  Books  of  Kings  cover  a  period  of 
about  450  years.  They  embrace  the  history  of  Israel 
from  the  period  of  David's  nomination  of  Solomon  as 
his  successor,  consequent  upon  the  rebellion  of  Adoni- 
jah,  to  the  release  of  Jehoiachin  from  prison  in  Babylon 
by  Evil-merodach,  562  B.  C,  that  is,  the  thirty-seventh 
year  of  the  Babylonian  captivity. 

IV.  Composition:— ASo^</-ces,  Date,  Authorship.  The 
Books  of  Kings  repeatedly  refer  to  written  documents 
which  w^ere  doubtless  used  b}-  the  author  in  the  compila- 
tion of  his  work.  These  written  documents,  or  sources 
employed  by  the  author  are 

1.  The  Book  of  the  Acts  of  Solomon.     1  Ki.  11:41. 

2.  The  Book  of  the  Chronicles  of  the  Kings  of  Israel. 
1  Ki.  14: 19,  and  referred  to  altogether  seventeen  times. 

3.  The  Book  of  the  Chronicles  of  the  Kings  of  Judah. 
1  Ki.  15:17,  and  referred  to  altogether  fifteen  times. 

These  books  "of  Chronicles,"  (2  and  3  above),  to 
which  reference  is  made,  were  evidently  historical  rec- 
ords written  during  the  reigns  of  the  kings  of  Israel  and 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  73 

Judah,  and  not  historical  works  written  by  two  nnknown 
private  individnals  in  tlie  last  stage  of  I  lie  Hebrew 
monarchy.  The  last  time  No.  3  above  is  referred  to  is 
in  -l  Ki,  -M: '),  in  connection  with  Jehoiakim,  B.  C.  600. 
Hence  it  is  supposed  that  "  The  Book  of  the  Chronicles 
of  the  Kings  of  Judali ''  was  the  work  of  a  writer  who 
must  have  lived  at  the  beginning  of  the  liabylonian  cap- 
tivity. This  view,  however,  is  untenable  as  evidenced 
by  statements  in  the  Books  of  Kings  going  to  show  that 
these  "Chronicles''  were  composed  of  ({(xniments  writ- 
ten at  an  early  period.     For  example, — 

(a)  The  statement  in  1  Ki.  9:21  refers  to  a  condition 
existing  in  the  time  of  Solomon,  and  the  writer  of  the 
statement,  but  not  applicable  to  the  divided  kingdoms 
of  Judah  and  Israel,  and  certainl}'  inaioplicable  after 
the  deportation  of  the  ten  tribes,  and  the  remnant  of  the 
Canaanites  in  their  territory  were  no  longer  tributary  to 
them. 

(b)  It  is  evident  that  the  statement  in  1  Ki.  12: 19  was 
written  before  the  ten  tribes  were  carried  away  captive 
by  Shahnaneser,  inasmuch  as  the  language  was  no  longer 
applicable  after  that  event. 

(c)  It  is  evident  that  the  statement  in  1  Ki.  8 :  8  was 
written  before  the  Babylonian  captivity,  because  the 
language  could  not  be  used  respecting  the  staves  of  the 
ark  when  the  temple  had  been  destroyed  by  Nebuchad- 
nezzar, and  all  its  sacred  utensils  had  been  removed. 

(cZ)  It  is  evident  that  the  statement  in  2  Ki.  8 :  22  was 
written  before  the  Babylonian  captivity,  for  otherwise 
the  language  would  be  inapplicable,  as  Judah  was  then 
carried  away  captive. 

The  author  of  the  Books  of  Kings,  who  lived  during 
the  Babylonian  captivity,  did  not  change  the  language 


74  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

of  passages  like  tlie  above  as  being  no  longer  applicable 
to  the  condition  of  the  people  in  his  time,  for  the  reason 
that  the  altered  circnmstances  of  the  people  in  his  time 
were  well  known,  and  were  not  of  such  a  nature  as  to 
demand  that  he  should  change  the  language  of  the  orig- 
inal documents. 

Hence  we  conclude  that  "  The  Book  of  the  dironicles 
of  the  Kings  of  Judah,"  and  ''  The  l>ook  of  the  Chroni- 
cles of  the  Kings  of  Israel,"  were  the  annals  of  the  re- 
spective kings  of  the  two  kingdoms,  written  down  for 
the  most  part  during  the  reign  of  each  king.  These 
annals  were  evidently  written  by  the  person  who  held 
the  office  of  the  Mazkeer  of  his  time.  The  Mazkeer 
was  the  reco/'C?e?',  historiographer,  the  king's  annalist, 
whose  duty  it  was  to  record  the  deeds  of  the  king  and 
the  events  of  his  reign.  The  first  mention  made  among 
the  Hebrews  of  this  office  of  recorder  is  in  2  Sam.  8:  IG 
where  we  are  told  that  in  the  time  of  David  "  Jehosha- 
phat  the  son  of  Ahilud  was  recorder."  He  is  also  men- 
tioned in  2  Sam.  20:24;  1  Ki.  4:3.  In  the  time  of 
Hezekiah  the  office  was  held  by  Joah  the  son  of  Asaph, 
and  in  the  time  of  Josiah  by  Joah  the  soii  of  Jehoaz. 

From  such  sources  the  author  of  the  Books  of  Kings 
drew  his  materials.  It  Avould  seem  that  this  author 
wrote  the  l^ooks  of  Kings,  or  at  least  completed  his  his- 
tory, in  the  second  half  of  the  Babylonian  captivity,  as 
he  states  that  Evil-merodach,  king  of  Babylon,  released 
Jehoiachin,  king  of  Judah,  from  prison  in  the  thirty- 
seventh  year  of  his  captivity.  2  Ki.  25:27-30.  On 
the  other  hand  it  would  seem  that  the  author  completed 
his  work  before  the  close  of  the  captivity  as  he  makes 
no  mention  of  that  event.  Who  this  author  of  the  J^ooks 
of  Kings  was  is  not  known. 


INTRODUCTION     OI'TLINES.  75 

V.  Credibility.  — 77/ (^  Jfoniniiciif.s.  The  liistorN  of 
the  Hooks  of  Kings  is  admitted  to  he  distinjL»iiis]ied  for 
its  fidelity  and  impartiality.  The  rulers  and  heroes  ol" 
Hebrew  history  are  estimated  according  to  the  impartial 
standards  of  the  divine  law,  and  justified  or  condemned 
according  to  their  deeds.  Moreover  the  history  being- 
derived  from  contemporary'  annals,  rests  upon  the  surest 
basis  of  truth,  thus  possessing,  according  to  skeptics 
themselves,  a  very  high  degree  of  probability.  The  his- 
tory of  the  Hooks  of  the  Kings  receives  confirmation 
also  from  the  monuments.  The  Moabite  Stone  dis- 
covered in  1809,  was  erected  about  H.  C.  900,  by  ^fesha, 
king  of  Moab,  in  commemoration  of  his  deliverence  from 
the  Israelites.  The  inscription  on  the  Stone  agrees  with 
I^iblical  statements  pertaining  to  that  i^eriod.  Tn  the 
course  of  the  inscription  occur  the  following  names, 
that  also  occui-in  the  Hebrew  Scriptures,  riz., — Jehovah, 
C'hemosh  (the  national  god  of  the  Moabites),  Mesha, 
Omri,  Moab,  Gad,  Israel,  Medeba,  Atoroth,  Dibon  Baal- 
meon,  Nebo,  Jahaz,  Heth-diblathaim,  Aroer,  Iloronaim 
and  Kirjathaim.  This  is  strikingly  confirmatory  of 
the  historicity  of  the  Scripture  narrative,  and  i^roves 
that  the  names  in  the  l>ooks  of  Kings  have  come  down 
to  us  in  their  integrity,  and  that  they  represent  real  ])er- 
sons  and  i)laces.  The  Assyrian  monuments  furnish 
similar  i-emarkable  confirmations  of  the  history  in  these 
Hooks  of  Kings.  Foi'  e.\am])h': — for  some  centuries 
Samaria  was  known  to  the  Assyiians  as  '•  Heth-(  )nii'i  " 
=  "house"  Ol-  "city  of  Omii."  thus  agreeing  with  the 
Hebrew  records  in  the  iniiioitance  they  assign  to  this 
king,  as  especially  condrniing  the  statenuMil  in  1  Ki. 
16:24.  Ahab,  Omri's  son  and  successor,  is  mentioned 
by  name  in  an  Assyrian  contemporary  insciipiion,  wliieji 


76  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

in  harmony  with  the  account  in  1  Ki.  18:46;  21:1,  2, 
calls  him  "Ahab  of  Jezreel."  The  Black  Obelisk  of 
Shalmaneser  contains  a  notice  of  the  Israelitish  king, 
Jehu,  and  another  of  the  Syrian  king  Hazael,  who  suc- 
ceeded Benhadad,  Ahab's  contemporar3\  The  state- 
ments in  2  Ki.  15:29;  16:9,  10,  29,  etc.,  receive  abun- 
dant confirmation  from  the  Assyrian  monuments.  The 
annals  of  Tigiath-pileser  also  mention  the  Israelite  kings, 
Menahem  and  Hoshea.  The  annals  of  Sargon,  Shal- 
maneser's  successor,  note  the  events  connected  with 
the  capture  of  Samaria,  and  the  fall  of  the  northern 
kingdom  of  Israel,  and  assign  these  events  to  his  (Sar- 
gon's)  first  year,  which  was  B.  C.  722,  721.  Thus  an 
exact  agreement  exists  between  the  Assyrian  and 
Hebrew  dates,  the  Hebrew  chronology  placing  the  fall 
of  Samaria  135  years  before  the  capture  of  Jerusalem  by 
Nebuchadnezzar,  which  was  in  the  eighteenth  year  of 
that  king,  or  B.  C.  586,  and  B.  C.  586  -f  135  =  B.  C. 
721.  There  is  a  like  close  agreement,  and  remarkable 
confirmation  in  the  Assyrian  and  Hebrew  accounts  of 
the  military  operations  between  Sennacherib  and  Heze- 
kiah:  the  annals  of  Sennacherib  campared  with  2  Ki. 
18:  7,  13-16.  And  the  walls  of  Karnak  in  Egypt  con- 
firm the  statement  of  1  Ki.  14:25,  26. 

VI.  Divisions.— The  Books  of  Kings  ma}^  be  divided 
upon  the  basis  of  their  three  principal  historical 
periods,  viz.^ 

1.  1  Ki.  Chs.  1-11.     Solomon. 

2.  1  Ki.  Chs.  12-22  and  2  Ki.  Chs.  1-17.  Israel  and 
Judah. 

3.  2  Ki.  Chs.  18-25.     Judah. 

VII.  Contents.— The  Scripture  references  in  the  pre- 
ceding table  of  The  Kings  indicate  the  contents.     Com- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  77 

pare  also  the  IJooks'  ol"  those  prophets  who  were  contein- 
poraries  of  the  kings. 

VIII.  Doctrine.— The  two  principal  teaehinj^s  that 
receive  repeated  and  startling  enforcement  are, — 

1.  Obedience  and  righteousness  ])rocure  every  blessing. 

2.  Disobedience  and  apostas}-  work  general  ruin. 

IX.  Messianic— The  only  Messianic  element  in  the 
Books  of  Kings  is  that  which  is  bound  up  in  the  theo- 
cratic development  of  the  kingdom,  and  in  its  typical 
characters,  as,  e.  g.,  Solomon. 


Liiterature. —Keil  and  Delitzsch,  Lange,  Speaker's  and  Pul- 
pit Commentaries.     Various  works  on  the  Bible  and  Recent  Dis- 


FIRST  ANDSECOND  CHRONICLES. 

I.  Name.— Z)i&7'e  hayyamim==  Registers  of  Days  or 
Journal  of  Affairs.  The  nature  of  the  w^ork  gives  it 
this  name.  The  name  Chronicles  comes  from  some 
copies  of  the  Vulgate. 

II.  Position.— The  Books  of  Chronicles  originally  con- 
stituted one  Book.  The}^  are  placed  at  the  end  of  the 
Hebrew  Canon,  being  included  in  the  Hagiographa.  As 
the  events  related  in  them,  however,  generally  belong  to 
the  same  age  as  the  Books  of  Kings,  they  appropriately 
follow  those  Books,  as  in  the  A.  V. 

III.  Time.— Considering  that  the  I^ooks  of  Chronicles 
open  with  the  genealogies  found  in  Genesis,  the}'  cover 


78  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

a  period  of  time  l)ei>iniiiiii>  witli  Adam,  and  extending 
to  tlie  proclamation  of  Cyrus  lor  tlu^  rebuildinii'  of  tlie 
temple  in  Jerusalem. 

IV.  Coiiipo.sitioii:— iSV>?//Yr.S',  Date  and  Auf/iorsliij). 
The  author  of  Chi'onicles  refers  to  various  works  treat- 
ing- of  the  main  portions  of  the  history  covered  by  liis 
Books,  wliicli  works  he  douV)tless  used  in  the  composi- 
tion of  liis  own  woi'k.  These  works  are  in  addition  to 
the  earlier  historical,  canonical  J>ooks  from  Genesis  to 
and  including  Kings.  The  tirst  mentioned  of  these  ad- 
ditional soui'ces  are, — The  Book  of  Nathan  the  projihet, 
and  The  Book  of  Gad  the  seer.  1  Ghr.  20:29.  Tlie 
Prophecy  of  Ahijah  the  Shilonite.  and  the  Visions  of 
Iddo  the  seer,  are  also  mentioned  in  addition  to  the 
Book  of  Nathan  the  prophet,  as  sources  for  the  history 
of  Solomon.  2  Chr.  9:29.  Other  sources  for  the  history 
of  other  kings  are,  the  IJook  of  Shemaiah  the  prophet, 
the  Book  of  Iddo  the  seer  concerning  genealogies  (2  Chr. 
12:15),  the  ^fidrasli  or  Commentary  of  the  prophet 
Iddo  (2  Chr.  1:3:22),  the  Book  of  the  Kings  of  Judah 
and  Israel  (2  Chr.  16:11;  25:20;  28:20;  32:  32);  the 
same  work  or  works  referred  to,  as  the  Book  of  the 
Kings  of  Israel  and  Judah  (2  C^hr.  27:  7;  35:  27;  30:8); 
the  Book  of  the  Kings  of  Israel  (2  Chr.  20:31;  33:  18); 
the  Commentary  of  the  liook  of  Kings  (2  Chr.  21:27). 
The  author  also  refers  to  Isaiah  the  prophet  (2  Chr. 
26:22),  and  to  the  vision  of  Isaiaii  the  prophet  (2  Chr. 
32  :  32).  Comparing  the  Books  of  Chronicles  with  the 
liooks  of  Samuel  and  Kings  there  is  uo  good  reason  to 
doubt  that  the  compiler  of  the  former  Books  not  only 
made  use  of  the  latter  Books,  but  that  the\'  were  for 
him  in  many  matters  the  chief  source  in  his  history  of 
the  kings. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  ?0 

As  to  tlic  inatlor  of  date: — -as  the  history  in  liicsc 
liooks  of  C'lii'oiiielos  t<'rininat(\s  witli  the  i)roehiiiiation 
of  (\vnis  for  the  rebiiihliiii;  of  .lei'usalein  ('?  Chr.  :}(;:2'^, 
'I')),  about  .■):)(*)  I>.  C\,  tlie  IJooks  eoiikl  not  have  been 
(•onii)ose(I  before  that  monai-eh's  reii;n.  On  the  otlier 
hand  there  is  nothinii  in  the  Hooks  of  Chronieh's  behjnj;- 
iiiii  to  an  ai>e  hiter  tlian  that  of  K/i'a,  w  liieh  is  probable 
proof  that  tliey  were  composed  in  his  time.  'J1ie  sui)- 
pt)sit ion  that  the  geneak)gies  in  1  ('hr.  8:19-24  exten<l 
to  tlie  time  of  Alexander  the  Great  is  unfounded,  for 
tlie  list  iioes  no  further  than  the  sons  of  Ilananaiah,  the 
son  of  Zerubbabel.  1'here  is  no  evidenee  that  the  names 
fodowing-  in  the  list  were  those  of  descendants  of  the 
previous  ones,  but  rather  that  they  are  parallel  i>eneal()- 
gies.  And  this  is  confirmed  by  the  fact  that  in  the  last 
part  of  the  list  occur  names  of  i)ersons  found  also  in 
Kzra,  who  speaks  of  them  as  liavin,i>-  gone  up  Avith  him 
in  the  reign  of  Artaxerxes.  Accordingly  the  genealogies 
in  (lironicles  do  not  come  down  later  than  the  time  of 
Ezra,  for  Zerubbabel  went  u})  to  Jerusalem  in  the  begin- 
ning of  the  reign  of  Cyrus,  5:>G  1>.  C.,  and  the  grand- 
children of  Zerubbabel,  mentioned  in  1  Chr.  :>:  10-21, 
would  be  the  contemporaries  of  K/ra,  who  went  up  to 
Jerusalem  in  the  seventh  year  of  Artaxerxes,  about  to? 
B.  V.     Ezra  7:0,  7. 

In  point  of  authorship,  the  spii-it,  tlie  style,  the  ling- 
uistic nsages,  the  comparison  of  the  l>ooks  of  Clironicles 
and  Ezra, — all  point  to  Ezra  as  the  author. 

V.  Credibility.— x\s  the  main  portion  of  the  liistory 
in  Chronicles  is  the  same  as  that  contained  in  the  IJooks 
of  Kings,  the  IJooks  of  Chronicles  possess  all  the  claims 
to  be  considered  genuine  history  that  belong  to  the  nai*ra- 
tives  in  the  earlier  Books.      Where  the  authoi*  of  Chron- 


8  0  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

ielevS  t'uinislu's additional  iiiatlcr  he  refers  to  the  oriiiiiial 
sources  whence  he  derived  his  iuforiiiatioii.  And  in  ad- 
dition to  this  the  historical  credibility  of  the  author  is 
conhrnied  by  independent  testimony,  and  canonical  au- 
thorities not  named  by  tlie  writer.  Thus  the  invasion 
of  Jerusalem  by  the  Philistines  and  Arabians  in  the 
reign  of  Jehoram  (Chr.  21:10-11)),  not  mentioned  in 
Kings,  is  contii-med  by  Joel  o :  4-G.  And  the  Avars  of 
Uzziali  and  Ahaz  against  the  Philistines,  described  in  2 
Chr.  26:6;  28:18,  agree  with  Isa.  14:28;  Amos  6:2. 
In  respect  to  numbers,  e.  y.,  ages  and  reigns  of  kings, 
the  Books  of  Chronicles  and  Kings  as  a  rule  agree.  In 
a  few  instances  numbers  in  Chronicles  are  excessive,  but 
so  excessive  as  at  once  to  indicate  that  the  fault  is  not 
to  be  ascribed  to  the  author,  but  to  a  corruption  of  the 
original  text. 

VI.  Desig-n.— Although  the  Books  of  Samuel  and 
Kings  were  already  written,  still  the  author  of  Chroni- 
cles had  a  design  in  preparing  his  woi'k  not  met  by  the 
former  Books.  This  design  was  in  the  tirst  place,  to 
furnish  the  genealogies  of  the  Israelites,  which  were  but 
partially  given  in  the  other  Books  of  the  Hebrew  peo- 
ple. In  the  next  place  his  design  was  to  give  a 
connected  history  from  the  death  of  Saul  to  the  procla- 
mation of  Cyrus  for  the  rebuilding  of  the  temple  in 
Jerusalem.  In  carrying  out  this  design  he  confines 
himself,  after  the  separation  of  the  ten  tribes,  to  the 
house  of  Judah,  omitting  considerable  matter  found  in 
Samuel  and  Kings,  and  introducing  new  matter,  esj^ec- 
iall^^  such  as  relates  to  the  armies  of  David,  and  the 
service  of  the  priests  and  Levites  in  the  temple. 

VII.  Divisions  and  Contents.  — These  are  as  fol- 
lows : — 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  81 

1.  1  Chroii.  Chs.  1-9.  A  series  of  genealogical  tables, 
similar  to  those  found  in  Genesis,  beginning  with  Adam, 
together  with  the  genealogies  of  the  Israelites  in  the 
times  following  the  history  in  the  Pentateuch,  terminat- 
ing in  the  royal  line  with  the  sons  of  Elioenai  (3:24), 
who  lived  after  the  return  of  the  Jews  from  Babylon. 
Interspersed  with  the  genealogies  are  other  notices, — 
historical,  geographical  and  liturgical. 

2.  1  Chron.  Chs.  10-29  and  2  Chron.  Chs.  1-9.  Be- 
gins with  the  death  of  Saul  and  the  accession  of  David 
to  the  Kingdom  of  Israel,  and  giving  the  histories  of 
David  and  Solomon,  ends  with  the  death  of  Solomon. 

3.  2  Chron.  Chs.  10-36.  Begins  with  the  reign  of 
Rehoboam,  Solomon's  son  and  successor,  embraces  the 
history  of  the  kingdom  of  Judah  only,  and  extends  to 
the  proclamation  of  Cyrus  for  the  rebuilding  of  the 
temple  in  Jerusalem. 

VIII.  Doctrine. — Remembering  that  the  Books  of 
Chronicles  were  written  at  the  termination  of  the  Baby- 
lonian exile,  these  doctrinal  teachings  become  empha- 
sized : — 

1.  God's  dispensational  ways  from  the  beginning. 

2.  The  election  of  grace  and  the  reward  of  faithful- 
ness in  the  return  of  a  remnant  from  captivity  to  the 
Land  of  Promise. 

3.  The  abandonment  of  idolatry  and  the  attainment 
of  spirituality  through  divine  chastisement. 

IX.  Messianic.  -The  Books  of  Chronicles  close  with 
a  kingless  nation ;  but  a  nation  looking  forward  to  the 
near  coming  of  its  true  King,  Jehovah,  the  Messiah; — 
the  King  of  whom  its  David  and  Solomon  w(M*e  types. 


Literature. — Keil  and  Delitzsch,  L(ni(/(\  Pulpit  <ui<l  Speaker's 
Commcntdries. 

[6] 


82  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


EZRA. 

I.  Name.— In  Hebrew  and  English,  Ezra.  The  Book 
is  so  called  from  its  principal  character,  Ezra,  and  per- 
haps also  from  his  being  the  reputed  author  of  the  Book. 
The  Book  is  written  partl}^  in  Hebrew,  partly  in  Chaldee. 
See  p.  3. 

II.  Position.— Formerly  the  Books  of  Ezra  and  Nehe- 
miah,  constituted  one  Book.  But  in  modern  editions  of 
the  Hebrew  Bible,  as  also  in  the  LXX,  the  Peshito- 
Syriac,  and  the  Vulgate,  they  are  separated.  No  sufli- 
cient  reason  exists  for  combining  Ezra  and  Nehemiah  in 
one  Book  as  if  they  were  the  work  of  one  and  the  same 
author.  The  language  with  which  Nehemiah  opens, — 
"  The  words  of  Nehemiah,  the  son  of  Hachaliah,"  natur- 
ally separates  the  two  Books.  The  list  in  Ezra  Ch.  2  is 
given,  with  slight  variation,  in  Neh.  7:6-70.  If  the 
two  Books  are  reallj^  one,  and  the  work  of  a  single 
author,  why  is  the  long  list  given  twice,  and  with  varia- 
tions ? 

III.  Time.— The  Books  of  Ezra  and  Nehemiah  extend 
over  a  period  of  about  one  hundred  years;  i.  e.,  from 
the  return  of  the  exiles  under  Zerubbabel,  B.  C.  536,  to 
the  second  visit  of  Nehemiah  in  B.  C.  432. 

IV.  Theme.— The  Books  of  Ezra  and  Nehemiah  treat 
of — Restoration,  Reorganization  and  Reformation; — 
that  is,  the  restoration  of  the  Jews  from  the  Babylonian 
captivity,  their  reorganization  in  the  Promised  Land,  and 
the  reformation  as  to  certain  abuses  that  had  crept  in. 

V.  Chronology.— The  chronology  of  the  period  of  Ezra 
and  Nehemiah,  and  up  to  the  close  of  the  Old  Testament 
Canon,  is  in  brief  as  follows  ; — 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  83 


B.C. 


536. 

Cyrus.                                     1 

B.  C.  444. 

Nelieniiah's   tirst   visit  to 

529. 

Cambyses. 

Jerusalem. 

522. 

Pseudo-Smerdis. 

"      432. 

Nehemiah's  secotid  visit  to 

522. 

DariiTS  Hystaspis. 

Jerusalem. 

516. 

Dedication  of  the  Temple. 

''      425. 

Xerxes  11. 

485. 

Xerxes. 

•'      425. 

Soffdianus. 

465. 

Artaxerxes    I.    (Lonsima- 1 

''      424. 

Darius  II. 

nus). 

''     4n5. 

Artaxerxes  II. 

458. 

Mission  of  Ezra.                   i 

VI.  Composition:— ^4 /////o/vs7///>»,  Vnitij,  etc.  Clis. 
7:  27 — 0:  15  ai-e  ij^enerally  conceded  to  be  llie  work  of 
Ezra.  The  reinaindei-  of  the  Book  is  for  tlie  most  part 
assigned  by  critics  to  the  author  of  tlie  l^ooks  of  Chron- 
icles. No  sufficient  reason  exists,  however,  against  as- 
cribing the  entire  Book  to  Ezra.  That  Ezra  speaks  at 
times  in  the  first  person,  and  at  othertiines  uses  the  third 
person,  is  in  the  light  of  ScriiDture  usage,  no  sufficient 
reason  to  infer  diversity  of  authorship.  Ch.  10  stands 
in  such  close  connection  with  what  precedes  that  we 
cannot  but  conclude  it  was  written  by  the  same  author. 
Moreover  it  is  not  at  all  probable  that  Ezra  would  begin 
his  narrative  with  7:27,  or  with  the  letter  of  Artaxerxes 
that  immediately  precedes  it  in  7:12-26;  but  would 
rather  prefix  to  it  an  introduction  after  the  manner  of 
7 : 1-1 0.  Hence  it  is  concluded  that  Ezra  wrote  the  sec- 
ond part  of  the  Book  bearing  his  name,  i.  e.,  Chs.  7-10. 
But  the  first  part  is  also  to  be  assigned  to  him  as  its  au- 
thor. Ezra  did  not  go  up  to  Jerusalem  till  the  seventh 
year  of  Artaxerxes,  about  B.  C.  458.  He  therefore  had 
no  active  i)art  in  the  affairs  related  in  the  first  part  of 
the  Book,  and  ending  with  the  dedication  of  the  temple 
and  the  observance  of  the  passover  (0 :  15-22).  But  the 
manner  in  which  the  second  part  of  Ezra  opens,  viz.^ — 
'^  Now,  after  these  things,  in  the  reign  of  xVrtaxerxes," 
naturally  refers  to  a  preceding  part.  As  Ezra  wrote  an 
account  of  the  second  company  of  exiles  who  returned 
to  Jerusalem,  it  was  the  most  natural  thing  for  him  to 
prefix  to  it  an  account  of  the  preceding  company  who 


84  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

had  returned.  He  had  several  documents  to  furnish  him 
with  the  materials  for  this  part  of  his  history,  viz.^  the 
same  list  that  Nehemiah  had  found  when  he  went  up  to 
Jerusalem,  and  incorporated  in  his  Book  (Neh.  7:  5-73); 
the  decree  of  Cyrus  in  favor  of  the  Jews;  the  letter  of 
their  enemies  to  Artaxerxes,  and  his  order  to  stop  build- 
ing the  temple ;  and  the  decree  of  Darius  for  its  rebuild- 
ing. These  documents  together  with  the  statements  of 
those  who  had  been  eye-witnesses  of  those  former  trans- 
actions furnished  Ezra  with  the  material  for  writing  the 
history  of  the  first  part  of  his  Book,  Chs.  1-6.  This 
histor^^  is  consecutive,  and  directly  connected  with  the 
second  part.  Why  should  any  other  than  Ezra  write 
the  greater  part  of  the  Book  (Chs.  1-6)  and  prefix  it  to 
a  writing  of  Ezra,  instead  of  calling  it  by  some  other 
name  ? 

VII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  Book  of  Ezra 
naturally  divides  itself  into  two  parts. 

1.  Ezra  Chs.  1-6.  Account  of  the  first  company  of 
exiles  who  went  uj)  to  Jerusalem  from  Babylon  with 
Zerubbabel,  in  the  beginning  of  the  reign  of  Cyrus,  and 
the  restoration  of  the  Temple.  The  account  includes, — 
(a)  Ch.  1.  Decree  of  Cyrus  permitting  the  Jews  to 
return  to  Jerusalem,  and  take  with  them  the  sacred 
vessels  Nebuchadnezzar  had  removed  to  Babylon,  (h) 
Ch.  2.  Register  of  those  w^ho  returned,  (c)  Ch.  3. 
Altar  of  Burnt-offering  set  up;  Feast  of  Booths  observed ; 
foundations  of  the  temple  laid,  (d)  Ch.  4.  The  work 
of  restoring  the  temple  impeded  till  the  second  year  of 
Darius,  (e)  Ch.  5.  The  work  of  restoration  resumed 
under  the  impetus  given  by  the  prophets  Haggai  and 
Zechariah.  (/)  Ch.  6.  The  temple  restored,  dedicated, 
and  the  Passover  observed. 


J 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  85 

2.  Ezra  Ohs.  7-10.  Account  of  tlie  going  up  to 
Jerusalem  of  Ezra  and  his  companions  in  the  seventh 
year  of  Artaxerxes,  and  the  reforms  they  introduced 
after  their  arrival ;  embracing  (a)  Ch.  7.  The  permis- 
sion of  Ezra  and  his  company  to  return ;  the  decree  of 
Artaxerxes;  Ezra's  gratitude  to  God.  (b)  Ch.  8.  Ezra's 
companions  and  the  journey  to  Jerusalem,  (c)  Ch.  9. 
Jews  in  Judah  having  contracted  marriage  with  foreign 
wives,  Ezra  makes  a  solemn  confession  to  God  in  the 
name  of  his  people,    (cl)  Ch.  10.    The  reform  of  abuses. 

VIII.  Doctrine.— The  history  in  Ezra  emphasizes 

1.  God's  government  of  the  world  for  the  benefit  of 
his  people,  as,  e.  g.,  in  the  decrees  of  restoration,  etc. 

2.  Restoration  to  God,  reorganization  of  the  worship 
of  God,  and  reformation  in  life. 

IX.  Messianic— While  there  is  no  direct  Messianic 
prophec}^  in  the  Book  of  Ezra,  still  a  number  of  Mes- 
sianic prophecies  were  uttered  in  the  times  of  Ezra  and 
the  restoration,  as,  e.  g.,  in  the  Books  of  the  prophets 
Haggai  and  Zechariah,  and  in  the  post-exilic  Psalms. 
Zerubbabel  is  also  a  type  of  the  Messiah. 


liiterSLtiir e,—Keil  and  Delitzsch,  Lange,  Speaker's  and  Pul- 
pit Commentaries.  Ryle  in  Cambridge  Bible  for  Schools.  Hun- 
ter's After  the  Exile. 


NEHEMIAH. 

I.  Name.— This  Book  receives  its  name  Nehemiah 
from  the  fact  that  he  is  the  chief  character  in  as  well  as 
the  author  of  the  Book.  This  Nehemiah  is  not  to  be 
confounded  with  the  Nehemiah  of  Ez.  2:2. 


86  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

II.  Position.— The  Books  of  Ezra  and  Xeheniiali, 
formerly  taken  as  one  Book,  are  in  modern  editions  of 
the  Hebrew  Bible,  in  the  LXX,  in  the  Peshito-Syriae 
and  Vulgate,  separated  as  the}^  slionld  be.  The  Book 
of  Kehemiah,  unlike  Ezra,  is  written  wholly  in  Hebrew. 
It  properly  follows  Ezra  as  it  supplements  and  completes 
the  account  of  the  return  of  the  Jews  from  captivity, 
recorded  in  Ezra. 

III.  Time.— Nehemiah  flourished  and  wrought  his 
work  in  behalf  of  the  restored  captives  nearly  one  hun- 
dred years  after  Zerubbabel  reached  Judea.  The  Book 
itself  of  Nehemiah  covers  a  period  of  about  twelve 
years,  from  B.  C.  444  to  432.  See  Chronology  under 
Ezra. 

IV.  Biographical.— Nehemiah  was  cupbearer  to  Arta- 
xerxes  Longimanus.  In  the  twentieth  year  of  that  mon- 
arch, Nehemiah,  having  received  intelligence  of  the 
distressed  condition  of  his  countrymen  in  Judah,  ob- 
tained permission  from  the  king  to  visit  Jerusalem  and 
to  rebuild  it.  After  this  the  Book  furnishes  an  account 
of  the  building  of  the  wall  of  Jerusalem  under  his  ad- 
ministration, the  dedication  of  the  rebuilt  wall,  the 
correction  of  abuses,  interspersed  with  various  lists. 
See  Introduction  to  Malachi. 

V.  Cov[i-\io^\t\on'.~ AiifhorsMp,  Unity,  etc.  The  close 
connection  that  exists  between  different  parts  of  the 
Books  of  Neliemiah  argues  a  single  authorship.  The 
opening  words  of  the  Book  assert  that  this  author  is 
Nehemiah  himself.  And  this  is  for  the  most  part  con- 
ceded with  one  or  two  exceptions.  Some  critics  regard 
Chs.  8,  1),  10  as  an  interpolation  made  by  the  author  of 
the  Books  of  Chronicles  upon  the  basis  of  contemporary 
notes.     But  such  an  interpolation  in  the  writings  of  one 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  87 

who  held  the  position  Nehemiah  did,  and  that  an  inter- 
polation too  in  the  middle  of  the  Book,  is  most  unnatural. 
Moreover  there  is  a  close  connection  between  the  inci- 
dents recorded  in  this  so-called  interpolated  section,  and 
what  immediatel}^  precedes;  e.  g.^  compare  7:73  with 
8  :  14-18,  and  9:1.  Besides  the  minute  particulars  given 
in  these  three  so-called  interpolated  chapters  show  that 
they  were  written  down  by  an  eye-witness;  thus  note 
the  writer's  use  of  the  first  i)erson  plural  in  Ch.  10, 
showing  that  he  was  a  participator  in  the  events.  Once 
more  the  unity  of  authorship,  the  unity  of  the  whole 
Book  is  evidenced  by  the  fact  tliat  there  are  linguistic 
peculiarities  common  both  to  the  so-called  interpolated 
section  and  the  undisputed  parts  of  the  Book,  that  occur 
rarely  elsewhere.  As  to  12:1-10,  the  incorporation  of 
such  a  list  in  the  Book  is  altogether  ajjpropriate,  as  its 
object  was  to  give  the  names  of  the  Levites  who  took 
part  in  the  dedication  of  the  wall  of  Jerusalem,  described 
in  12 :  24-47.  It  is  perfectly  consistent  with  Nehemiah's 
authorship  that  reference  should  be  made  in  12 :  26,  47 
to  "  the  days  of  Nehemiah  and  Ezra,"  for  these  words 
could  have  been  written  by  Nehemiah  after  he  had  re- 
tired from  the  governorship  if  not  before,  as  they  refer 
to  his  political  life.  The  historicity  of  the  Books  of 
Ezra  and  Nehemiah  is  confirmed  by  the  correspondence 
that  exists  between  them  and  other  prophetical  writings. 

VI.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  principal  divisions 
are  three,  viz., 

1.  Chs.  1-7.  Embracing  (a)  Chs.  1,  2.  Occasion  of 
Nehemiah's  visit  to  Jerusalem, — the  restoration  of  the 
city's  walls,  etc.  {h)  Chs.  3,  4.  The  opposition  to  the 
progress  of  this  work,  overcome,  (c)  Ch.  5.  Secures 
just    enactments    in    certain     administrative    courses. 


88  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

(r/)  Oh.  ().  Another  attempt  to  hinder  the  completion  of 
the  walls  defeated,  (e)  Ch.  7.  Beneticent  municipal 
measures  adopted,  and  a  list  of  the  exiles  who  returned 
with  Zerubbabel  given. 

2.  Chs.  8-10.  Embracing  (a)  Ch.  8.  The  people's 
request  to  have  the  Law^  read,  granted;  the  feast  of 
I^ooths  observed,  (b)  Ch.  9.  Confession  of  sin,  and  a 
solemn  covenant  made,  (c)  Ch.  10.  The  terms  of  the 
covenant. 

3.  Chs.  11-13.  Embracing  (a)  (1i.  11.  Residents  of 
Jerusalem  and  neighboring  towns.  (6)  Ch.  12.  Leviti- 
cal  lists ;  account  of  the  dedication  of  the  walls ;  dues 
of  the  priests  and  Levites,  and  the  liberalit}'  of  the  com- 
munitJ^  (c)  Nehemiah's  second  visit  to  Jerusalem; 
religious  measures  and  reforms.     See  under  Malachi. 

VII.  Doctrine  and  Messianic— See  under  p]zra,  and 
compare  Haggai,  Zechariah  and  Malachi. 


Literature.— -See  Literature  under  Ezra. 


ESTHER, 


I.  'Name,— Aster  =^  Esther  =  star.  The  Book  is  so 
named  from  its  principal  character,  a  Jewish  maid  called 
originally  Hadassah,  but  Esther  after  she  became  the 
wife  of  Ahasuerus,  i.  e.,  Xerxes  (B.  C.  485-465). 

II.  Time.— The  Persian  King  Ahasuerus  of  the  Book 
of  Esther  is  now  genei'ally  identified  with  Xerxes,  who 
reigned  B.  C.  485-465.  The  events  therefore  took  place 
during  his  reign.  The  Book  opens  in  the  third  year  of  his 
reign  (1 :  3),  i.  e.,  B.  C.  482.    See  Chronology  under  Ezra. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  SO 

III.  Argument.  The  narrative  of  the  Book  is,  briefly, 
as  follows: — King-  Ahasiieriis,  who  reigned  from  India 
to  Ethiopia,  in  tlie  third  year  of  his  reign  made  a  great 
feast  in  Shnshan,  the  palace.  During  the  feast  he 
ordered  Queen  ^^ashti  to  be  brought  in  that  he  might 
exliibit  her  beauty  to  his  guests.  Yashti  refused  to  com- 
ply with  his  request ;  whereupon  he  deposed  her  from 
being  queen,  and  chose  in  her  stead  Esther,  a  Jewess, 
the  cousin  and  adopted  daughter  of  Mordecai.  Hainan, 
prime  minister  of  Ahasuerus,  angered  because  Mordecai 
did  not  show  him  required  reverence,  obtained  a  decree 
from  the  king  for  the  slaughter  of  all  the  Jews  in  the 
kingdom.  Esther  obtains  a  counter  decree.  Mordecai 
is  promoted  to  the  highest  place  of  honor,  and  Haman 
is  hung.  The  Jews  slaughter  their  enemies,  and  intro- 
duce the  feast  of  Purim  in  commemoration  of  their 
deliverance.  The  Book  concludes  with  a  description  of 
the  greatness  of  Ahasuerus. 

IV.  Credibility. —Against  the  credibility  of  the  history 
in  Esther  it  is  urged  that  it  is  not  supposable  that  the 
king  would  issue  a  decree  for  the  slaughter  of  all  the 
Jew^s  in  his  kingdom  and  publish  that  decree  twelve 
months  before  it  was  to  take  effect.  It  is  also  considered 
unnatural  that  the  king,  Xerxes,  instead  of  revoking 
the  bloody  decree,  should  issue  a  counter  decree  giving 
the  Jews  liberty  to  arm  and  defend  themselves,  result- 
ing in  the  slaughter  of  75,000  of  hissubjects.  But  there 
is  nothing  at  all  incredible  in  all  this,  or  any  like  objec- 
tions that  are  urged  against  the  historicity  of  the  Book. 
The>  correspond  precisely  with  wliat  is  known  of  Xerxes 
from  other  sources,  with  what  is  known  of  many  another 
despot.  The  historical  details  furnished  are  too  numerous 
and  precise  to  regard  the  Book  as  pui'e  fabrication,  and 


90  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

to  regard  it  as  other  than  gennine  contemporary  history. 
The  universal  observance  of  the  feast  of  Purim  is  a 
standing  attestation  of  the  historicity  of  Esther.  The 
fact  that  the  name  of  God  does  not  occur  in  the  Book  of 
Esther  is  certainly  strange,  but  seems  also  to  be  by  de- 
sign, and  that  not  simply  in  order  to  guard  against  the 
profanation  of  the  name  at  the  Purim  feast  when  it  was 
intended  that  the  Book  should  be  read,  but  also  in  this 
way  to  give  peculiar  emphasis,  to  render  all  the  more 
conspicuous,  the  providential  work  of  God  which  is  so 
obviously  present  and  operative  all  through  the  historj^ 
of  the  Book. 

V.  Composition,— Autho7\ship  and  Date.  The  author 
of  the  Book  is  not  known.  It  was  probably  written  by 
a  Jew  at  Susa  during  the  Persian  dominion.  The 
minuteness  and  vividness  of  the  particulars  narrated 
would  seem  to  show  that  the  writer  lived  in  close  prox- 
imity to  the  events  recorded. 

VI.  Doctrine  and  Messianic— The  Book  contains  no 
direct  Messianic  prophecy.  The  doctrinal  thought  em. 
phasized  is  God's  government  in  providence. 


Literature.— -KeiV  and    Delitzsch,  Lange,  Haley,    Speaker's 
and  Pulpit  Commentaries. 


HEBREW  POETRY. 

Hebrew  poetry  goes  back  to  the  earliest  times,  appear, 
ing  already  in  Genesis.  A  number  of  the  Books  of  the 
Old  Testament  are  entirely  poetical,  while  poetical  selec- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  91 

tions  are  preserved  also  in  the  historical  I^ooks.  The 
Books  entirely  poetical  are  Job  (except  Prologue  and 
Epilogue),  Psalms,  Proverbs,  The  Song  of  Songs,  and 
The  Lamentations  of  Jeremiah.  Ecclesiastics  approaches 
the  form  of  gnomic  poetry.  Hebrew  poetry  may  be 
classified  as  epic^  when  it  describes  God's  dealings  with 
his  people,  e.  r/.,  Job,  Psa.  78;  lyric,  when  it  expresses 
in  song  the  religious  or  heart  experiences  of  the  writer, 
€.  g.,  The  Song  of  Songs  and  most  of  the  Psalms;  didac- 
tic when  it  inculcates  the  duties  of  life,  e.  g.,  Proverbs; 
elegiac  as  in  The  Lamentations  of  Jeremiah.  There  is 
strictly  no  dramatic  poetry  in  the  Old  Testament. 
Hebrew  poetry  has  properly  neither  rhyme  nor  metre, 
but  is  always  distinguished  by  rhythm.  The  rhythm  of 
Hebrew  poetry  consists  in  a  certain  harmonious  relation 
of  the  parts  or  members  of  the  single  verses  to  each 
other,  called  the  parallehsm  of  members.  This  paral- 
lelism of  members  is  the  most  distinguishing  feature  of 
Hebrew  poetry.  It  is  classified  as  synonymous,  antitheti- 
cal, and  synthetical  parallelism. 

1.  Synonymous  parallelism  consists  in  repeating  in 
different  form,  and  so  additionally  enforcing,  in  the  sec- 
ond member  of  the  verse,  the  thought  contained  in  the 
first  member;  e.  g.,  Num.  23:8;  Josh.  10:12;  Psa. 
78:43.     R.  V. 

2.  Antithetic  parallelism  is  that  wherein  the  thought 
of  the  second  member  stands  in  contrast  with  the  first, 
the  contrast  emphasizing  or  confirming;  e.  g.  Psa.  1:G; 
Prov.  10:1.     R.  V. 

3.  Synthetic  or  constructive  parallelism  consists  of 
several,  and  sometimes  of  many,  members,  closely  con- 
nected, and  illustrating  one  subject; — it  supplements  or 
completes;  e.  g.    Psa.  37:25,  20.     R.  V. 


92  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

4.  A  fourth  kind  of  parallelism,  though  of  rare  occur- 
rence, is  climactic  parallelism,  where  the  second  member 
takes  up  and  completes  the  thought  of  the  first  member 
in  the  manner  of  an  ascending  climax;  e.  g.  Ex.  15: 16; 
Psa.  29:1.     R.  Y. 

By  far  the  greater  number  of  verses  in  the  poetry  of 
the  Old  Testament  consist  of  disticlis,  i.  e.  two  lines, 
thus  exami3les  cited  above.  A  very  few  are  monosticlis^ 
consisting  of  a  single  line,  e.  g.,  Psa.  16 :  1.  In  tristichs, 
or  verses  of  three  lines,  sometimes  the  three  lines  are 
synonymous  (Psa.  5:11);  sometimes  the  first  and  sec- 
ond members  are  i^arallel  in  thought,  and  the  third  com- 
pletes it  (Psa.  2 : 2) ;  sometimes  the  second  and  third 
members  are  parallel  (Psa.  3:7);  and  sometimes  the 
first  and  third  are  parallel,  and  the  second  is  in  the 
nature  of  a  parenthesis  (Psa.  4:2).  In  tetrastichs,  or 
verses  of  four  lines,  generally  the  first  member  is  par- 
allel to  the  second,  and  the  third  parallel  to  the  fourth 
(Gen.  49:7),  but  sometimes  the  first  is  parallel  to  the 
third,  and  the  second  parallel  to  the  fourth  (Psa.  55 :  21), 
and  occasional!}'  the  tetrastich  takes  other  forms.  Of 
rare  occurrence  are  pentastichs  (Num.  24:8),  and  hexa- 
stichs  (Song  of  Songs  4:8).  Using  the  term  strophe  in 
the  modified  sense  as  signifying  a  group  of  verses,  con- 
nected, together  by  a  certain  unity  of  thought,  then 
strophes  are  found  in  Hebrew  poetr3\  Such  strophes 
appear  in  Psalms  where  refrains  occur,  as,  e.  g.,  Psa. 
42:  5,  11,  and  43:5,  the  two  Psalms  originally  consti- 
tuting one.  The  progress  of  thought  in  poems  of  con- 
siderable length  are  also  marked  by  pauses  constituting 
strophes.  Many  of  the  Psalms  fall  logically,  as  well  as 
poetically,  into  groups  of  verses,  thus  also  constituting 
strophes. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  93 


JOB. 


I.  'Same,— Eijol)=Joh=2yerseciited  or  enduring.  The 
Book  is  so  called  from  the  name  of  its  principal  charac- 
ter, or  hero. 

II.  Position.— The  Book  of  Job  is  included  in  the 
Hagiographa,  the  third  division  of  the  Hebrew  Bible, 
called  accordinii'  to  the  Jews  the  Ketuhini  or  Writings. 
The  Book  also  forms  a  part  of  the  so-called  Cliokhmah — 
or  Wisdom-Literatnre  (Job,  Proverbs,  Ecclesiastes)  of 
the  Hebrews.  This  Literature  is  so  called  on  account  of 
the  philosophico-religious  character  of  its  observations 
and  discussions  upon  the  phenomena  and  problems  of 
human  life. 

III.  Time.— According  to  the  representations  of  the 
Book,  Job  and  the  events  recorded  in  the  Book  of  Job 
belong  to  the  patriarchal  period,  or  the  very  earliest 
part  of  the  Mosaic  period.     See  V  and  VI  below. 

IV.  Design— Argument. — It  is  generall}^  conceived 
that  the  design  of  the  Book  of  Job  is  to  discuss  the 
problem — Why  do  the  righteous  suffer  9  and  that  the 
result  of  the  discussion  is  a  failure  to  arrive  at  a  satis- 
factory solution  of  the  problem.  But  this  view  of  its 
design  is  contradicted  by  the  Book,  and  especially  by 
the  Prologue  and  Epilogue  of  the  Book,  precisely  where, 
if  anywhere,  we  should  go  to  find  the  design  of  the 
Book.  According  to  the  Prologue  and  Epilogue,  and 
according  to  the  entire  Book,  the  one  great  design  of  the 
Book  is  not  to  discuss  the  problem  of — Why  do  the  right- 
eous suffer? — but  to  furnish  a  pre-eminent  example,  and 
that  example  teaching  precisely  this — Behold  how  the 


94  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

r'ujhfeoiis  can  suffer,  and  sf  ill  endure  stedfastto  the  end  ; 
stedfast  to  his  God  and  to  his  intec/rity.  That  this  is 
the  one  great  desii>ii  of  the  Book  is  the  plain  and  em- 
phatic teaching-  of  the  Prologue,  especiallj'  as  it  comes 
out  in  God's  repeated  testimony  and  challenge  with  re- 
spect to  Job  that  there  is  none  like  him  in  all  the  earth 
in  being  perfect,  upright,  fearing  God,  eschewing  evil, 
and  holding  fast  his  integrity  to  the  end  and  against  all. 
No  interpretation  can  be  put  upon  the  Book,  or  any 
part  of  it,  that  does  not  agree  with  this  statement  of 
God  in  regard  to  Job,  and  accept  it  as  a  true  statement 
of  Job's  real  character.  Moreover  that  this  is  the  design 
of  the  Book  is  the  evident  teaching  of  the  prophet  Eze- 
kiel  (14:14,  20),  and  the  apostle  James  (5:  11,  R.  V.). 
How  this  is  and  that  this  is  the  design  of  the  Book  ap- 
pears also  from  the  argument  of  the  Book  which  is  as 
follows  :— The  first  Celestial  Council  meets  (1 :  6).  The 
principal  characters  in  this  Council  are  God,  Satan  and 
Job.  The  point  at  issue  is, — Which  is  the  greater  in 
and  over  man,  the  power  of  God,  or  the  power  of  Satan  ? 
A  test  of  this  is  to  be  instituted,  a  supreme  trial  of  it  is 
to  be  made.  Job  is  the  one  chosen  and  mutually  agreed 
upon  as  the  one  in  whom  the  test,  the  trial  is  to  be  made. 
God  issues  the  challenge  to  Satan  in  the  words — "  Hast 
thou  considered  my  servant  Job  ?  for  there  is  none  like 
him  in  the  earth,"  etc.  Satan  accepts  the  challenge 
with  the  words, — "Doth  Job  fear  God  for  nought?" 
The  details  of  the  challenge  are  then  arranged,  accord- 
ing to  which  Satan  is  given  permission  of  God  to  do 
what  he  will  with  all  Job's  possessions,  Satan's  object 
being  to  force  Job  to  renounce  God.  Accordingly  Satan 
goes  forth  and  dispossesses  Job  of  all  his  estates,  and  all 
his  children.     Job  stands  the  test.     Though  his  posses- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  95 

sioiis  and  cliildren  are  gone  he  refuses  to  renounce  God. 
Satan  is  discomfited.  But  God  challenges  Satan  a  sec- 
ond time,  and  again  Satan  accepts  the  challenge.  The 
only  stipulation  that  God  makes  is  that  Satan  shall  spare 
Job's  life.  Satan  goes  forth  to  do  his  utmost  to  force 
Job  to  renounce  God.  The  test  Satan  now  institutes 
and  applies  to  Job  is  threefold.  1st.  He  smites  Job 
with  lepros}'.  2nd.  He  turns  Job's  wife  against  him. 
3rd.  He  marshals  against  Job  three  false  friends  who 
by  the  shrewdest  arguments  of  devilish  cleverness  try 
to  unbalance  Job's  reason,  and  overthrow  his  convic- 
tions as  to  God.  These  arguments,  constituting  the 
third  part  of  the  test,  occupy  the  larger  portion  of  the 
Book,  beginning  with  Ch.  3  and  terminating  with  Ch. 
32.  But  Job  endures  through  it  all,  stands  the  test,  re- 
fuses to  renounce  Gt»d.  Satan  seeing  his  defeat  does 
not  appear  again  upon  the  scene,  in  the  Epilogue,  when 
Job,  having  stood  the  test,  is  blessed  of  God  with  double 
what  he  before  possessed.  Examination  will  show  that 
this  conception  of  the  design  and  argument  of  the  Book 
alone  consistently  exi^lains  and  harmonizes  all  the  parts 
and  statements  of  the  Book. 

V.  Integrity— Historicity. -The  genuineness  of  cer- 
tain parts  of  the  Book  of  Job  have  at  different  times 
been  called  into  question.  A  very  few  have  questioned 
the  genuineness  of  the  Prologue  and  Epilogue,  but  these 
are  absolutely  necessary  to  the  understanding  and  com- 
pleteness of  the  Book.  Without  these  parts  the  Book 
is  devoid  of  any  evident  design,  and  the  character  and 
experiences  of  Job  are  entirely  purposeless.  Some  critics 
have  also  questioned  the  genuineness  of  Chs.  27:11- 
28 :  28  owing  for  the  most  part,  to  the  different  moods 
and  attitudes  taken  by  Job  therein.     The  real  difficulty 


96  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

however  is  not  owing  to  the  dift'erent  positions  taken  by 
Job,  but  owing  to  a  misconception  of  the  design  of  the 
Book  on  tlie  part  of  the  critics.  If  the  design  of  the 
Book  be  as  stated  above  under  IV,  then  the  difficult- 
ies vanish  and  all  becomes  plain.  According  to  this 
design  the  three  false  friends  are  the  agents  of  Satan 
in  the  attempt  to  effect,  by  the  acutest  arguments  of  Sa- 
tanic plausibility,  the  overthrow  of  Job's  reason,  and 
force  him  to  renounce  God.  Relentlessly  assailed  by 
such  arts  and  arguments  it  becomes  precisely  what  is  to 
be  expected  that  Job  would  manifest  different  moods, 
be  subject  to  changes  of  mind,  give  utterance  to  senti- 
ments seemingly  contradictory,  and  in  short  be  at  times 
cast  down  to  the  lowest  depths  of  doubt  and  despair,  as 
well  as  times  exalted  to  sublimest  heights  of  assured 
faith  and  hope.  But  the  genuineness  of  the  discourses 
of  Elihu  (Chs.  32-37),  has  been  especially  assailed,  and 
the  discourses  rejected  by  many  critics  as  spurious,  in- 
terpolations. But  the  grounds  upon  which  these  dis- 
courses have  been  rejected  as  being  spurious,  are  utterly 
-insufficient.  These  grounds  are  : — 1st.  It  is  objected 
that  Elihu  is  not  mentioned  either  in  the  Prologue  or 
Epilogue.  But  according  to  the  design  and  argument  of 
the  Book  as  stated  above  under  IV  he  would  not  and 
ought  not  to  be  so  mentioned;  for  he  was  not  one  of 
the  false  friends  arrayed  to  assail  Job,  and  therefore  is 
not  mentioned  in  the  Prologue;  and  on  the  other  hand 
being  a  true  friend  and  counselor  of  Job,  and  occupying 
the  same  position  as  J-ob,  he  therefore  would  not  be 
mentioned  in  the  Epilogue  when  the  three  false  friends 
are  summoned  to  have  judgment  passed  upon  them. 
•2nd.  It  is  objected  that  the  discourses  of  Elihu  are  at- 
tached but  loosely  to  the  poem  as  a  whole.     On  the  con- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  97 

trary  we  assert  that  the  discourses  of  Elihu  furnish  the 
final  link  that  unites  all  the  discourses.  Among  other 
proofs  this  will  become  evident  by  comparing,  e.  c/., 
33  :  23,  24  with  19  :  25-27  ;  16  :  19-22  and  9  :  32-35.  3rd. 
It  is  objected  that  Elihu  occupies  substantially  the  same 
position  as  the  three  friends,  especially  Eliphaz.  On 
the  contrary  we  assert  that  Elihu  occupies  substantially 
the  same  position  as  Job,  and  directly  the  opposite  of 
that  of  the  three  friends; — the  passages  quoted  above 
in  proof.  Elihu's  position  is  indicated  in  33:23,  24  and 
corresponds  in  every  particular  with  Job's  position  as 
expressed  in  9:32-35;  10:19-22;  19:25-27.  Elihu\s 
conceptions  of  sin  and  of  God  are  in  every  particular 
truer  than  those  of  the  three  friends.  4th.  It  is  objected 
that  Elilurs  style  is  prolix,  labored.  On  the  (contrary  it 
is  not  as  prolix  and  labored  as  that  of  the  three  false 
friends,  especially  Bildad  and  Zophar. 

In  regard  to  tlie  historical  character  of  tlie  Book,  and 
of  Job  its  hero : — We  regard  the  Book  as  being  in  the 
main  real  history.  True  the  discourses  of  Job,  Elihu, 
and  the  three  friends  may  not  have  been  uttered  extem- 
pore in  precisely  their  present  form  and  fulness.  But 
that,  they  were  uttered  for  the  most  part  extempore,  and 
substantially  in  the  same  form,  and  with  almost  the 
same  fulness, — there  is  no  good  I'eason  to  doubt;  es- 
pecially when  we  remembei*  the  history  of  those  remark- 
able literary  conventions  and  contests  which  in  some- 
what later  days  were  held  in  the  same  country  and  by 
those  who  were  descendants  of  Job.  As  to  Job  him- 
self, it  is  now  generally  conceded  that  he  was  a  I'eal, 
historical  character.  The  Book  itself  certainly  intends 
to  convey  that  idea,  for  in  regular  historical  narrative 
form  it  gives  us  Job's  name;  it  tells  us  where  Job  lived, 
[7J 


98  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

i.  e.,  in  the  land  of  Uz,  in  northern  Arabia;  it  states 
the  number  of  his  children ;  it  enumerates  his  posses- 
sions ;  it  describes  his  family  and  religions  life ;  it  gives 
the  names  and  nativity  of  the  friends,  etc.  And  in  ad- 
dition to  this  the  prophet  Ezekiel  and  the  Apostle  James 
testify  to  the  real,  historical  character  of  Job.  To  re- 
fer in  such  language  as  Ezekiel  uses  to  a  fictitious,  un- 
historical  character,  and  associate  him  with  men  (Noah 
and  Daniel)  who  had  a  real  existence,  is  to  saj^  the  least 
extremel}'  unnatural. 

VI.  Authorship— Date.— The  authorship  of  Job  is 
not  positively  known.  Among  those  mentioned  as  prob- 
able authors  are  Job,  Moses,  Solomon,  Jeremiah,  a 
post-exilian  author,  etc.  The  most  probable  of  all  is 
Moses,  considering  the  thoroughly  extra-Palestine  char- 
acter of  the  Book  on  the  one  hand,  and  its  thoroughly 
Arabian  and  Egyptian  character  on  the  other  hand.  In 
its  structure  as  a  poem ;  in  its  use  of  a  number  of  words 
and  forms  of  words  occurring  nowhere  else ;  in  its  figures 
of  speech;  in  its  allusions  to  mau}^  social  and  civil 
usages ;  in  its  references  to  various  natural  phenomena ; 
and  in  many  incidental  allusions  which  oftentimes  con- 
stitute the  surest  indication,  the  Book  is  intenselj^ 
Arabian  and  Egyptian,  and  without  exception  non-Pal- 
estinian. It  is  in  the  highest  degree  improbable  that  a 
Post-Mosaic,  Palestinian  author  should  have  so  thor- 
oughly detached  himself  from  everything  Palestinian, 
and  have  become  so  thoroughly  native  Arabian  and 
Egyptian,  without  ever  once  betraying  himself.  Re- 
specting the  date  of  the  composition  of  the  Book,  a 
similar  difference  of  opinion  prevails.  Ezekiel  14:14, 
20  implies  that  the  Book  of  Job  had  been  written  in  his 
time.     Certain  passages  in  Jeremiah  an4  Isaiah  indicate 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  99 

a  kiu)wUMl<>e  and  use  of  tlie  Hook  of  Job  by  these 
prophets.  I>nt  erities  strenuously  object  to  liavins:  the 
date  of  the  composition  of  the  I^ook  assigned  to  anj' 
date  earlier  than  the  time  of  these  Prophets,  or  at  the 
utmost  earlier  than  tlie  time  of  Solomon.  Their  objec- 
tions are  mainly  and  strictly  only  two,  viz. — 1st.  The 
Book  exhibits  such  remarkable  literarj^  finish,  culture, 
power,  excellence  as  to  make  it  impossible  to  assign  it  to 
a  date  earlier  than  the  age  of  Solomon,  /.  e.,  the  mental 
endowments  and  capacities  of  the  human  race  were  not 
sufficiently  developed  to  produce  it  before  that  time. 
2nd.  The  theological  views  set  forth  in  the  Book  respect- 
ing life,  God,  sin,  deliverance,  immortality,  etc.,  are  so 
clear,  true  and  full  as  to  make  it  impossible  to  assign  to 
the  Book  a  date  earlier  than  Solomon  or  900  B.  C. ;  in- 
asmuch as  before  that  time  the  race  was  not  sufficiently 
developed  to  accept  and  announce  such  perfect  theologi- 
cal views  as  articles  of  truth  and  faith.  We  deny  the 
truth  and  force  of  these  two  objections  on  these  three 
grounds  :  1st.  They  are  rationalistic  in  nature.  2nd. 
They  are  untrue  to  fact.  ord.  Thej^  charge  the  author 
of  the  Book  with  misrepresentation.  They  are  ration- 
alistic in  nature  in  that  they  limit  the  operations  of  God 
in  revelation  and  inspiration  to  what  the  human  mind 
can  itself  acquire  by  the  unaided  exercise  of  the  human 
reason.  They  are  untrue  to  fact  in  that  the  Ancient 
Egyptians  before  the  times  of  Abraham  held  to  a  pure 
monotheistic  conception  of  God,  announced  their  be- 
lief in  immortality,  and  looked  to  a  divine-human  de- 
liverer to  deliver  from  sin.  They  charge  the  author  of 
the  Book  of  Job  w  ith  misrepresentation  in  that,  conced- 
ing Job  to  be  a  patriarchal  character,  they  make  the 
author  put  in  the  mouth  of  Job  the  statement  of  views 


100  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

and  beliefs  not  possible  to  be  entertained  and  expressed 
till  centuries  after  that,  thus  making  the  author  guilty 
of  anachronism. 

VII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  Book  of  Job maj^ 
be  divided  and  its  contents  indicated  as  follows  : — 

I.  Chs.  1,2.  The  Prologue.  Written  in  prose.  The 
author's  historical  statement  setting  forth  the  occasion 
and  design  of  the  Book,  and  consisting  of 

1.  Ch.  1:1-5.  Statement  as  to  Job, — his  country, 
character,  possessions,  religious  life. 

2.  Ch.  1 :  6-22.  First  meeting  of  the  Celestial  Coun- 
cil, and  first  trial  of  Job. 

3.  Ch.  2.  Second  meeting  of  the  Celestial  Council, 
second  trial  of  Job  and  gathering  of  Job's  false  friends. 

II.  Chs.  3-31.  Debate.  Written  in  poetry.  Contains 
the  debate  between  Job  and  his  three  false  friends,  Eli- 
phaz,  Bildad  and  Zophar.  Ch.  3  is  Job's  cry,  intro- 
ductory to  this  debate,  which  then  proceeds  as  follows  : — 

1.   Chs.  4-14.     First  debate  ;  consisting  of 

(a)  Chs.  4,  5.  Argument  of  Eliphaz.  God  is  good. 
No  man  so  good  as  to  be  exempt  from  suffering.  The 
ungodly  resent  suffering.     Let  Job  submit. 

(b)  Chs.  6,  7.  Reply  of  Job.  Job's  sufferings  are 
exceptional,  but  his  guilt  is  not  exceptional  ;  hence  the 
argument  of  Eliphaz  does  not  meet  and  satisfy  his  case. 

(c)  Ch.  8.  Argument  of  Bildad.  God  is  not  unjust. 
Job  greatly  punished  must  have  greatly  sinned.  Let 
him  seek  God  for  merc}^ 

(d)  Chs.  9,  10.  Reply  of  Job.  True  God  is  not  un- 
just; still  injustice  prevails  on  the  earth,  and  the 
innocent  are  involved  with  the  guilty.  Therefore  there 
must  be  another  cause  for  suffering. 

(e)  Ch.  11.     Argument  of  Zophar.     God  detects  sin 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  101 

where  man  is  unconscious  of  it.     So  prominently  Job; 
therefore  let  him  forsake  sin,  and  seek  mercy. 

(/)  Chs.  12-14.  Reply  of  Job.  He  resents  Zophar's 
assumption  to  an  insio-ht  of  God's  ways.  His  conscience 
gives  him  courage,  and  God  must  extend  hope. 

2.  Chs.  15-21.     Second  debate.     Consisting  of 

(a)  Ch.  15.  Argument  of  Eliphaz.  Job  assumes  su- 
perior wisdom.  Evil  does  not  go  unchecked  and  un- 
punished, as  a  tormenting  conscience  and  disastrous  end 
prove. 

(b)  Chs.  16,  17.  Reply  of  Job.  But  he  (Job)  is  in- 
nocent, and  yet  afflicted,  persecuted.  That  he  is  inno- 
cent he  has  in  heaven  a  Witness  who  will  attest  and 
vindicate  it. 

(c)  Ch.  18.  Argument  of  Bildad.  Vexed  at  Job, 
and  his  protestations  of  innocence,  when  the  misery  he 
has,  and  the  dishonor  that  awaits  him,  argue  the  con- 
trary. 

(d)  Ch.  19.  Reply  of  Job.  Bildad's  argument  false, 
and  application  cruel.  Hence  appeals  for  pity.  At  any 
rate  his  vindicator.  Redeemer  liveth  who  will  acquit, 
and  reveal  himself. 

(e)  Ch.  20.  Argument  of  Zophar.  He  is  unmoved 
by  Job's  language.  Declares  Job  perverse.  Job's  brief 
prosperity,  and  present  destruction  a  proof  he  is  wicked. 

(/)  Ch.  21.  Reply  of  Job.  Facts  contradict  Zophar's 
argument.  The  wicked  prosper  and  die  in  peace  hence 
suffering  has  another  cause  and  reason  for  it. 

3.  Chs.  22-28.     Third  debate.     Consisting  of 

(a)  Ch.  22.  Argument  of  Eliphaz.  God  punishes 
only  for  impiety,  sin.  Eliphaz  unscrupulously  charges 
Job  with  inhumanity,  avarice,  abuse  of  power.  Let 
Job  repent 


102  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

{b)  Chs.  -^a,  24.  Reply  of  Job.  Makes  no  direct  re- 
l)!}-  to  the  false  accusations  of  Eliphaz,  but  discourses 
upon  the  mysteries  of  God's  providence. 

(c)  Ch.  25.  Argument  of  Bildad.  Protests  against 
Job's  declaration  of  his  innocence.  God  is  great  and 
great  is  his  majesty. 

(d)  Ch.  26.  Reply  of  Job.  True  God  is  great  as  his 
works  show,  but  the  question  at  issue  turns  not  on  Clod's 
greatness,  but  on  his  justice. 

(e)  Chs.  27,  28.  Zophar  failing  to  appear  Job  utters 
his  final  words  to  the  three  friends.  God  is  great,  wise, 
good,  and  requires  holiness  of  life. 

(/)  Chs.  29-31.  Job's  final  survey  of  his  whole  case, 
i.  e.,  the  conclusion  or  summing  up  of  the  debate. 

III.  Chs.  32-37.     Discourse  of  Elihu.     Consisting  of 

(a)  Ch.  32 : 1-5.     Introduction  of  Elihu  b}^  the  author. 

(b)  Ch.  32 :  6-22.  Elihu's  introduction  to  his  dis- 
course. 

(c)  Chs.  33-37.  Elihu's  discourse.  God  not  Job's 
enemy.  God  does  not  afflict  unjustly,  but  in  affliction 
has  gracious,  disciplinary  designs. 

IV.  Chs.  38 : 1—42  :  6.  Jehovah's  reply  to  Job.  Con- 
sisting of 

(a)  Chs.  38:1 — 40:2.     First  part  of  Jehovah's  reply. 

(b)  Ch.  40:3-5.  Job's  humble  confession  of  un- 
worthiness. 

(c)  Chs.  40 :  6 — 41 :  34.  Second  part  of  Jehovah's 
reply. 

(f/)  Ch.  42 : 1-G.  Job's  further  confession  of  God's 
greatness,  and  his  own  unworthiness. 

V.  Ch.  42:7-17.  Epilogue.  Concluding  historical 
statement  by  the  author  setting  forth  the  end  of  Job's 
trials;  the  condemnation  of  Eliphaz,  Bildad  and  Zophar; 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  103 

the  vindication  and  commendation  of  Job;  the  restora- 
tion of  Job  to  prosper! t}^  twofold  as  great  as  that  which 
he  enjo3ed  before;  and  Job's  long  life  and  death. 

VIII.  Doctrine.— 1.  Job's  conception  of  God  is  pure, 
monotheistic,  Biblical. 

2.  As  to  man  he  is  a  sinner  who  must  both  have  a 
divine  righteousness  imputed  to  him,  and  himself  work 
righteousness. 

3.  Atonement  (kafar),  Redemption  {pada),  and  Ran- 
soming, Restoring  {ga\tl),  are  clearly  defined  in  their 
relations,  nature  and  working. 

4:.  The  doctrines  of  resurrection  and  immortality  are 
clearly  expressed  as,  e.  g.,  14:14;  19:26,  etc. 

5.  In  its  practical  bearing  the  key  word  of  the  Book 
is  Endurance  (James  5:11); — the  perseverance  of  the 
godly  based  on  preservation  by  God. 

IX.  Messianic— While  there  is  no  direct  personal 
reference  to  the  Messiah,  still  there  is  a  strong  Messianic 
element  in  Job.  Jehovah  is  the  Redeemer.  The  great 
offices  and  works  of  the  Redeemer  are  strongly  brought 
out  in  the  Messianic  sections  9 :  32-35 ;  16  :  19-22  ;  19 :  25- 
27;  33:23,  24. 


Jjiteratnre,— Commentaries.      Lange,   Delitzsch,   Davidson, 
Speaker's  and  Palpit. 


THE  PSALMS. 

I.  'S2in\e,—TeMlliin^=  Praises  or  Praise- Songs.  So 
called  as  setting  forth  the  main  object  of  the  Book,  viz.^ 
the  worship  of  God.  The  title  Psalms  is  derived  from 
the  LXX  rendering  of  the  Hebrew  name. 


104  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

II.  Position.— The  Book  of  Psalms  is  included  in  the 
Hagiographa,  the  third  great  division  of  the  Hebrew 
Bible.  In  this  division  the  Psalms  have  commonly  oc- 
cupied the  first  place,  and  hence  we  find  the  entii'e  Old 
Testament  summed  up  under  the  three  names  of  the 
Law,  the  Prophets,  and  the  Psalms.     Lu.  24:44. 

III.  Divisions.— In  the  Hebrew  Bible,  as  in  theR.  V., 
the  Psalter  is  divided  into  five  Books,  riz.^  (1)  Psas.  1-41 . 
•2.  Psas.  42-72.  (3)  Psas.  73-80.  (4)  Psas.  90-106.  (5)  Psas. 
107-150.  This  division  into  Books  is  older  than  the 
LXX  translation.  The  end  of  each  of  these  five  Books 
is  marked  b}'  a  doxology.  The  150th  Psalm  constitutes 
the  doxology  of  the  fifth  Book. 

IV.  Collections.— The  Psalms  cover  a  i^eriod  extend- 
ing from  Moses  to  post-exilic  times.  The  Psalter  is  not 
the  work  of  a  single  compiler.  Originalh'  a  number  of 
smaller  collections  existed  independently,  which  were 
afterwards  united  in  one,  the  completed  Book  being 
thus  gradually'  formed  out  of  pre-existing  smaller  collec- 
tions. It  is  reasonable  to  suppose  that  the  first,  original 
collection  of  Psalms  consisted  mainly  of  those  Psalms, 
mostly  David's,  now  classed  as  Book  I.  This  collection 
Avas  probably  made  by  David's  son  and  successor  Solo- 
mon. The  next  collection  was  probably  not  completed 
till  the  time  of  Ilezekiah.  This  collection  probably  con- 
sisted in  the  main  of  those  Psalms  of  David,  Asaph, 
and  the  sons  of  Korah,  composing  Books  II,  HI.  This 
collection  was  probably  made  by  those  "  men  of  Heze- 
kiah ''  to  whom  we  owe  the  preservation  of  man}' 
proverbs  of  Solomon  not  included  in  the  first  collection 
of  his  Proverbs.  (Prov.  25 :  1.)  This  also  agrees  with  2 
C'hron.  .29 :  30.  The  third  and  last  collect  ion  was  made  in 
exilian  or  post-exilian  times ;  no  further  additions  after 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  105 

Ilezc'kiah  liavini*-  been  made  to  tlie  Psalter  till  the  times  of 
Ezra  and  Xeliemiali,  wlieii  it  was  enriched  by  a  large 
number  of  songs  written  during  and  after  the  exile.  To 
this  period  are  due,  in  the  main,  the  Psalms  composing 
Books  IV,  y.  With  these,  howevei',  were  incorporated 
certain  Psalms  belonging  to  eailier  times.  Thus  Book 
IV  opens  with  a  Psalm  or  Prayer  ascribed  to  Moses. 
And  in  these  l>ooks  IV,  V  are  seventeen  Psalms  ascribed 
to  David,  some  evidently  by  mistake,  but  others  again 
unquestionably  David's  as,  e.  (/.,  Psa.  110.  Hence  it 
appears  that  while  a  general  chronological  order  has 
been  observed  in  the  order  of  the  Psalms,  still  some- 
times the  chronological  order  has  been  displaced  by  an 
order  based  on  subject-matter. 

V.  Titles  or  Inscriptions.— Most  of  the  Psalms  are 
provided  with  titles  or  inscriptions,  all  except  thirty- 
four.  Of  the  antiquity  of  these  titles  there  can  be  no 
question  inasmuch  as  they  are  found  in  the  LXX.  As 
to  the  authority  of  these  titles,  while  there  is  ground  to 
question  their  accuracy  in  some  particulars  still  they  are 
in  the  main  trustAvorthy.  'Iliese  titles  or  inscriptions  of 
the  Psalms  are  chiefly  of  three  kinds,  viz.^ — 

1.  Those  which  define  their  musical  or  liturgical  char- 
acter. 

2.  Those  which  assign  them  to  particular  authors. 

3.  Those  wliicli  designate  the  particular  circumstances 
under  which  a  Psalm  was  composed. 

Any  of  these  may  occur  separately,  or  be  combined 
to  form  one  title.  A  brief  consideration  of  them  fol- 
lows. 

VI.  Titles  of  Character.— That  is,  those  Psalms  to 
which  notices  of  a  liturgical  or  musical  character  are 
prefixed.     Such  notices  are 


106  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

1.  Lamnasayah — "For  the  Precentor."  Probably 
designates  the  leader  of  tlie  choir  who  was  to  set  it  to 
music,  and  superintend  its  practice.  Occurs  fifty-five 
times. 

2.  Lelammed — "For  teaching."  Probabl}'  a  Psalm 
to  be  taught  to  or  by  the  Levites.     Psa.  60. 

3.  Leliazkeer — "  To  bring  to  remembrance."  Prob- 
ably memorializing  Jehovah's  goodness.     Psas.  38,  70. 

4.  Letodah — "  For  thanksgiving."  Probably  with  the 
thank-offering.     Psa.  100. 

5.  Mizmor — "  A  Psalm. "  A  general  name  for  psalvi^ 
but  implying  instrumental  accompaniment. 

6.  Sheer — "A  Song."  Used  separatel}^,  and  in  con- 
junction with  mizmor.     A  Psalm  in  celebration. 

7.  Miclitam — "  Golden."     A  song  of  deep  import. 

8.  MaskeeJ — A  "  skillful  strain,"  or  "  skillfully  con- 
structed song." 

9.  Shiggayon — An  "instrument,"  a  "melody,"  a 
"  lament,"  or  a  "  dithyrambic  ode." 

10.  Tehillah — "  A  hymn  of  praise."  For  occasions 
of  joy,  triumi)h,  thanksgiving. 

11.  Tefillah — "  A  Prayer."  So  a  whole  collection  of 
David's  songs.     Psa.  72 :  20. 

12.  Sheer  Yededoth — "  A  song  of  loves";  where  the 
subject  is  love.     Psa.  45. 

13.  Sheer  hammaaloth — "Song of  accents."  Pilgrim 
festival  songs,  going  up  to  Jerusalem. 

14.  Particular  instruments  by  which  the  Psalm  was 
to  be  accompanied  are  hannaheloth — "  flutes,"  RTidnegi- 
noth — "  stringed  instruments." 

15.  Particular  measures  are  alamotli,  shemenith,  get- 
tith,  yedidun. 


IXTKODUCTION    OUTLINES.  107 

10.  Particnlar  melodies  are  the  "  Iliiid  of  the  Dawn," 
"  The  Dove/'   '^  'J1ie  Lily  of  the  Testimony,"  etc. 

IT.  SelnJi.  Probably  a  pause,  or  call  for  renewed  at- 
tention. 

VII.  Authorship  Titles.—The  authors  of  tlu-  Psalms 
according  to  their  titles  are  as  follows  : — 

1.   Moses.     One  Psalm,  the  90th. 

'2.   David.     Seventy-three  Psalms. 

:>.   Solomon.   Two  Psalms,  72nd  and  127th. 

4.  The  Sons  of  Korah.  Eleven  Psalms,  rlz.,  42-40, 
84,  85,  87.  Korah  was  the  grandson  of  Kohath,  son 
of  Levi.  The  Korahites  or  "  Sons  of  Korah"  were  an 
important  branch  of  the  singers  in  the  Kohathite  di- 
vision in  the  temple  service.   1  Chr.  5:  33;  2  Chr.  20:  19. 

5.  Heman.  One  of  the  "Sons  of  Korah."  One 
Psa.,  88. 

0.  Asaph.     Twelve  Psalms,  viz.,  50,  73-83. 

7.   Ethan  the  Ezrahite.     One  Psalm,  the  89th. 

Asaph,  Heman,  Ethan  are  names  of  the  three  chief 
singers  of  David. 

The  remainder  of  the  Psalms,  about  a  third,  are 
therefore  anonymous. 

VIII.  Titles  of  Occasion.— The  titles  sometimes  con- 
tain historical  notices,  i.  e.,  notices  purporting  to  give 
an  account  of  the  particular  occasion  for  which  a  Psalm 
was  composed.  Some  of  these  notices  are  trustworthy, 
others  are  not.  They  occur  only  in  the  Psalms  of  David, 
and  refer  to  events  in  his  life.  Thus  with  Psa.  3  com- 
pare 2  Sam.  Chs.  15-18.  Psa.  7  comp.  1  Sam.  Chs. 
24-2G.  Psa.  18  comp.  2  Sam.  Ch.  22.  Psa.  34  comp. 
1  Sam.  21  :  1-15.  Psa.  51  comp.  2  Sam.  Ch.  12.  Psa. 
52  comp.  1  Sam.  Ch.  22.  Psa.  54  comp.  1  Sam.  23: 19- 
28.     Psa.    50  comp.  1  Sam.  21:1-15.     Psa.  57  comp.   1 


108  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Sam.  22: 1-24.  Psa.  59  comp.  1  Sam.  19: 11-18.  Psa. 
60  comp.  2  Sam.  8:1-13.  Psa.  63  comp.  1  Sam. 
22  :  3-5.  Psa.  142  comp.  1  Sam.  22  : 1,  2 ;  2  Chr.  11 :  15- 
19,  etc.  The  historical  occasion  of  other  Psalms,  not 
noticed  in  the  titles,  might  be  assigned  with  a  consider- 
able degree  of  probability. 

IX.  Classifications.— The  Psalms  are  variously  classi- 
fied upon  the  basis  of  their  subject-matter,  or  because 
of  certain  peculiar  literary  features.     Thus  we  have, — 

1.  Psalms  consisting  of  meditations  on  different  as- 
pects of  God's  providence  as  manifested  in  creation, 
history,  etc.  Such  are  Psalms  8,  19,  29,  33,  36,  65,  103, 
104,  107,  etc. 

2.  Psalms  consisting  of  reflections  upon  God's  moral 
government  of  the  world,  and  on  the  character  and  con- 
duct that  is  pleasing  to  him;  hence  these  Psalms  are  of 
a  didactic  character.  Such  are  Psalms  1,  15,  32,  34, 
37,  49,  73,  75,  77,  90,  92,  112,  etc. 

3.  Psalms  expressive  of  faith,  resignation,  joy  in 
God's  law  and  God's  presence.  Such  are  Psalms  11, 
16,  23,  26,  27,  42,  62,  63,  84,  91,  119,  121,  127,  128, 
130,  etc. 

4.  Psalms  having  a  more  distinct  reference  to  the  cir- 
cumstances of  the  Psalmist,  as  petitions  for  help  in 
illness,  persecution,  or  other  trouble,  for  forgiveness  of 
sins,  besides  many  of  personal  thanksgiving.  In  these 
the  Psalmist  sometimes  includes  his  companions  or  co- 
religionists. Such  are  Psalms  3-7,  12,  13,  17,  22,  30, 
40,  116,  etc. 

5.  National  Psalms.  That  is,  Psalms  consisting  of 
complaints  of  national  oppression  or  disaster;  and  again 
expressions  of  thanksgivings  for  mercies  received  or 
promised;  and  still  again  prayers   for   the   welfare  of 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  109 

Jerusalem,  and  the  comin,^  glory  of  Zion  as  the  metropo- 
lis of  the  world.  Such  are  Psalms  14,  44,  46,  47,  48, 
60,  GC,  GS,  76,  79,  87,  118,  122,  124,  129,  144,  etc. 

6.  Historical  Psalms.  That  is.  Psalms  consisting  of 
a  review  of  the  national  history  with  a  reference  to  the 
lessons  deducible  from  it.  Such  are  Psalms  78,  81,  105, 
106,  114. 

7.  Royal  Psalms.  That  is.  Psalms  relating  to  the 
king  or  to  the  Davidic  dynasty,  and  containing  thanks- 
givings, wishes,  promises,  supplications,  maxims,  etc. 
These  Psalms  frequently  have  a  Messianic  import.  See 
below.  Such  royal  Psalms  are  2,  18,  20,  21,  45,  72,  89, 
101,  110,  132. 

8.  Penitential  Psalms.  So  called  on  account  of  their 
being  expressions  of  profound  penitence  for  sin.  These 
Psalms  are  seven  in  number,  viz.,  6,  32,  38,  51,  102,  130, 
143. 

9.  Imprecatory  Psalms.  That  is,  those  Psalms  which 
seem  to  invoke  terrible  judgments  upon  the  enemies  of 
God  and  his  people.  Such  Psalms  more  particularly  are 
35,  69,  109,  137,  and  a  few  other  isolated  passages.  The 
usage  of  both  the  imperative  and  imperfect  is  to  be 
noted  in  the  discussion  of  these  imprecatory  passages. 
Compare  also  Rev.  Ch.  18. 

10.  Hallelujah  Psalms.  Psalms  beginning  with  "  Hal- 
lelujah "  are  so  called.  They  are  Psalms  106,  111,  112, 
113,  117,  135,  146-150. 

11.  Hodu  Psalms,  or  Thanksgiving  Psalms.  These 
are  so  called  because  they  begin  with  the  word  Hodu  = 
Give  thanks.     They  are  Psalms  105,  107,  U8,  136. 

12.  The  Hallel.  Psalms  113-118  are  so  called  as  be- 
ing those  Psalms  that  are  chanted  at  the  three  great 
feasts,  at  the  feast  of  the  dedication,   and  at  the  new 


110  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

moons.  Ill  the  family  celebration  of  the  Passover  night 
Psalms  113,  114  are  snng  before  the  meal,  before  the 
emptjdng  of  the  second  festal  cup,  while  Psalms  1  lo- 
ll 8  were  sung  after  the  meal,  after  the  filling  of  the 
fourth  cup,  to  which,  after  the  institution  of  the  Lord's 
Supper,  which  was  connected  witli  the  fourth  festal  cup 
Math.  26:  30,  Mk.  14:  26  probably  refer. 

13.  Alphabetical  Psalms.  That  is,  those  Psalms  in 
which  successive  verses,  half  verses,  or  groui^s  of  verses 
begin  with  the  successive  letters  of  the  Hebrew  alpha- 
bet. The  alphabetical  arrangement  is  not  fully  carried 
in  every  instance.  Such  alphabetical  Psalms  are  9,  10, 
25,  34,  37,  111,  112,  119,  145. 

For  Messianic  Psalms  see  below. 

IX.  Theolog^y. —Hebrew  ]3oetry  is  the  poetry  of  friend- 
ship and  fellowship  between  God  and  man.  It  is  pre- 
eminentl}'  so  with  the  Psalms.  In  them  God  manifests 
himself  and  speaks  through  nature,  through  historj^ 
through  personal  experience  to  Israel,  to  the  Israelite. 
And  in  them  the  true  Israelite,  the  soul,  finds  its  com- 
pletest  expression,  holds  blessed  communion  with  God 
to  whom  it  discloses  all  its  emotions,  desires,  hopes, 
fears.  The  God  of  the  Psalms  is  very  near,  and  very 
real,  and  communion  with  him  most  spiritual  and  inti- 
mate. The  Law  of  God  is  also  highly  magnified  in 
the  Psalms.  As  contrasted  with  its  merely  ceremonial 
enactments,  there  is  a  remarkable  recognition  of  the 
higher  and  more  spiritual  requirements  of  the  Law,  and 
an  intense  affection  expressed  for  it.  The  confession 
and  remission  of  sins,  purity  in  heart  and  holiness  of 
life,  the  blessedness  of  righteousness  here  and  hereafter, 
are  matters  repeatedly  and  boldly  inculcated.  Tlie 
hope  of  a  future  life  glorifies  not  a  few  Psalm  utterances. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  Ill 

X.  Messianic— The  Messianic  hope  shines  strongly  in 
the  Psahns.  Tliis  Messianic*  element  is  for  the  most  part 
tyijical.  David  and  Solomon,  the  Priest  and  Psalmist, 
appear  therein  as  types  of  the  Messiah,  and  of  the  Mes- 
siah in  his  threefold  office  of  Prophet,  Priest  and  King. 
It  is  to  be  remembered,  however,  that  in  the  Psalms  this 
Messiah,  this  Anointed  One  in  whom  are  bound  up  the 
redemption  of  the  world  and  the  glorifying  of  Israel,  is 
not  in  the  first  instance,  or  distinctly,  Christ.  The 
Messiah,  the  Anointed  of  God,  is  David,  or  Solomon, 
till  both  the  one  and  the  other  fail  to  fulfil  the  hopes  of 
men's  hearts.  But  the  Advent  to  which  Israel  looks  for- 
ward is  the  Advent  of  Jehovah.  He  is  Israel's  true 
King.  It  is  his  coming  wiiich  is  to  be  Israel's  redemj^tion 
and  glory.     The  Messianic  Psalms  are  the  following : — 

Psalm    2.     The  Divine  and  Conquering  King. 

Psalm  16.     Jehovah  the  all,  in  all,  and  after  all. 

Psalm  22.     The  Typical  Sufferer. 

Psalm  40.     The  Offerer  and  Offering. 

Psalm  45.     The  Marriage  of  the  King. 

Psalm  69.     God's  Suffering  One. 

Psalm  72.     God's  Prince,  and  His  Dominion  of  Peace. 

Psalm  85.     The  Righteous  Restoration  and  Reign. 

Psalm  87.  Zion, — Mountain  of  God,  Metropolis  of 
Earth. 

Psalm  102.     The  Suffering  Soul,  and  Suffering  City. 

Psalm  110.     The  Priest-King. 

Psalm  118.     Praise  Jehovah's  Loving  Kindness. 


lj\t^T2it\\Yei,— Commentaries :    Delitzsch,  Perowne,  De  Witt, 
Lange,  Ewald,  Speaker's,  Pulpit. 


112  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


THE  PROVERBS. 

I.  'Ssiine.—Mishlay  =  Proverbs.  The  Book  is  so  called 
from  the  nature  of  its  contents.  The  mashed  or  prov- 
erb, coming  from  the  verb  to  he  liJxe,  denotes  a  represen- 
tation, i.  e.,  a  statement  not  relating  solel}^  to  a  single 
fact,  but  standing  for  or  representing  other  similar  facts. 

The  statement  may  be  deduced  from  a  particular  in- 
stance, bnt  applicable  to  other  like  instances,  or  it  ma}^ 
be  a  generalization  from  experience.  The  proverb  con- 
cerns itself  with  observations  relative  to  human  life  and 
character,  and,  by  striking  comparisons  and  contrasts, 
expresses  the  truth  in  a  pithy,  pregnant  manner. 

II.  Position. -One  of  the  poetical  Books  of  the  Old 
Testament.  Stands  in  the  Hagiographa,  or  third  di- 
vision of  the  Hebrew  Bible.  Is  one  of  the  Books 
included  in  the  Choklmiali — or  Wisdom-Literature  of 
the  Hebrews.     See  under  Job. 

III.  Design.— The  Design  of  the  Book  is  clearly  stated 
in  1  :  2-4. 

IV.  Divisions  and  Contents.— Tliese,  in  brief,  are  as 
follows :  — 

1.  Chs.  1-9.  This  first  section  gives  a  masterly  de- 
scription of  wisdom,  treats  of  the  blessings  of  wisdom, 
and  warns  against  various  dangers  and  temptations,  es- 
pecially unchastity. 

2.  Chs.  10:1 — 22: 16.  This  second  section  which  has 
the  superscription,  "The  Proverbs  of  Solomon,"  con- 
tains many  master  sentences  bearing  upon  ]3 radical  life, 
moral  and  religious  ]3recepts,  and  prudential  maxims. 
Especially  emphasized  are, — Jehovah's  sovereignty;  the 
blessings   that   flow   from   fearing   Him;   righteousness 


INTKODUC  TION     ( )UTLINES.  1 1  o 

more  acceptable  Ihaii  sacrilicc  willi  Iliiii;  t lie  contrasted 
aims  and  ends  of  the  wise  ;uid  the  fool;  the  ri.<»ht  use 
of  the  lips  or  toni>ue;  parental  authority ;  kingly  justice, 
riuhteousness,  wisdom,  mercy,  faithfulness,  and  amena- 
bleness  to  divine  guidance. 

3.  Chs.  2-2:  17— -24:  34.  In  this  section  the  method  of 
a  more  or  less  consecutive  argument  is  resumed,  as  in 
the  first  section.  The  proverbs  here  constitute  a  body 
of  maxims  interwoven,  addressed   with  a  practical  aim. 

4.  Chs.  25-20.  This  section  contains,  as  stated  in 
the  superscription,  the  "Proverbs  of  Solomon  which 
the  men  of  Hezekiah,  king  of  Judah,  copied  out."  On 
this  superscription,  see  below.  The  proverbs  of  this 
section  do  not  differ  materially  in  their  character  from 
the  foregoing. 

5.  Chs.  30,  31.  Ch.  30  is  ascribed  to  Agur  the  son  of 
Jakeh.  Neither  Agur  nor  Jakeh  is  named  elsewhere. 
The  Ch,  is  also  described  as  an  "oracle,"  a  term  usually 
applied  to  prophetic  utterances.  The  proverbs  of  this 
chapter  consist  of  moral  and  pliilosoi3hical  reflections. 
Ch.  31  contains  the  "  Words  of  King  Lemuel,  the  prov- 
erbs which  his  mother  taught  him. "  The  proverbs  en- 
join temperance,  justice,  etc. 

V.  Composition:— G^e?iiune?ie6'S,  Authorship.  The 
second  division  of  the  Book,  Chs.  10: 1 — 22:16,  begins 
with  the  superscription  "  The  Proverbs  of  Solomon." 
This  division  is  regarded  as  constituting  the  oldest  col- 
lection of  proverbs,  and  is  generally  conceded  to  have 
proceeded  from  Solomon.  The  section,  Chs.  22:17 — 
24:34,  is  evidently  intended  to  go  with  the  preceding 
division,  as  belonging  to  Solomon;  jior  should  the  last 
twelve  verses,  24:23-:)4,  be  excluded,  and  treated  as 
the  product  of  several  wise  men ;  an  unsuitable  interpre- 
[8] 


114  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

tation  of  24 :  23.  The  division  Chs.  25-29  bears  the  super- 
scription "  These  are  also  i)ro verbs  of  Solomon,  which 
the  men  of  Ilezekiah,  king  of  Judah,  copied  out."  These 
proverbs  were  not  floating  about,  and  by  common  con- 
sent attributed  to  Solomon,  for  the  word  rendered 
"copied  out"  will  not  bear  that  construction.  The 
word  can  onlj^  signify  that  these  men  of  Hezekiah 
"copied  out,"  l.  e.,  transferred,  transcribed  tvom.  owq 
book  into  another,  proverbs  that  were  correctly  assigned 
to  Solomon.  The  first  division,  Chs.  1-9,  is  also  by  the 
superscription  ascribed  to  Solomon.  It  is  highly  im- 
probable that  the  first  nine  chapters  of  the  Book  should 
have  been  written  by  the  collector  of  the  proverbs,  or 
by  an  editor,  instead  of  by  Solomon,  and  that  the  name 
of  Solomon  should  be  placed  at  the  head  of  them  when 
the  collector  or  editor  himself  in  that  case  wrote  about 
one-third  of  the  whole.  Moreover  the  Book  shows 
throughout  a  carefully  executed  intention  on  the  part  of 
the  author  to  attribute  the  proverbs  to  their  i3roper 
authors,  so  much  so  that  the  last  two  chapters  in  the  col- 
lection are  with  a  clear  discrimination  attributed  re- 
spectively to  Agur  one  and  to  King  Lemuel  one.  Once 
more  certain  iDeculiarities  of  language  characterize  all 
the  proverbs  attributed  to  Solomon,  which  further  con- 
firms the  unity  of  the  authorshii)  of  Chs.  1-29,  and 
ascribes  that  authorship  to  Solomon.  We  also  read 
in  1  Ki.  4:  32  of  Solomon  that  "He  spake  three  thous- 
and proverbs  :  and  his  songs  were  a  thousand  and 
five." 

VI.  Doctrine. -The  Book  of  Proverbs  is  the  Old  Tes- 
tament's sj)ecial  treatise  on  Ethics,  the  principal  source 
of  the  Old  Testament  Ethics.  As  in  the  system  of  Ethics 
virtue  and  duty  must  ever  occupj^  the  principal  place 


INTRODUCTION     OUTLINES.  115 

so  ill  the  liook  of   Pi'ov(M'l)s  the  special   (hn'triiic   is  that 
of  virtue  and  diitA',  rectitude  and  hiw. 


Liiteratiire.—Coinnientaries :    Delitzsch,    Langc,    Speaker's, 
Pulpit,  Stuart,  Ariiot,  Cheyne. 


ECCLESIASTES. 

I.  ^ame^—Koheletli  =  One  addressuHj  a  public  as- 
sembly, a  preacher;  whence  LXX,  Vulgate,  A.  V., 
Ecclesiastes  =  a  preacher. 

II.  Position.— This  Book  is  included  in  the  Hagiogra- 
pha,  and  forms  a  part  of  the  Clwlxlnnali — or  Wisdom- 
literature  of  the  Hebrews.     See  under   Job. 

III.  Design.— The  Book  discloses,  in  progress,  a  men- 
tal battle  between  old  faitlis  and  new  douT)ts ;  between 
divine  providence  and  retribution  on  the  one  liand, 
and  human  doubt,  irresi^onsibility  and  despair  on  the 
other  hand.  It  both  summons  to  enjoyment,  and  is 
intensely  sad;  it  is  seemingi}'  skeptical  at  times,  and 
at  other  times  as  thoroughly  convinced  of  the  truth  of 
the  divine  faith  it  inculcates.  On  the  one  hand  it  is  a 
discourse  upon  the  unsatisfactory  nature  of  all  things 
human,  with  a  recommendation  to  enjoy  the  blessings 
of  life,  while  on  the  other  hand  it  urgently  insists  upon 
the  importance  of  fearing  God  and  keeping  his  com- 
mandments. The  Book  cannot  be  charged  with  any 
skeptical  or  Sadducean  tendency,  for  the  wliole  I>ook 
must  be  interpreted  in  the  light  of  its  closing  utterance. 


116  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

the  suininary  of  the  cliseoiirse, — "  Fear  God,  and  keep 
his  coniinaiidineiits;  for  this  is  the  whole  duty  of  man." 
IV.  Autliorsliii)— Date.— The   superscription    of    the 
Book  reads, — "  The  words  of  the  Preacher,  the   son  of 
David,   King  in  Jerusalem."     In  1 :  2  the  author  refers 
to  himself — "I,  the  preacher,   was  King  over  Israel  in 
Jerusalem."     And  in  1:16  he  refers  to  himself  as  wiser 
than  all   those   who   had   preceded  him  in  Jerusalem. 
While  these  statements  seem  to  point  to,  and  suit  Solo- 
mon only,  as  the  author,  still  the  name  of  Solomon  is 
not  found  in  the  Book,  and  all  other  indications  and  in- 
ternal evidences  argue  against  its  Solomonic  authorship. 
The  personal  references  in  the  Book  other  than  those 
cited ;  the  language  of  the  Book  in  respect  to  a  number 
of  words  and  exjDressions ;  the  comparison  of  the  Book 
with  other   admittedly  Solomonic  writings ;  the  tone  of 
the  Book  compared  with  the  times  of  Solomon ;  the  so- 
cial and  political  allusions  in  the  Book  so  utterl}^  out  of 
harmony  with  the  condition  of  the  Jewish  State  in  the 
Solomonic  period, — all  x)oint  to  another  author  than  Solo- 
mon, and  to  a  much  later  period  than  the  Solomonic 
period  for  its  production.     It  is  in  all  probability  the 
latest  Book  of  the  Canon,  and  should  be  assigned  to  a 
period  later  rather  than  earlier  than  Ezra,  Nehemiah 
and  Malachi. 

V.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  Preacher  opens  his 
discourse  with  the  exclamation  "Vanity  of  vanities," 
and  then  proceeding 

1.  Ch.  1:1-11.  Describes  the  incessant  changes  in 
human  affairs. 

2.  Chs.  1:12 — 2:26.  The  preacher's  position  and 
fruitless  search  for  happiness. 

3.  Ch.  3.     Declares  there  is  an  appointed   time  for 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  117 

everytliin.o- ;  incnleatos  doing  good,  and  enjoying  there- 
suits  of  one's  toil;  wliile  asserting  tliat  men  and  beasts 
are  subject  to  like  calamities. 

4.  Ch.  4.  Discourses  on  the  miseries  of  man,  and  the 
benefits  of  societ3^ 

5.  Ch.  5.  Religious  precepts,  the  vanity  of  riches, 
carnal  enjoyments. 

6.  Ch.  G.  The  miseries  of  man,  and  an  exami^le  in 
illustration. 

7.  Ch.  7.  Proverbs  and  moral  precepts  inculcating 
moderation,  and  tlie  sometimes  seeming  incongruity  be- 
tween the  portions  of  the  righteous  and  the  wicked. 

8.  Ch.  8.  "  It  shall  be  well  with  them  that  fear  God," 
and  not  Avell  with  the  wicked,  notwithstanding  seeming 
contradictions. 

9.  Ch.  9.     The  doctrine  of  all  things  come  alike  to  all. 

10.  Chs.  10-12.  Proverbs,  precepts  and  exhortations 
to  remember  and  fear  God,  and  keep  his  command- 
ments. 

VI.  Doctrine.-— Xotwithstanding  the  seeming  pessi- 
mistic tone  of  his  Book,  the  author  is  never  tempted  to 
abandon  his  theistic  faith.  Xotwithstanding  his  recom- 
mendations to  enjoy  the  fruit  of  one's  labors  in  this 
Avorld,  and  his  despairing  view  of  life,  still  he  strongly 
emphasizes  the  responsibilit}^  of  man,  and  accountability 
to  God. 


ljiterature»—Coinmentaries  :    Lange,     Keil  and  Delitzsch, 
Phuiiptre,  Wright,  Stuart,  Cheyne,  Ginsburg. 


118  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


THE  SONG  OF  SONGS. 

I.  'Name,— Sheer  liashshereem  =  The  Song  of  Songs. 
The  name  is  derived  from  the  opening  words  of  the 
Book.  The  grammatical  form  of  the  name  (the  com- 
bination of  a  noun  in  the  singular  with  a  dependent 
plural),  is  a  Hebrew  mode  of  expressing  the  superlative. 
The  name  therefore  sets  forth  the  subject-matter  of  this 
Book  as  constituting  the  most  excellent  Song,  the  Song 
surpassing  all  other  songs. 

II.  Position.— The  Song  is  included  in  the  Hagiogra- 
pha.  It  also  forms  the  first  of  the  five  Megilloth,  or 
Rolls  that  are  read  publich^  at  certain  sacred  seasons  in 
the  synagogues.  The  Song  of  Songs  was  read  at  the 
Passover.  The  other  fonr  Books  of  the  Megilloth  are 
Ruth,  Lamentations,  Ecclesiastes,  Esther. 

III.  Theme.— A  song  sung  in  Jerusalem  at  the  cele- 
bration of  the  marriage  of  Solomon  and  Shulamite,  and 
of  typical  import. 

IV.  Unity.— The  Book  is  a  unit,  i.  e.,  a  single  con- 
nected Song  and  not  composed  of  several  distinct  songs. 
This  is  evident  from  the  following  considerations: — 

1.  The  name  declares  it  to  be  a  single  poem  or  song. 
Thns  the  singular  noun  sheer  ^  a  song.  If  it  had  been 
intended  to  designate  a  song  composed  of  a  number  of 
songs,  the  grammatical  construction  must  have  been 
different. 

2.  The  name  of  Solomon  which  appears  in  the  title' 
1:1,  or  in  exchange  for  it  the  designation  of  "  the  king," 
appears  at  different  points  throughout  tlie  poem,  thus 
uniting  the  whole. 

3.  The  consistency  observed  throughout  the  various 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  119 

parts  confirms  the  unity  of  The  Song;  e.  f/.,  one  loved 
one,  and  alwaj^s  described  in  almost  the  same  language, 
the  mention  of  her  mother,  but  never  of  lier  father,  etc. 

4.  The  Daughters  of  Jerusalem  form  a  permanent 
element  throughout,  uniting  the  whole. 

5.  There  are  constant  repetitions  of  the  same  expres- 
sions and  sentiments  throughout,  thus  showing  it  to  be 
a  poetical  unit,  one  song;  e.  g.,  the  adjuration  of  the 
daughters  of  Jerusalem,  the  challenging  (question,  "  Who 
is  this?"  the  chorus-description  of  Shulamite  as  "the 
matchless  one  among  Avomen,"  etc. 

6.  The  Song  throughout  relates  to  different  parts  and 
features  of  one  and  the  same  subject  and  event. 

V.  Date.— It  is  generally  agreed  that  The  Song  is  con- 
structed upon  a  basis  of  fact;  i.  e.,  it  refers  to  incidents 
that  actual^  occurred,  and  these  incidents  occurred 
during  Solomon's  life-time.  But  when  were  these  inci- 
dents recorded  ?  /.  e. ,  what  is  the  date  of  the  composi- 
tion and  writing  of  The  Song  ?  According  to  some  the 
Solomonic  period.  According  to  others  the  post-Solo- 
monic, but  pre-exilic  period.  And  still  others  sa}^  the 
period  of  Ezra  and  Nehemiah,  and  even  the  late  period 
of  the  Greek  erotic  poets.  The  weight  of  internal  and 
external  evidence  points  to  the  earlier  part  of  Solomon's 
reign  rather  than  to  the  middle  or  latter  part  of  that 
reign,  or  to  any  subsequent  time,  as  the  date  not  onl}^ 
for  the  occurrence  of  the  events  referred  to  in  The  Song, 
but  also  the  date  of  the  writing  of  The  Song.  In  proof 
of  this  may  be  noted 

1.  The  consummate  literarj^  excellence  of  The  Song 
shows  that  it  must  have  been  written  at  a  time  when 
Hebrew  language  and  literature  had  reached  their  most 
flourishing  period,  the  Solomonic  period. 


120  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

2.  The  author  or  authors  of  Prov.  C^hs.  1-0  and 
22:17 — 24:22  were  evideiitl}'  acquainted  with  The 
Song,  as  comparisons  will  show. 

3.  The  geographical  references,  commercial  and  po- 
litical allusions,  evidently  I'ecent  occurrence  of  the 
events  recorded,  xjoiht  to  the  Solomonic  era  for  its  com- 
position. 

4.  From  historical  allusions  to  Solomon  in  The  Song 
we  must  conclude  not  only  that  The  Song  was  written 
during  Solomon's  reign,  but  toward  the  commencement 
of  his  reign;  thus  0:8  compared  with  1  Ki.  11:3. 
Moreover  Solomon's  mother  Bathsheba  is  represented  as 
still  living. 

5.  The  so-called  Aramaisms  of  The  Song  are  pure 
Arabic  words  and  forms.  The  abbreviated  relative  pro- 
noun, the  letter  sh,  for  the  full  form  aslier,  occurs  in 
poems  of  acknowledged  antiquity,  e.  (/.,  Song  of  De- 
borah, Judg.  5:7. 

6.  The  reference  to  Tirzah,  as  that  to  Jerusalem,  in 
6:4,  is  not  to  either  as  a  political  capital,  but  to  their 
natural  location. 

VI,  Authorship.— The  Solomonic  authorship  of  The 
Song  is  denied  almost  alone  by  those  who  hold  to  the 
Shepherd-hypothesis  method  of  interpretation  (see  be- 
low), and  these  as  a  rule  admit  that  all  the  other  evi- 
dences i)oint  to  Solomon  as  the  author.  The  Solomonic 
authorship  is,  in  brief,  defended  on  these  grounds: — 

1.  The  title,  1:1,  ascribes  the  authorship  to  Solomon. 

2.  The  extensive  and  accurate  knowledge  displaj^ed 
in  The  Song  offers  abundant  and  unmistakable  testi- 
monj'  to  Solomon  being  the  author;  e.  r/..  The  Song  as 
a  literary,  poetic  production;  the  extensive  and  accurate 
knowledge  displayed  in  The  Song  in  matters  geographi- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  121 

cal  and  liistorical;  and  a  similar  knowledge  as  to  the 
human  arts  and  natural  sciences. 

3.  It  is  abundantly  evident  that  the  chief  i-eason  for 
denying  tlie  Solomonic  authorship  of  'Flie  Song  is  be- 
cause it  is  out  of  the  question  to  hold  to  that,  and  at  the 
same  time  hold  to  the  Shepherd-hypothesis  interpreta- 
tion. But  that  condemns  the  human  hypothesis  rather 
than  the  Solomonic  authorship  so  positively  asserted 
in  1:1. 

VII.  Form.— The  Song  is  not  a  drama.  It  most  re- 
sembles the  lyric.  Certain  it  is  that  it  is  in  no  sense  a 
drama;  but  a  .so»(/,  a  nuptial  song,  lyrical  rather  tlian 
dramatic  in  character.  In  proof  it  may  be  briefly 
noted, — 

1.  According  to  its  own  name  in  the  Title,  1:1,  it  is 
sheer,  L  e.,  a  song,  and  a  song  in  celebration,  according 
to  the  significance  of  the  word. 

•2.  From  its  poetic  and  artistic  structure  it  is  in  the 
nature  of  a  song,  and  not  a  drama. 

3.  As  a  sheer,  Tlie  Song  is  moreover  a  poetic  compo- 
sition intended  to  be  sung  or  chanted,  not  theatrically 
represented. 

4.  According  to  its  form,  nature  and  subject-matter. 
The  Song  is  a  song  of  love  and  marriage;  and  to  define 
it  more  strictly  still,  a  post-nuptial  song;  /.  e.,  a  song 
composed  to  be  sung,  and  that  actually  was  sung  during 
the  festivities  following  upon  tlie  marriage  of  Solomon 
and  Shulamite,  and  in  celebration  of  that  nuirriage. 

5.  The  dranui  is  an  institution  entirely  foreign  to  tlie 
Hebrew,  tlie  Slicinilic  mind. 

0.  Tlie  Song  violates  all  tlie  pi'incipal  rules  of  a 
drama; — it  is  not  represented  in  person  throughout;  it 
is  devoted  to  long  descriptive  and  narrative  addresses 


122  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

requiring  no  reply ;  there  is  no  regular  historical  succes- 
sion of  events,  no  dramatic  development,  no  progress  of 
a  plot  and  a  denouement;  while  omissions  fatal  to  a 
drama  constantl}^  appear,  and  imaginary  characters, 
scenes  and  speeches  are  introduced  in  order  to  fill  out 
the  dramatic  conception. 

VIII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— It  is  to  be  remem- 
bered that  The  Song  is  a  marriage  song ;  that  all  the  prin- 
cipal features  and  events  connected  with  a  Biblical,  orien- 
tal marriage  are  clearlj^  set  forth  in  it,  though  not  in  the 
precise  chronological  order  in  which  thej^  naturally  oc- 
cur. It  is  also  to  be  remembered  that  The  Song  was 
written  by  Solomon  to  be  sung  at  the  celebration  of  his 
marriage  with  Shulamite;  and  was  so  sung,  by  a  choir 
selected  for  the  purpose,  during  the  festivities  that  fol- 
lowed immediately  upon  the  consummation  of  that  mar- 
riage. So  that  at  the  time  The  Song  opens  Solomon 
and  Shulamite  are  actually  married,  even  as  in  the 
course  of  The  Song  they  address  each  other  b}'  terms 
that  absolutel}^  require  us  to  regard  them  as  husband 
and  wife.  The  Song  is  largeh'  composed  of  descriptive 
references  to  prominent  incidents  that  preceded  and  led 
up  to  their  marriage,  and  these  incidents  embrace  all 
the  prominent  features  of  a  Biblical  and  oriental  mar- 
riage. The  principal  persons  introduced  into  The 
Song  are— Solomon,  King  in  Jerusalem;  Shulamite,  a 
Kedarene  maiden  from  east  of  the  Jordan ;  Daughters 
of  Jerusalem,  a  part  of  the  royal  household;  attendants 
of  the  palace;  citizens  of  Jerusalem;  mother  and 
brothers  of  Shulamite.  Tlie  main  divisions  of  The  Song- 
are  as  follows : — 

1.  Ch.  1;  1.  Title.  Sets  forth  the  name  and  nature 
of  the  Book,  /'.  e.,  a  Song;  and  its  authorship,  /.  e.,  Sol- 
omon. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  123 

2.  Clis.  1 :  2 — 2  :  7.  First  experiences  in  the  royal 
home.  That  is,  it  refers  to  the  first  experiences  of 
Shuljunite  the  bride  and  wife,  in  her  royal  home,  after 
having  been  bronglit  there  in  bridal  procession  as  de- 
scribed in  3 :  0-1 1 . 

3.  Clis.  2:  S — 3:  5.  Love's  separations  and  meetings. 
This  division  describes  a  i^re-marriage  incident,  and 
therefore,  in  point  of  time,  antedates  the  preceding 
division.  It  refers  to  a  time  when  before  their  marriage 
Solomon  visited  Shulamite,  and  that  occnred  which  here 
Shnlamite  narrates  to  the  Daughters  of  Jesusalem. 

4.  Chs.  3:0 — 5:1.  The  roj^al  home-bringing  of  the 
bride.  Describes  how  Shulamite  was  brought  in  royal 
procession  to  her  royal  home  in  Jerusalem,  as  the  bride 
and  wife  of  Solomon. 

5.  Chs.  5:2 — 6:9.  Love's  separations,  meetings  and 
confessions.  Refers  to  another  i^re-marriage  incident, 
in  which  occur  mutual  descriptions  of  love  and  i)raise 
on  the  part  of  Solomon  and  Shulamite,  the  beloved  and 
loved  one. 

G.  C1is.  0  :  10 — 8 :  4.  The  royal  bridegroom  and  bride. 
Consisting  of  descriptions  of  Shulamite  in  the  midst  of 
her  royal  surroundings,  and  interviews  between  her  and 
and  her  royal  husband. 

7.  Ch.  8:5-14.  Seals  and  Songs.  Relates  to  the 
time  of  the  betrothal  contract  when  Solomon  goes  ac- 
companied and  introduced  by  Shulamite  into  her  home, 
and  the  betrothal  contract  having  been  made  is  finallj^ 
sealed,  and  the  customary  dowry  gifts  bestowed. 

IX.  Interpretation.— Three  principal  methods  of  in- 
terpretation have  been  adopted  in  explanation  of  The 
Song;   viz.,— 

1.   The   Allegorical   interpretation.     Tliis   intei'preta- 


124  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

tion  denies  that  there  is  any  liistorical  basis  to  the  de- 
scriptions of  The  Song,  and  affirms  that  everything  in  it 
is  of  spiritual  ijnport.  It  treats  the  persons,  objects, 
events,  and  ever}^  utterance  of  The  Song  as  unhistorical, 
as  mere  tigures,  names,  symbols  for  spiritual  persons, 
objects,  sentiments.  In  general  this  interpretation  re- 
gards The  Song  as  describing,  under  the  figure  of  the 
marriage  relation,  the  mutual  love  subsisting  between 
the  Lord  and  his  people, — in  the  first  instance  between 
the  Lord  and  the  Congregation  of  Israel,  and  in  the  sec- 
ond instance  between  Christ  and  the  Church.  To  this 
interpretation  their  are  serious  objections;  e.  g.^ — 

(a)  This  interi)retation  in  denying  a  primary,  literal, 
historical  sense  to  The  Song  destroys  its  own  founda- 
tion ;  for  it  is  from  the  sphere  of  the  natural  and  his- 
torical that  the  Scriptures  rise  to  the  spiritual. 

(b)  Hence  this  interpretation  is  contrarj^  to  Scripture 
analogy ;  the  order  of  which  is  first  the  symbol  then  the 
substance,  first  the  type  then  the  doctrine. 

(c)  The  allegorical  method  of  interpreting  The  Song- 
is  destructive  of  all  sound  hermeneutical  laws,  and  sub- 
stitutes therefor  an  arbitrar}^  sj^stem  of  exegesis. 

{d)  This  interpretation  is  unable  to  furnish  a  satis- 
factory and  uniform  exposition  of  The  Song. 

(e)  This  interpretation  practically  makes  The  Song  a 
meaningless  Book  to  the  people  of  God  under  the  Old 
Testament. 

(/)  This  interpretation  leads  to  all  sorts  of  extrava- 
gances and  mal-interpietations. 

2.  The  Shepherd-hypothesis  interpretation.  This 
method  of  interpretation  regards  The  Song  as  historical, 
but  introduces  another  and  wholl}'  unnamed  character 
in  The  Song,   viz.^   the  Shepherd,  an  obscure  peasant. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  125 

wlio  is  sii})posed  to  be  the  betrothed  of  Shulainite,  and 
the  suoeessful  rival  of  Solomon.  According  to  this  in- 
terpi'ctation,  Solomon,  (liirini>'  one  of  his  tours  in  the 
northern  part  of  his  kingdom,  saw  Shulamite,  was  over- 
come by  her  beauty,  was  smitten  with  love  for  her,  and 
so  had  her  abducted  and  carried  away  to  his  palace  in 
Jerusalem.  There  he  plied  her  with  all  the  arts  and 
arguments  of  a  flatterer  and  would-be  seducer,  in  order 
to  persuade  her  to  become  one  of  hi^  liareeiii^  a  royal 
mistress.  She  refuses  his  seductive  overtures,  remains 
true  to  this  Shepherd  to  whom  she  is  finally  wedded. 
According  to  this  view  The  Song  is  intended  to  teach  the 
lesson  of  virtue  and  womanly  fidelity,  but  womanly 
fidelity  to  what  is  nothing  more  than  a  mere  earthly, 
human  love;  for  according  to  this  there  is  no  tyjjical, 
spiritual  teaching  in  The  Song.  This  Shepherd-hypothe- 
sis interpretation  of  The  Song  is  utterly  untenable,  and, 
in  brief,  for  the  following  reasons : — 

(a)  It  repeatedly  violates  grammatical  constructions 
and  must  do  so  in  order  to  maintain  itself. 

(h)  It  repeatedl}^  violates  lexical  meanings,  and  Script- 
ure usiis  loqueudi,  and  must  do  so  in  order  to  maintain 
itself. 

(c)  It  interpolates  words  and  expressions  that  have  no 
existence  in  the  text,  and  must  do  this  to  maintain  itself. 

(d)  It  eliminates  words  and  significations  from  the 
text  because  these  cannot  be  retained,  and  their  hypothe- 
sis maintained. 

(e)  It  treats,  and  is  compelled  to  treat,  a  nund)er  of 
passages  as  being  "  ironical,"  or  "  said  aside,"  or  "  said 
in  a  low  tone,"  when  thei'e  is  no  intimation  of  this  in 
the  text. 

(/)  It  repeatedly  makes  characters  in  The  Song  con- 


126  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

tradict  themselves  Miid  each  other;  and  sets  text  and 
context  at  variance. 

{(/)  It  represents  Solomon  as  a  wonld-be  sedncer  when 
throughout  'Jlie  Song  he  is  represented  as  precisely  the 
opposite. 

{h)  It  charges  The  Song  and  the  principal  characters 
in  The  Song  with  the  most  absurd  incongruities; — viola- 
tions of  all  laws  linguistic,  social,  moral. 

{i)  It  introduces  an  unnamed  and  entirely  fictitious 
character  in  The  Song. 

(j  )  It  violates  the  laws  of  interpretation  and  exegesis 
in  that  it  repeatedly  takes  certain  statements  as  partly 
literal  and  partly  figurative. 

(k)  It  contradicts  the  plain  and  positive  statements  of 
The  Song  which  repeatedly  represent  Solomon  and  Shula- 
mite  as  the  beloved  and  loved  one;  represent  Shulamite 
as  giving  herself  to  Solomon;  represent  Solomon  and 
Shulamite  addressing  each  other  by  the  same  terms  of 
love,  and  by  terms  that,  if  language  has  any  meaning 
at  all,  require  us  to  regard  them  as  husband  and  wife. 

3.  The  Typical  interpretation.  It  regards  The  Song 
as  entirely  historical,  the  historical  occasion  being  the 
love  consummated  in  marriage  between  Solomon  and 
Shulamite.  l>ut  it  is  also  typical;  and  has  a  certain 
and  blessed  teaching.  In  an  allegory  everything  must 
be  spiritualized.  A  type  typifies  one  thing,  and  the 
antitype  far  surpasses  the  type.  So  then  as  to  the  typi- 
cal character  of  The  Song. 

(a)  Solomon  is  a  type  of  the  Lord, — the  one  Lord  of 
each  and  all  his  followers  in  all  times. 

(b)  Shulamite  is  a  type  of  the  individual  believer,  fol- 
lower, lover  of  that  one  Lord. 

(c)  The  relation  between  Solomon  and  Shulamite  is  a 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  127 

type  of  llial  iclalioii  wliicli  exists  or  should  exist  be- 
tween the  J.,or(l  and  eaeli  one  of  liis  individual  folh)wers. 

This  is  the  oidy  reasonable  interpretation  of  The  Son<»- 
as  is  evident,  briefly,  from  the  following  considera- 
tions : — 

(a)  It  is  supported  by  Scripture  analogy.  Psa.  -lo,  and 
Isa.  5 : 1-7  show  plainly  liow  The  Song  is  to  be  inter- 
preted. 

{h)  It  is  the  only  interpretation  that  satisfies  the 
language  of  the  text. 

(c)  It  is  the  only  interpretation  that  furnishes  a  con- 
sistent interpretation  of  the  different  parts  of  The  Song, 
and  a  uniform  and  consistent  interpretation  of  the 
whole. 

((/)  It  is  supported  b}'  the  direct  positive  statements 
of  The  Song,  and  all  the  representations  that  The  Song 
makes  relative  to  Solomon  and  Shulamite  as  the  beloved 
and  loved  one,  the  husband  and  wife. 

(e)  It  furnishes  not  only  the  only  consistent  literar}^ 
interpretation,  but  also  an  interpretation  consistent  with 
the  name  and  nature  of  the  Book,  and  its  place  in  the 
Canon. 


Literature.  — Commentaries  :      Delitzsch,     Moody-Stuarf, 
Eivald,  Ginsburg. 


PROPHET-PROPHECY. 

I.  Name.— The  Hebrew  verb  ndhci  means  to  cause  to 
bubble  up  or  pour  forth  abundantly;  to  speak  by  a  di- 
vine power;  to  jjrophesy.     From  this  verb   comes  the 


128  INTRODUCTION     OUTLINES. 

title  n((hi\  i.  e.,  'a  prophet.  Other  titles  for  pi-oplict  are 
rcyeli,  meaning  a  Seer,  and  liozeh,  also  meaning  Seer 
but  especially  in  the  sense  of  prophetic  vision.  The 
title  nahi  =  prophet  is  primary,  and  designates  one  who 
belonged  to  the  prophetic  order,  while  the  other  two 
terms  meaning  .see?'  are  secondary,  included  in  nal)i,  and 
set  forth  more  especially"  the  mode  of  receiving  the  di- 
vine communications. 

II.  Office.— The  office  of  prophecy  and  prophet  is  the 
announcement  and  interpretation  of  the  divine  will  to 
others  as  that  will  is  revealed  to  the  prophet  by  God. 
The  prophets  were  the  divinely  called  and  commissioned 
representatives  of  Jehovah,  and  prophecy  the  will  and 
words  of  Jehovah  communicated  of  Jehovah  to  the 
j)rophets,  by  whom  it  was  to  be  communicated  to  the 
people.  So  the  function  of  the  prophet  and  prophecy 
is  to  declare  and  defend  the  teachings  of  (4od's  truth,  as 
that  truth  is  set  forth  in  the  sphere  of  jjrecept  and  of 
promise. 

III.  Institution.— The  prophetical  institution  was  one 
for  which  the  Law  made  provision.  See  Deut.  18 :  9-19. 
The  historical  origin  of  prophecy  is  contemporaneous 
w  ith  the  constitution  of  the  Theocracy  at  Sinai.  True, 
proijhecy  existed  before  this,  existed  with  the  first  prom- 
ise of  redemption  immediately  after  the  fall  of  our  first 
13arents.  But  the  Law,  the  Theocracy,  the  ceremonials 
of  worship  were  instituted  for  the  development  of  that 
promise  through  the  prophetic  office. 

IV.  Inspiration.— The  modes  of  commu-nication  be- 
tween God  and  men  are  set  forth  in  Num.  12:  G-8  where 
three  modes  are  specified,  lu's. ,  (1)  Vision;  (2)  Dream; 
(3)  Direct  communication  and  manifestation.  The  last 
is  the  highest  form.     A  like  specification  is  furnished  by 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  129 

Joel  and  Daniel.  Joel  2:28;  Dan.  1:17.  Prophecy 
may  include  genius,  but  geinus  never  constitutes  i)roph- 
ecy.  Propliecy  is  not  possible  to  human  attainment, 
but  exclusivel}'  something  of  divine  endowment.  The 
l)rox)het  stands  in  a  unique,  personal  and  intimate  rela- 
tion to  God,  who  makes  him  a  participator  of  the  divine 
counsel,  and  discloses  to  him  secret  things.  He  receives 
by  direct  communication  with  God,  the  very  truth  from 
God,  and  communicates  it  in  the  language  God  intends 
to  be  used.  Compare  Aaron's  relation  to  Moses,  Ex. 
4:U-16,  and  Ex.  7:1,  2,  also  Deut.  18:18  and  Jer. 
15:19. 

V.  Classification.— In  the  main  propliecy  is  of  two 
kinds : — Didactic  and  Predictive. 

Didactic  prophecy  is  the  revelation  to  the  prophet, 
and  the  communication  by  the  proi^het,  of  the  divine 
will  as  it  concerns  the  obligations  of  the  present.  It 
instructs  man  as  to  what  he  should  be  through  God's 
gracious  working. 

Predictive  prophecy  is  the  revelation  to  the  prophet, 
and  the  communication  by  the  prophet,  of  the  divine 
will  as  it  concerns  the  occurrences  of  tlie  future.  It 
foretells  to  man  what  certainly  shall  be  through  God's 
sovereign  working. 

As  to  the  union  of  the  two  kinds  of  prophecy, — di- 
dactic instructs  as  to  the  requirements  of  the  present, 
while  predictive  foretells  the  things  of  the  future  in 
harmony  with  tlie  requirements  of  the  present,  both  be- 
ing conlirmed  by  the  didactic  and  i)redictive  i)ropliecies 
of  the  past. 

Predictive  prophecy  is  also  of  two  kinds: — Local  or 
Temporar}^,  and  Messianic. 

Predictive  prophecy  and  its  fulfilment  is  the  stroug- 
[9] 


130  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

est,    the   incontestable   evidence   to   the   truth   of    the 
Scriptures. 

VI.  Succession.— The  x>i'ophet  was  sovereignly  called 
of  God  to  his  office,  generally  without  special  reference 
to  lineal  or  scholarly  antecedents.  The  Scrij^tures  do 
not  represent  an  unbroken  series  of  prophets,  each  in- 
ducted into  the  office  by  his  predecessor.  The  steps  in 
prophetic  succession  may  be  briefly  rei:>resented  as  fol- 
lows : — 

1.  Prophecy  began  in  Eden  and  witli  the  Protevan- 
gelium. 

2.  Enoch,  the  seventh  from  Adam,  prophesied.  Jude 
14,  15. 

3.  Noah  as  a  preacher  of  righteousness,  and  the 
builder  of  the  ark  was  a  prophet.     2  Pet.  2:5. 

4.  Abraham. 

5.  Isaac. 

6.  Jacob. 

7.  Intermission  of  jirophecy  from  the  death  of  Jacob 
until  the  Exodus. 

8.  Moses. 

9.  From  Moses  to  Samuel  interval  without  prophecy. 

10.  Samuel. 

11.  From  Samuel  to  Malachi  prophecy  continuous. 

12.  From  Malachi  to  Christ  interval  without  prophecy. 


I 


b 
W 
0 

b 


so 

3 


C!5 


I 


^ 


o     o 
o    o 


<1  D 


H:)    ^ 


o     C"? 

C5     CD 


1«        rf3        ^ 

-^    o   ■« 
Ph    W    H 


lO  05  O 
GO  lO  T-l 
00     GO     00 


N    g  .5 

as     ^       N 

=  i  ^ 

tj     .^  l-D      W 

N 
N 


a    o    a    <:i 
<   tl^    ^   ^ 


05      1—1 
O     00 


O 


rid 

^ 

,14 

ce 

.5 

03 

"o 

'^ 

•^ 

^ 

o 

O 

(D 

^ 

^ 

•-5 

O     CO     lO     o     o 

C5       CO       CO       O"?       -rH 

iO     »o     to     iO     i.O 


«D     5D     IC     »0     lO 


o 


^ 


•7^      r^     ■  Cw        C<j        CC      "^      r^      "^      r^      "^      "^ 


93 


02 

ID     VI     rn 
<    <    < 


7t         ri       j:i 

>y     >i     >y 


a> 


■£•& 


oi      cc      </:'     ,:!! 


Pf  W  W 

-M  -t->  -*-> 

X  X  X 

O  O  O 

111  pL,  PL, 


o 


J3       0; 


H   W   IS]    ^ 


132  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


ISAIAH 


I.  Name. —  Yesliayahii  =  Isaiah  =  Jehovah's    salva- 
tion. 

II.  Biography.— Isaiah,  who  belonged  to  the  Kingdom 
of  Judah,  flourished  in  the  Assyrian  period.  (See  Table 
of  Prophets.)  Isaiah  was  the  son  of  Amoz,  and  resided 
and  iH'ophesied  in  Jerusalem.  lie  was  married,  and 
two  sons  are  spoken  of,  both  of  whose  names,  like  that 
of  Isaiah,  were  significant  as  to  the  times :  —  the  elder 
Shear-yasluib  ^  A  remnant  shall  return;  the  younger 
Mailer  -  slialal  -  liasli  -  haz  =  Spoil  swiftly,  roh  quickly. 
Isaiah  received  the  prophetic  call,  and  ajipeared  as  a 
prophet  in  the  last  year  of  King  ITzziah's  reign.  (See 
Table  of  Kings  p.  70,  71.)  Isaiah  continued  to  prophesy 
throughout  the  reigns  of  the  three  succeeding  kings, 
Jotham,  Ahaz  and  Hezekiah.  He  probably  continued  to 
exercise  his  prophetic  office  up  to  the  beginning  of  Ma- 
nasseh's  reign.  Tradition  says  that  he  suffered  martyr- 
dom bj'  being  sawn  assunder  in  the  ijersecutions  that 
followed  the  accession  of  Manasseh,  and  by  the  order  of 
that  wicked  king.  According  to  2  Chron.  20 :  22 ;  32 :  32, 
Isaiah  was  the  author  of  a  history  both  of  Uzziah  and 
Hezekiah.  Isaiah  was  pre-eminently  a  statesman  as 
well  as  a  prophet,  his  influence  being  strongly  felt 
throughout  the  reigns  during  which  he  x^rophesied,  while 
he  was  especially  in  high  favor  with  King  Hezekiah. 
The  two  i:)rincipal  state  events  with  which  Isaiah  was 
connected,  and  in  which  he  took  a  prominent  part,  were 
the  two  crises  through  which  in  his  lifetime  Judah 
passed;  the  first  being  the  invasion  of  Judah  on  the 
part  of  the  allied  Syrians  and  Israelites  (Chs.  7,  8),  and 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  133 

the  second  being  the  invasion  of  Judah  on  the  part  of 
Sennacherib,  and  the  destruction  of  the  Assyrian  host 
(Chs.  )>(*),  '.u).  Tsaiah  not  only  lived  to  an  {idvanced 
age,  but  lived  to  see  a  number  of  his  predictions  ful- 
filled. 

III.  Ministry.— Isaiah  exercised  his  prophetic  minis- 
trjMturing  a  period  of  forty-six  j^ears  (758-712  ]>.  C), 
and  perhaps  more  nearly  for  about  half  a  century,  as 
he  began  to  x)rophesy  in  the  last  year  of  Uzziah's  reign, 
and  continued  to  j)rophesy  till  at  least  fourteen  years 
of  Hezekiah's  reign  liad  j)assed  bj^  The  sphere  of 
Isaiah's  i)roi3hetic  ministration  was  Judah  and  Jeruga- 
lem.  His  labors  appear  to  have  been  carried  on  chiefly, 
if  not  exclusively,  in  Jerusalem.  In  the  exercise  of  his 
prophetic  ministry  Isaiah's  range  of  subjects  was  far- 
reaching,  the  burdens  of  his  prophecies  embracing  all 
the  chief  contemporary^  nations,  not  only  Judah  and 
Israel,  but  also  S3  ria,  Assyria,  I>abylon,  Egypt,  Moab, 
Edom,  Philistia,  Ethiopia,  Tja-e,  etc.  lUit  these  prophe- 
cies concerning  other  nations  were  intended  primarily 
for  the  benefit  of  Judah,  its  warning,  instruction  and 
hope.  Throughout  his  ministrj^  Isaiah  showed  himself 
to  be  without  an  equal  in  the  prophetic  order  as  a  social 
and  moral  reformer,  as  a  court  councilor  and  statesmau, 
as  the  theologian  of  all  times.  The  prophetic  utterances 
of  Isaiah's  ministry  revolve  about  the  two  great  themes 
of  proi:)hecy; — for  the  unbelieving  and  disobedient. 
Judgment;  for  the  believing  and  obedient,  redemption 
and  tlie  glorious  consummation  of  the  Theocracy. 

IV.  Chronology.— The  chronology  of  this  period  is 

1.  Contemporary  Prophets; — Ilosea,  Micah. 

2.  Kings  of  Jndah; — ITzziah,  Jotham,  Ahaz,  Ileze- 
kiah,  Mauasseh.     See  Table  j).  70,  71. 


134  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

3.  Kings  of  Israel; — Menahem,  Pekaliiali,  Pekah, 
Hoshea.     See  Table  p.  70,  71. 

1.  Damascene  Syria; — Hazael  (2  Ki.  13:  3-7).  Ben- 
hadacl  III.  (2  Ki.  13:3-7.)  Jeroboam  II.  invades 
Syria.  Damascus  vassal  of  Assyria.  Reziii  (Rezou)  742 
B.  C.     Last  King  of  Damascus.     2Ki.  10:5;  Isa,  Ch.  7. 

5.  Assyria.  Pul  =  Tiglath-Pileser  II.  usurps  the  As- 
syrian throne,  and  founds  the  second  great  Assyrian  em- 
pire.    Reigned  745-728  B.  C. 

Shalmaneser  IV.  a  general  of  tlie  Assyrian  army 
seizes  the  throne,  and  succeeds  Tiglath-Pileser.  Reigned 
727-722  B.  C. 

Sargon,  a  military  hero,  succeeds,  usurping  the  throne 
and  reigning  sixteen  years,  722-705  B.  C. 

Sennacherib,  son  of  Sargon,  succeeds,  and  reigns 
about  twenty-four  j^ears,  705-081  B.  C. ;  and  is  then 
succeeded  by  his  son 

Esarhaddon,  who  reigned  081-008  B.  C,  and  is  suc- 
ceeded by  his  son 

Asshurbani]3al  =  Sardanapalus  II. ,  who  reigned  008- 
020  B.  C. 

Toward  the  close  of  the  reign  of  this  monarch  begins 
the  swift  decline  of  the  Assyrian  Empire,  and  then  fol- 
lows its  fall  under  Esarhaddon  II. ,  the  Sarakos  of  the 
Greeks. 

0.  Egypt.  After  a  period  of  dj^nastic  changes,  in- 
ternal dissensions,  and  threatened  invasion  from  Assyria 
on  the  north  and  Ethiopia  on  the  south,  Bokenranef, 
about  740  B.  C,  and  sole  king  of  the  24th  Dj'nasty,  was 
succeeded  by  the  Ethiopian  King  Shabaka  or  Sabako,  the 
So  of  2  Ki.  17 :4  who  took  the  Egyptian  throne  and  founded 
the  dynasty  of  the  Ethiopians  725  B.  C.  He  was  suc- 
ceeded by  Shaba tak  whose  reign  was  short  when  he  was 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  135 

succeeded  by  Tirhaka  (Tsa.  ;')G:0,  37:9),  brother-in-law 
of  Sabako,  and  who  after  a  reign  of  twenty-six  years 
was  succeeded  by  Rut-Amon  or  Urdamen,  his  son-in- 
law,  and  he  by  the  first  king  of  the  2(;th  Dynasty,  Psa- 
metik  I.  or  Psamineticlius,  who  was  followed  about  (512 
B.  C.  by  his  son  Neku  II.,  the  Pharaoh  Necho  of  2  Ki. 
23:29,  and  contemporary  of  Josiah  King  of  Judah. 

1.  Events.  B.  C.  750.  Jotham  made  regent  along 
with  his  father  Uzziah. 

]>.  C.  745.  Tiglath-Pileser  usurps  the  Assyrian 
throne. 

B.  C.  742.     Call  of  Isaiah.     Death  of  Uzzrah. 
B.  C.  741.     Death  of  Jotham;  accession  of  Ahaz. 
B.  C.  738.     Tribute  paid  to  the  Assyrians  by  Men- 
ahem  and  Rezin. 

B.  C.  734.  Pekah  deposed  and  slain;  Iloshea  with 
Assyrian  help  raised  to  the  throne  of  Samaria;  Damas- 
cus besieged;  deportation  of  transjordanic  tribes  by 
Tiglath-Pileser. 

B.  C.  732.  Damascus  captured  by  Tiglath-Pileser; 
Rezin  put  to  death. 

B.  C.  727.  Tiglath-Pileser  succeeded  by  Shalmaneser 
IV.,  and  Ahaz  by  Ilezekiah. 

B.  C.  722.  Sargon  seizes  the  tlirone;  captures  Sa- 
maria.    End  of  the  Northern  Kingdom. 

B.  C.  721.     Merodach-baladan  captures  Babylon. 
B.  C.  712.     Embassy  of  Merodach-baladan  to  Ileze- 
kiah. 

B.  C.  711.  Conquest  of  Judah  and  Aslidod  by  Sar- 
gon. 

B.  C.  710.     Conquest  of  Babylonia  by  Sargon. 
B.  C.  705.     Si.irgon  murdered,  and  succeeded  by  his 
son  Sennacherib. 


136  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

B.  C.  703.     Sennaclierib  defeats  Merodach-baladan. 

B.  C.  701.  Campaign  of  Sennacherib  against  Ph<i^ni- 
cia,  Philistia  and  Jndali. 

B.  C.  G97.  Death  of  Hezekiah ;  succeeded  by  Manas- 
seh. 

B.  C.  G81.  Sennacherib  murdered  and  succeeded  bj^ 
his  son  Esarhaddon. 

B.  C.  G07.  Xineveh  destroyed  by  the  Medes  and 
Bab3donians. 

B.  C.  58G.  Destruction  of  Jerusalem  bj^  Nebuchad- 
nezzar. 

B.  C.  549.     Cyrus. 

B.  C.  538.  Cyrus  captures  Babylon,  and  releases  the 
Jewish  exiles. 

V.  Authorship— Unity.— Aben  Ezra,  a  distinguished 
Spanish  rabbi  of  the  twelfth  centurj^  was  the  first  to 
suggest  a  duality  of  authorship  as  to  the  Prophecy  of 
Isaiah ;  intimating  that  the  prophecies  of  the  last  part 
of  the  Book  were  written  bj^  King  Jechoniah  at  the  time 
of  the  Babjdonian  captivitj^  When  we  reach  Eichhorn 
in  the  last  centur}^  we  find  that  he  has  carried  the 
hypothesis  of  documents  so  far  as  to  divide  the  Book  of 
Isaiah  into  eightj^-five  fragments,  which  he  attributed  to 
ver}^  different  authors  and  times.  Modern  criticism  does 
not  go  quite  so  far ;  but  having  accepted  the  Isaianic 
duality  of  Aben  Ezra,  and  given  us  a  Proto-Tsaiah,  au- 
thor of  Chs.  1-39,  and  a  Deutero-Isaiah,  author  of  Clis. 
40-6G,  it  has  further  i)roceeded  to  give  us  different  au- 
thors for  different  prophecies  in  these  two  great  divis- 
ions, especially  the  proto-Isaiah  division.  A  recent  writer 
has  styled  this  criticism,  not  Higher,  but  "  rationalistic 
criticism,"  and  such  it  unquestionably  is,  for  it  is  evi- 
dent that  it  is  not  Isaiah,  as  such,  that  is  being  criticised 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  137 

aiul  assail(Ml.  What  is  b(Mii,i>'  assailed  is  t  lu^  siipcniatural, 
is  inspiration,  is  in  a  word  the  possibility  and  reality  of 
predictive  prophecy.  Granted  that  a  prophet,  by  the 
power  and  knowledge  i>iven  liini  of  (4od,  may  foretell 
years  and  eentnries  beforehand  what  is  to  take  place, — 
and  there  ceases  to  be  any  objection,  worthy  of  the 
name,  to  the  nnity  of  the  Hook  of  Isaiah,  and  its  au- 
thorship by  Isaiah  the  son  of  Amoz.  In  support  of  this 
unity  and  authorship,  and  as  against  the  general  view 
that  the  second  half  of  Isaiah  was  written  by  a  writer 
in  the  last  decenium  of  the  exile,  it  may  briefly  be  noted 

1.  The  New  Testament  assigns  the  authorship  of  the 
Prophecy  of  Isaiah  to  a  single  author,  and  that  author 
Isaiah  the  son  of  Amoz.  Thus,  e.  ij. ,  John  12 :  37-41  where 
two  quotations  are  made  from  Isaiah,  vAr::. ,  one  from  the  so- 
called  proto-Isaiah,  i.  e.,  6:9,  10,  and  the  other  from 
the  so-called  deutero-Isaiah,  viz.,  53: 1.  But  John  evi- 
dently quotes  these  passages  as  being  the  sayings  and 
writings  of  one  and  the  same  Isaiah,  for  he  emphasizes 
their  Isaianic  authorship  by  the  threefold  declaration, — 
"the  saying  of  Esaias,"  "  Esaias  said  again,"  and 
"these  things  said  Esaias." 

2.  It  is  the  exceptionless  rule  with  the  prophets  to 
furnish  in  the  opening  words  of  their  prophecies  their 
prophetic  credentials.  These  credentials  include  a 
statement — {(i)  of  the  prophet's  name;  (/>)  of  the  pro- 
l^het's  divine  authorit}^,  viz.,  that  his  prophecy  is  a 
word  or  vision  lie  had  from  Jehovah ;  {c)  the  prophet's 
parentage;  ((/)  the  prophet's  imtivity;  (e)  the  reigns 
during  which  or  time  when  lie  prophesied;  (/)  the  par- 
ties to  whom  his  pr()i)hecy  was  addressed;  {(j)  the  place 
where  he  received  or  uttered  his  iirophecy.  Nearly  all  t  he 
prophets,  all  the  greater  prophets,  and   the  majority  of 


138  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

the  minor  pmphets  furnish  most  of  the  above  items  in 
presenting  and  as  constituting  their  proj^hetic  creden- 
tials. Not  one  of  the  prophets  bat  furnishes  at  least 
two,  i.  e.,  his  name,  and  the  divine  authoritj^  of  his  pro- 
phetic utterances.  The  greater  propliets  of  the  Exilian 
and  post-Exilian  periods  are  especially  full  and  accurate 
in  the  data  furnished  by  them  as  to  their  prophetical 
authorit}-  and  ministry.  But  the  so-called  deutero- 
Isaiah,  the  greatest  of  all  the  prophets,  leaves  us  with- 
out even  the  remotest  intimation,  utterl}^  fails  to  present 
any  prophetical  credentials,  does  not  mention  a  single 
item,  not  even  his  name  or  his  divine  authority  for 
speaking.  And  yet  this  prophecy,  i.  e.,  Chs.  40-66,  is 
the  most  pregnant  and  the  sublimest  af  all  the  prophe- 
cies ever  uttered.  That  such  a  prophecy  should  be 
anonymous,  should  be  destitute  of  divine  official  author- 
ity, and  in  defiance  of  prophetical  usage  and  law,  is 
incomiirehensible,  far  more  incomprehensible  than  all 
the  assumed  difficulties  of  the  critics. 

3.  The  theologic  and  Messianic  conceptions  of  the 
first  and  second  halves  of  Isaiah  are  not  only  in  precise 
agreement,  but  together  constitute  one  continuously 
developed,  and  finally  completed  unit; — a  unit  indivis- 
ible as  to  nature,  argument  and  authorship,  without 
rendering  both  parts  imj)erfect.  The  proto-Isaiah  alone 
would  be  foundation  without  superstructure.  The  deu- 
tero-Isaiah  alone  would  be  superstructure  without  foun- 
dation. Taking  the  Book  as  a  unit  the  conception  of 
God  is  one  and  complete  as  to  his  nature  and  attributes : — 
his  majesty,  infinitude,  almightiness,  holiness;  his  pur- 
ity, righteousness,  faithfulness,  truth,  mercy,  love,  jeal- 
ousy, wrath.  It  is  especially  God's  holiness,  the  char- 
acter of  God  as   "  the  Hol}^  One  of  Israel,"  that  is  so 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  139 

strikino-ly  Tsaiaiiie  in  its  forces  and  frequency.  Tt  is 
almost  peculiar  to  the  one  undivided  l>ook  of  Isaiah, 
occuring-  twenty-five  times  in  Isaiah,  and  only  six  times 
elsewhere  throu.i»hout  the  whole  Old  Testament.  It  is 
characteristic  of  the  second  half  of  Isaiah  as  well  as  the 
first,  and  constitutes  not  only  a  remarkable  bond  of 
union  between  the  two  halves,  but  also  I'emarkable 
evidence  to  the  unity  of  their  authoi'ship.  The  same 
is  true  in  respect  to  Isaiah's  IVIessianic  conception  and 
Xirediction.  It  is  a  progressively^  and  indivisibly  devel- 
oped unit.  Thus,  e.  ry.,  the  development  of  the  twofold 
Messianic  figure  of  a  plant  and  a  child.  Again  the 
development  of  the  threefold  office  of  the  Messiah, 
kingly,  prophetical  and  priestly.  And  again  the  mar- 
velous prophetico-historical  development  of  the  life  and 
works  of  the  Messiah  between  first  advent  and  last 
Judgment. 

4.  The  argument  for  a  deutero-Isaiah  from  the  historic 
function  of  prophecy  is  not  only  contrary  to  the  spirit 
and  analogy  of  prophecy,  but  is  an  argument  that  proves 
too  much.  The  position  is  that  the  author  of  Isa.  Chs. 
40-GG  lived  and  wrote  in  the  last  decenium  of  the  exile; 
that  he  describes  historically  as  past  the  times  and  ex- 
periences of  the  exiles ;  that  there  is  no  prediction  of  the 
exile;  that  the  exile  is  presupposed,  and  only  the  release 
from  it  is  predicted.  iUit  this  position  is  contrary,  in- 
deed subversive  of  the  spirit  and  analogy  of  prophecy. 
For  not  only  do  others  of  the  prophets,  but  Isaiah  the 
son  of  Amoz  himself,  throws  himself  forward  by  the 
spirit  of  i^rophecy  into  the  future,  aiul  from  that  pro- 
phetico-historical standpoint  describes  events  as  past,  as 
historically  having  taken  place,  which  in  re.dity  are  as 
yet  future.      Thus,  e.  r/.,  5:  1:5-15;  D:  l-C;  •>:'.:  1,  U  etc., 


140  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

compare  Micali  7 :  7-20,  etc.  So  Isaiah  describes  not  only 
the  exile,  but  also  the  release  from  the  exile.  If  It  be 
granted  that  a  prophet  maj^  divinelj^  foreknow  and  fore- 
tell, there  is  then  not  a  single  statement  in  the  dentero- 
Isaiali  that  might  not  be  the  work  of  a  prophet  who 
knew  that  the  exile  and  the  release  from  the  exile  must 
take  place.  Besides,  the  above  position  and  argument 
proves  too  much ;  for  then  portions  of  the  i)roto-Isaiah 
must  have  been  written  after  tlie  restoration  from  Babj^- 
lon,  and  Isa.  Oh.  53  must  have  been  written  after  the 
sufferings,  crucifixion  and  burial  of  Christ. 

5.  The  argument  for  a  deutero-Isaiah  from  difference 
in  language,  literary  style  and  character,  not  only  can- 
not be  but  is  not  pressed.  The  marvel  the  rather  is 
that  the  difference  is  so  slight  considering  the  vast  his- 
torical scope,  and  diversified  i3rophetical  teachings  of 
the  prophet.  The  day  is  past  when  such  slight  differ- 
ences of  style  as  seemingly  exist  between  the  proto- 
and  deutero-Isaiah  can  be  alleged  to  be  incomj^atible 
with  unity  of  authorship.  There  is  nothing  in  the 
contents  of  the  so-called  deutero-Isaiah  that  may  not 
have  been  written  by  Isaiah  the  son  of  Amoz.  What 
seem  to  be  difficulties  in  style  are  onl}^  natural  and  nec- 
essary to  a  difference  in  time,  subject,  treatment  or 
environment.  But  examining  it  more  closelj^,  the  argu- 
ment from  language  is  strict! j'  an  argument  that  strongl}^ 
confirms  the  unity  of  the  Book,  and  its  authorshij)  bj^ 
the  son  of  Amoz.  There  is  a  considerable  number  of 
linguistic  peculiarities,  Isaianisms^  and  these  are  com- 
mon alike  to  the  first  and  last  \y<\vi^  of  the  Book. 

6.  Many  passages  in  the  so-called  deutero-Isaiah 
would  be,  to  say  the  least,  utterly  inconsistent  and 
meaningless,  if  treated  as  having  been  written  at  any 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  141 

time  during  the  exile;  e.  (j.,  40:  0;  4:5:^^2-24;  50:4-7; 
58:(j;  (32:(j;  GG:o,  4,  6,  etc. 

7.  Tliere  is  one  other  thing  esx)ecitilly  to  be  nuuked; 
a  most  remarkable  argument  passing  all  through,  par- 
tieularly  the  so-ealled  deutero-Isaiah.  It  is  an  argu- 
ment, the  one  supreme  argument  that  God  uses  to  prove 
that  he  alone  is  the  true  God;  the  one  sux)reme  ar- 
gument that  Isaiah  uses  to  prove  that  he  is  God's 
prophet,  and  his  words  God's  trutli.  I'he  course  of  this 
argument  may  in  part  be  traced  in  these  passages, — 
41:21-28;  42 :  i) ;  43:8-10;  45:20,21;  46:0-10;  48:3- 
10,  etc.  The  argument  is  this; — God  represents  himself 
as  announcing  events  before  they  come  to  pass  as  a 
j)roof  that  he  alone  is  the  true  God ;  and  the  same  argu- 
ment Isaiah  uses  to  prove  that  he  is  God's  prophet,  and 
his  words  are  God's  truth.  Now  it  is  precisely  this  ar- 
gument that  this  rationalistic  criticism  jjroposes  to  make 
void,  to  make  of  none  effect,  in  its  attempt  to  show  that 
the  second  half  of  Isaiah  was  written  in  the  last  de- 
cenium  of  the  exile.  It  is  very  evident  from  the  above 
passages  that  the  prophet  regarded  himself  as  revealing 
the  future,  and  not  simply  describing  what  was  before 
the  eyes  of  all. 

VI.  Divisions  and  Contents.— In  brief  the  Proi:)hecy 
of  Isaiah  may  be  divided,  and  its  contents  indicated, 
ux^on  the  basis  of  six  parts  or  Books,  as  follows : — 

1.  Chs.  1-G.  Tlie  Book  of  Introductions.  Contains 
superscriptions,  credeiilials  of  the  Prophet,  and  pro- 
phetic statements  of  judgment  and  salvation  toward 
Israel;  as  follows: — (a)  Cli.  1.  Sets  forth  the  thought- 
lessness, hypocrisy,  and  wickedness  of  the  Jews,  and 
the  destruction  of  their  cities  and  desolation  of  their 
country.     Probably  written  in  the  reign  of  Hezekiah 


142  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

after  Sennacherib's  invasion.  (h)  Clis.  2-4.  Contain 
threatenings  of  God's  jndgnients  upon  the  people  of 
Judah  for  idohitry,  wickedness,  and  pride,  together  with 
a  promise  of  future  blessedness.  Probabl}^  written  in 
the  reign  of  Jotliam.  (c)  Cli.  5.  Parable  of  the  vine- 
yard, addressed  to  Judah  and  Jerusalem,  res]3ecting 
Judah  and  Israel,  ending  with  a  denunciation  of  divine 
judgments  upon  the  wicked.  Probably  belongs  to  the 
time  of  Jotham.  {d)  Ch.  0.  Isaiah's  call  to  the  pro- 
phetic office  in  the  last  3^ear  of  Uzziali. 

2.  Chs.  7-10.  TJie  Book  of  Iminanuel.  In  Ch.  7, 
against  the  confederated  forces  of  Syria  and  Israel, 
Isaiah  gives  Aliaz  the  sign  of  Immanuel,  and  announces 
the  imi^ending  judgments  of  God  from  the  hands  of  the 
Assyrians.  In  Chs.  8: 1 — 9: 10  there  is  a  prediction  of 
the  overthrow  of  Damascus  and  Samaria  by  the  Assyr- 
ians, an  appeal  to  trust  in  God,  and  a  prediction  of  the 
Messiah's  Kingdom.  This  proijhecy^  i^robably  belongs 
to  the  time  of  Ahaz.  In  Chs.  9 :  8 — 10 : 1  there  is  a 
prophecy  relative  to  the  destruction  of  Israel,  probably 
delivered  in  the  latter  i^art  of  the  reign  of  Ahaz.  In 
Chs.  10:5-34  there  is  a  prediction  of  the  invasion  of 
Judah  by  the  King  of  Assyria,  which  was  probably 
uttered  in  the  last  part  of  the  reign  of  Ahaz. 

Chs.  11,  12  constitute  a  concluding  statement  to  Chs. 
7-10.  They  j)redict  the  appearance  of  the  Messiah 
from  the  stem  of  Jesse,  set  forth  the  Messianic  salva- 
tion, Messiah's  reign  and  the  song  of  the  final  redemj)- 
tion. 

o.  Chs.  13-23.  The  Book  of  Oracles  (concerning  the 
nations).  This  division  or  Book  contains  proi)hecies 
directed  against  foreign  nations;  viz.^  (a)  Chs.  13:1 — 
14 :  23.   Against  Babylon,    (h)  Ch.  14 :  24-27.  Against  As- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  143 

Syria,  (c)  Cli.  14:28-32.  Ai»aiiist  the  Philistines.  Last 
year  of  Aliaz.  ((/)  Chs.  15,  IG.  Against  Moab.  (p)  Ch. 
17:1-11.  Against  Damascus  anil  Samaria.  Time  of 
llezelviali.  (/")  C'h.  17:12-14.  Against  enemies  of 
Judah,  probably  the  Assyrians.  Time  of  Ilezekiali. 
{(/)  Ch.  18.  Against  Ethiopia.  Time  of  Ilezekiali. 
(h)  Ch.  19.  Against  Egypt.  Time  of  Ilezekiah.  {i) 
Ch.  20.  Relates  a  symbolic  action  performed  by  Isaiah 
in  the  time  of  Sargon,  King  of  Assja-ia,  accompanied 
with  a  prophecy  that  the  King  of  Assyria  would  lead 
captive  the  Egyptians  and  Ethiopians.  Time  of  Ileze- 
kiah. (j)  Ch.  21:1-10.  Against  Babjdon.  {k)  Ch. 
21 :  11,  12.  Dumah  in  Arabia.  (/)  Ch.  21 :  13-17.  Con- 
cerning Arabia,  (m)  Ch.  22:1-14.  Proi^hecy  of  the 
invasion  of  Judah  by  Sennacherib  in  the  fourteenth  year 
of  Ilezekiah's  reign,  and  delivered  shortly  before  the 
event,  {n)  Ch.  22:15-19.  Against  Shebna,  treasurer 
in  the  middle  of  Ilezekiah's  reign,  (o)  Ch.  22  :  20-25. 
Prediction  as  to  Eliakim  who  is  to  replace  Shebna.  (p) 
Ch.  23.     Against  Tyre. 

Chs.  24-27  constitute  a  concluding  statement  related 
to  Chs.  13-23,  as  Chs.  11,  12  were  to  Chs.  7-10.  Tliis 
concluding  statement  Chs.  24-27  sets  forth  the  judgment 
of  the  earth,  the  humiliation  of  Moab,  the  salvation  of 
the  nations,  and  the  redemption  and  resurrection  of 
Israel. 

4.  Chs.  28-33.  The  Bool'  of  Woes.  These  prophe- 
cies belong  to  the  period  from  the  sixth  to  the  fourteenth 
year  of  Hezekiah.  They  treat  of  the  Assyrian  invasion, 
and  are  prophecies  uttered  against  (a)  Ch.  28.  E^ihraim 
and  Jerusalem,  Avhose  vices  are  rebuked,  and  judgment 
threatened,  (h)  Ch.  29.  Against  Ariel  (Jerusalem),  fol- 
lowed by  the  promise  of  returning  happiness,     (c)  Chs. 


144  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

oO,  ol.  Against  those  who  look  to  P^gypt  for  help  against 
the  Ass^'i'ians,  with  a  promise  of  future  i)rosperit3\  (d) 
Chs.  32,  33.  Variously  applied  judgments  and  prom- 
ises. 

Chs.  34,  35  constitute  a  concluding  statement  related 
to  Chs.  28-33  as  Chs.  24-27  are  to  Chs.  13-23.  These 
Chs.  34,  35  set  forth  the  judgment  (Ch.  34")  upon  all 
nations  of  the  world,  especially  (Ch.  34**)  Edom,  and 
the  redemption  (Ch.  35)  of  Jehovah's  people. 

5.  Chs.  36-39.      The  Boole  of  Histories:  including 
(a)  Chs.  36,  37.     The  double  demand  made  by  Sen- 
nacherib for  the  surrender  of  Jerusalem,  and  the  mira- 
cle of  its  deliverance. 

(6)  Ch.  38.  The  illness  of  llezekiah,  and  the  promise 
of  his  recovery. 

(c)  Ch.  39.     The  prediction  of  the  ]>abylonian  exile. 

6.  Chs.  40-66.  The  Booh  of  Redemption :  includ- 
ing 

(a)  Chs.  40-48.  The  certainty  of  the  coming  redemp- 
tion from  Babylon. 

{h)  Chs.  49-57.  The  work  and  exj^eriences  i:)repara- 
tory  to  the  coming  redemption. 

(c)  Chs.  58-66.  The  conditions  of  participation  in 
the  coming  redemption. 

VII.  Theolog-y.— Isaiah  is  the  theologian  i^ re-eminent. 
His  theology  is  all-embracing.  Still  even  the  theology 
of  Isaiah  has  its  distinguishing  characteristics ;  that  is, 
aspects,  doctrines,  attributes  that  the  times  of  Isaiah 
required  should  be  especially  emphasized.  It  was  in 
that  vision  of  Jehovah's  glory  wherein  were  especially 
revealed  the  supreme  attributes  of  Majesty  and  Holiness 
that  Isaiah  received  his  prophetic  call.  These  attri- 
butes of  the  divine  character  are  therefore  distinguish- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  145 

ing  features  in  liis  tlieology,  in  his  conception  of  God. 
And  tliey  were  so  in  great  measure  because  the  times  re- 
quired tliat  these  supreme  attril)utes  of  Jehovah's  majesty 
and  holiness  shoukl  receive  most  impressive  emphasis. 
Luxury,  independence,  injustice,  scepticism,  idolatry, 
contempt  for  the  rights  of  the  poor,  and  an  insolent  de- 
fiance of  the  supreme  majesty  of  Jehovah  of  hosts, — this 
was  the  proud  spirit  of  the  times,  a  spirit  that  had  to  be 
humbled  before  the  awful  manifestations  of  Jehovah's 
majesty.  And  even  more  strongly  does  Isaiah  empha- 
size Jehovah's  holiness.  With  Isaiah  as  with  his  con- 
temporaries Amos  and  Hosea,  holiness  is  the  essential 
characteristic  of  Deity.  This  holiness  is  not  simply 
negative  but  positive,  refers  not  alone  to  the  passive  at- 
tributes, but  especially  to  all  the  activities  of  the  Divine 
Being.  Jehovah  is  separated,  is  essentially  deity,  that 
is,  is  holy,  primarily  and  chiefly  in  that  which  he  does, 
in  the  character  of  his  works.  Precisely  this  Israel  was 
to  be,  and  precisel}^.  this  Israel  was  not.  Hence  Isaiah's 
theology  emphasizes  holiness;  that  holiness  which  was 
in  Him  who  required  holiness  in  his;  that  holiness  which 
rendered  Him  peculiarly  the  "  Holy  One  of  Israel";  the 
holiness  of  the  Sei'aphim's  song.   0:3. 

VIII.  Messianic— Isaiah  is  also  pre-eminently  the 
Messianic  Prophet.  The  life  of  the  Messiah  from  be- 
ginning to  ending;  the  oflices  of  the  Messiah,  propheti- 
cal, priestly  and  kingly ;  the  work  of  the  Messiah  from 
its  Inception  to  its  consummation  in  the  redemption  of 
the  whole  earth  in  the  last  days, — are  set  forth  with 
marvelous  minuteness  and  power.  The  more  esi^ecial 
Messianic  sections  are 

1.  Isa.  2:2-4.     The  Final  Messianic  Period. 

2.  Isa.  4:2-0.     The  Sprout  of  Jehovah. 

Lioj 


146  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

o.  Isa.  Ch.  7.     Immanuel. 

4.  Isa.  8 :  23—9 :  6.     The  Prince  of  Peace. 

5.  Isa.  Chs.  11,  12.     The  Shoot  of  Jesse. 

6.  Isa.  19: 16-25.     Egypt,  Assj^ria  and  Israel  United. 

7.  Isa.  28: 14-18.     The  Corner-Stone  of  Zion. 

8.  Isa.  33:13-24.     Zion  the  City  of  the   Great  King. 

9.  Isa.  Ch.  35.     The  Blessed  Time  Coming. 

10.  Isa.  42:1-9.     The  Chosen  Servant  of  Jehovah. 

11.  Isa.   49:1-9.      The    Calling    of   the   Servant   of 
Jehovah. 

12.  Isa.    50:4-11.      The   Mission  of   the   Servant  of 
Jehovah. 

13.  Isa.    52:13—53:12.     The  Suffering  and   Saving 
Servant  of  Jehovah. 

14.  Isa.  55:1-5.     The  Invitation  of  the  Covenant  of 
Redemption. 

15.  Isa.  61 : 1-3.     The  Glorious  Words  and  Works  of 
the  Servant  of  Jehovah. 


Literature. — Commentaries  :   Delitzsch,    Langc,    Speaker's, 
Pulpit,  Ewald,  Clieyne,  Alexander. 


JEREMIAH. 

I.  Name.  —  Yermeyah  u  =  Jeremiah  =  Jehovah  raises 
up. 

II.  Biography.— Jeremiah  who  flourished  in  the 
Chaldean  and  Exilian  period,  belonged  to  the  Kingdom 
of  Judah.  See  Table  of  Prophets.  Jeremiah  was  born 
at  Anathoth,  a  small  town  in  the  territory  of  Benjamin, 
about  three   miles   jiprtheast  of   Jerusalem.     Jeremiah 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  147 

was  of  priestly  desceiil.  He  received  liis  call  to  the 
prophetic  miiiistiy  when  yet  a  very  3'Oiing  man,  and 
served  in  it  for  sonietlung  over  forty  years.  It  would 
seem  that  he  was  never  married.  The  early  pait  of  ids 
life,  and  the  earlier  scene  of  a  brief  prophetic  ministr}^ 
was  spent  in  his  native  town  of  Anathoth.  Tlie  main 
scene  of  his  nunistrj^,  and  therefoi-e  life,  was  Jerusa- 
lem. The  closing  scene  of  Ins  j)roj)hetic  nnnistry  was 
Kg.ypt.  In  the  time  of  Zedekiah  he  was  imprisoned  and 
cast  into  a  miry  dungeon,  from  which  he  was  liberated 
by  order  of  the  king,  though  still  confined  to  the  court 
of  the  prison.  Indeed  the  life  of  the  prophet  was  spent 
during  the  most  troublous  times  of  the  Jewish  State, 
/.  e.,  during  the  reigns  of  the  last  kings  of  Judah. 

III.  Ministry.— Jeremiah  was  called  to  the  i^rophetic 
ministry  in  the  thirteenth  j^ear  of  the  reign  of  King 
Josiah.  He  continued  in  this  ministry  until  the  time  of 
the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  by  the  Chaldeans,  and 
even  later.  He  prophesied  under  the  reigns  of  Josiah, 
Jehoahaz,  Jehoiakim,  Jehoiachin  and  Zedekiah.  Dur- 
ing all  this  time  Jeremiah  took  a  most  active  and  effect- 
ive part,  in  matters  both  external  and  internal,  relative 
to  the  fate  of  his  people,  and  the  attitude  of  surround- 
ing nations.  Of  these  times  of  the  prophet  his  Book 
affords  not  only  a  graphic,  but  a  more  complete  histori- 
cal account  than  does  the  IJook  of  any  other  of  the 
prophets  of  his  times. 

IV.  Chronolog-y.— The  contemporaiy  prophets  of  Jere- 
miah were  Zephaniah,  Habakkuk,  P^zekiel  and  Daniel. 
The  principal  events  were  the  following: 

B.  C.  039.  Accession  of  Josiah.  Reigned  about 
thirtj^-one  years. 

B.  C.  626.     Call  of  Jeremiah. 


148  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

B.    C.   609.     Accession  of  Jelioahaz.     Reigned  three 
months. 

B.  C.  608.     Accession  of  Jehoiakim.     Reigned  eleven 
years. 

B.  C.  604.     Victory  of  Nebuchadnezzar  over  Pharaoh 
Necho  at  Carchemish  on  the  Euphrates. 

B.  C.  597.     Accession  of  Jehoiachin.     Reigned  four 
months. 

B.  C.  597.     First  siege  of  Jerusalem,  and  deportation 
of  Jewish  exiles. 

B.    C.    596.     Accession   of   Zedekiah.      Reigned   ten 
years. 

B.   C.   586.     Destruction  of   Jerusalem  by  the  Chal- 
deans, and  second  deportation  of  Jewish  exiles. 

v.  Genuineness.— The  genuineness  of  the  prophecies 
of  Jeremiah  lias  been  generally  admitted.  It  is  difficult 
to  see  how  it  could  be  otherwise,  inasmuch  as  these 
prophecies  are  so  interwoven  with  the  events  of  Jere- 
miah's life,  and  bear  so  strongly  the  stamp  of  Jeremiah's 
age.  Consequently  onl}^  a  comparatively  limited  num- 
ber of  isolated  passages  or  small  sections  have  ever  been 
called  into  serious  question,  and  these  have  been  ques- 
tioned on  insnfficient  grounds.  In  a  number  of  instan- 
ces passages  are  found  in  the  Hebrew  text  that  are 
wanting  or  omitted  in  the  LXX.  13 ut  the  mere  fact 
that  these  versed  are  wanting  in  the  LXX  furnishes  no 
sufficient  proof  that  they  were  wanting  in  tlie  Hebrew 
text  before  the  time  of  Christ ;  and  certainl}^  furnishes 
no  sufficient  reason  for  their  being  rejected  from  the 
text.  Examined  in  the  light  of  the  context  these  pas- 
sages omitted  by  the  LXX  are  all  of  them  well  con- 
nected, and  suitable  to  the  occasion ;  while  on  the  other 
hand  it  is  well  known  that  the  LXX,  not  infrequently. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  140 

took  liberties  witli  tlie  text.  A  few  other  sections  in  the 
l^ropliecies  of  Jeremiah  are  supposed  by  some  critics  to 
have  been  written  or  rather  revised  by  a  later  writer, 
the  Deutero-Isaiah,  inasmuch  as  thej^  are  in  his  style; 
thus  notably  e.  gr.,  Chs.  30,  31,  33.  But  what  possible 
object  the  Deutero-Tsaiah  could  have  had  in  retouching- 
portions  of  Jeremiah  to  make  these  bare  his  style,  is  dif- 
ficult to  see.  True,  there  are  a  number  of  passages  in 
Jeremiah  that  strongly  resemble  Isaiah ;  but  comparing 
these  passages,  and  comparing  the  styles  of  Jeremiah 
and  Isaiah,  it  becomes  manifest  that  these  passages 
are  original  in  Isaiah.  The  most  natural  conclusion 
then  is  that  Jeremiah  used  or  imitated  Isaiah.  The  last 
chapter  of  Jeremiah,  /.  e.,  Ch.  52,  constitutes  an  his- 
torical appendix  which  describes  the  reign  of  Zedekiah, 
the  capture  of  Jerusalem  and  the  events  connected  with 
it,  and  the  deliverance  of  Jehoiachin  from  imprison- 
ment in  Babylon.  This  chapter  was  probably  written 
b}'  another  and  later  writer  than  Jeremiah,  in  view  of 
the  words  with  which  the  preceding  chapter,  Ch.  51, 
closes,  viz.,  "  Thus  far  are  the  words  of  Jeremiah."  The 
Book  of  Jeremiah  does  not  present  the  prophecies  of 
Jeremiah  in  the  precise  chronological  order  in  Avhich 
they  were  delivered;  although  the  disorder  is  by  no 
means  great  in  the  arrangement  of  tlie  x^i'ophecies  and 
the  events.  The  chronological  order  is  perhaps  more 
nearly  as  follows : 

Reign  of  Josiah, — Chs.  1-17. 

Reign  of  Jehoiakim,— Chs.  18,  19,  20 ;  21 :  11—22 :  19 ; 
25,  35,  36,  45,  46. 

Reign  of  Jehoiachin,— Chs.  22:20—23:40. 

Reign  of  Zedekiah,— Chs.  21:1-10;  24,27-34,  37, 
38,  39. 


150  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Clis.  40-44.  Events  after  the  capture  of  Jerusalem, 
and  Jeremiah's  migration  to  Egypt. 

Chs.  46-51.  The  prophecies  respecting  foreign  na- 
tions, having  no  special  relation  to  the  events  of  his 
time,  are  placed  at  the  end. 

Ch.  52.     Appendix  bj^  a  later  hand. 

VI.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  Book  divides  itself 
into  two  principal  parts,  according  as  the  prophecies  re- 
late to  the  prophet's  own  nation,  or  to  foreign  nations, 
as  follows : 

I.  Chs.  1-45.  Prophecies  relating  to  the  prophet's 
own  nation,  including 

1.  Ch.  1.     The  call  of  the  Prophet. 

2.  Chs.  2-10.  Rebukes,  warnings  and  promises  in 
the  times  of  Josiah. 

3.  Chs.  11-20.  Rebukes,  warnings  and  promises  in 
the  times  of  Josiah,  Jehoiakim  and  Jehoiachin. 

4.  Chs.  21-24.  Rebukes,  warnings  and  promises  in 
the  times  of  Jehoiachin  and  Zedekiah. 

5.  Chs.  25-29.  Prophecies  uttered  during  the  reigns 
of  Jehoiakim  and  Zedekiah,  placed  together  on  account 
of  similarity  of  subject-matter,  and  treating  of  the  over- 
throw of  Jerusalem,  and  the  servitude  of  the  Chaldeans 
for  seventy  j^ears.  This  section  is  introduced  b}^  the 
announcement  of  the  judgment  upon  all  nations  in  the 
fourth  3^ear  of  Jehoiakim. 

6.  Chs.  30-33.  Prophecies  belonging  to  the  latter  part 
of  Zedekiah's  reign,  and  making  announcements  of  sal- 
vation in  reference  to  the  future  redemption  and  glorifi- 
cation of  Israel. 

7.  Chs.  34-39.  Pro}3hecies  and  narratives  belonging 
to  the  times  of  Jehoiakim  and  Zedekiah. 

8.  Chs.  40-45.     Historical  narratives  treating  of  the 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  151 

life  and  conduct  of  tlie  T^ropliet  amon^:  the  people  left 
in  the  land  by  the  dialdeans  after  the  destruction  of 
Jerusalem,  both  prior  to  and  after  their  flioht  into  E«»ypt. 
II.  Chs.  40-52.  Prophecies  against  foreign  nations; 
viz.,— 

1.  Ch.  -40.     Against  Egypt. 

2.  Ch.  47.     Against  the  Philistines. 

3.  Ch.  48.     Against  Moab. 

4.  Ch.  49:1-G.     Against  Amnion. 

5.  Ch.  49 :  7-22.     Against  Edom. 

6.  Ch.  49:23-27.     Against  Damascus. 

7.  Ch.  49:28-33.     Against  Kedar  and  Ilazor. 

8.  Ch.  49:34-39.     Against  Elam. 

9.  Chs.  50,  51.     Against  Babylon. 
10.   Ch.  52.     Historical  appendix. 

VII.  Theology.— The  distinguishing  doctrine  in  Jere- 
miah's theology,  the  distinguishing  characteristic  in  his 
conception  of  God  is  that  of  Love, — Jehovah's  love. 
But  this  implies  also  the  reverse,  viz.,  jealousy,  wrath. 
Hence  associated  with  Jeremiah's  preaching  setting  forth 
the  tenderness  and  infiniteness  of  that  love,  we  find  also 
awful  rebukes,  warnings,  threatenings  of  judgment  di- 
rected to  and  against  those  who  had  outraged  that  love. 
Like  Amos  and  Hosea,  Jeremiah  bases  his  theology  and 
preaching  on  the  relation  of  Jehovah  to  Israel.  Jehovah 
had  chosen  Israel,  entered  into  covenant  with  Israel, 
brought  them  out  of  Egypt,  led  them  through  the  wilder- 
ness, and  ever  educated,  delivered  and  blest  them  with 
infinite  and  almighty  love.  Especially  is  Jeremiah  the 
counterpart  of  his  earlier  co-prophet  in  the  Kingdom  of 
Israel,  Hosea.  Like  Hosea,  Jeremiah  uses  the  figures  of 
marriage  and  sonship  to  describe  the  intinuicy  and  in- 
tensity of  the  relationship  between  Jehovah  and  Israel, 


152  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

and  the  duties  implied  in  that  relatiousliii).  Tliis  rehi- 
tionship  Israel  liad  outrageously  violated.  Tlie  [)artieu- 
lar  sins  of  whieli  Israel  was  guilty  are  specitied  as 
idolatr\%  scepticism,  immoralit}^  formalism,  self-confi- 
dence, obduracy,  moral  degeneracy.  On  account  of 
these  Israel  receives  rebukes,  warnings,  calls  to  repent- 
ance, threatenings  of  judgment,  inflictions  of  chastise- 
ments, and  all  these  all  the  more  terrible  because  they 
proceed  from  outraged  divine  love, — "The  Wrath  of 
the  Lamh.'^  But  from  this  sinful  and  desperate  present, 
Jeremiah  turns  to  a  more  hopeful  future,  aud  to  utter 
promises  of  consolation  and  restoration.  The  fullest  of 
these  promises  are  collected  in  Chs.  30-33,  called  the 
"  Book  of  Comfort."  These  promises  set  forth  first  of 
all  one  of  Jeremiah's  favorite  doctrines,  viz.^  the  inde- 
structibility of  Israel.  The  judgment  which  must  be 
inflicted  is  designed  for  correction,  not  annihilation. 
Hence  while  the  nation  must  go  into  captivity,  it  must 
also  through  the  tenderness  and  eternity  of  Jehovah's 
love  be  restored  from  cax)tivity.  With  the  restored  peo- 
ple Jehovah  will  make  a  New  Covenant,  a  covenant 
written  not  on  tables  of  stones,  but  the  tables  of  the 
heart, — an  inward,  spiritual,  everlasting  covenant  of 
pardon  and  grace.  Jeremiah  also  em^jhasizes  the  doc- 
trines of  personal  resi)onsibility,  spirituality  of  religion, 
while  he  describes  the  spirituality  and  glory  of  the  com- 
ing Messianic  age  when,  instead  of  the  ark,  Jehovah 
himself  shall  come  and  dwell  in  the  midst  of  his  peo- 
ple. 

VIII.  Messianic — Jeremiah's  view  of  the  Messianic 
King  and  Kingdom  is  perhaps  less  magnificent  and  com- 
prehensive than  Isaiah's,  but  none  the  less  spiritual.  In 
that  day  of  the  true  and  final  restoration  of  Israel  from  all 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  15)5 

the  lands  of  tlio  diaspoi'a.  Www  sliall  be  raised  ii])  nnto 
David  a  righteous  JJrancli,  wlio  sliall  nnixn  as  l\iiiii",  ad- 
minister justice,  save  Israel,  and  be  called  Jehovali  our 
Riiihteousness.  This  King  is  styled  J)avid.  Not  that 
Jerendah  expected  David  to  return  in  ])erson,  but,  like 
Hosea,  he  looked  for  one  of  the  line  of  David  who  should 
fulfil  the  divine  ideal.  This  Kino-  should  have  priestly 
power.  He  should  be  the  righteousness  of  his  people. 
He  should  thus  reign  a  righteous  King  over  a  righteous 
people.  And  ransomed  Zion  should  once  more  be  the 
wonder  of  all  the  nations  of  the  earth.  The  Messianic 
sections  are 

1.  Jer.  3:14-18.     Jerusalem  Jehovah's  Throne. 

2.  Jer.  23 :  1-8.     Jehovah  our  Righteousness. 

3.  Jer.  33:  14-26.     Jehovali  our  Righteousness. 

4.  Jer.  Chs.  30,  31.     The  Book  of  Comfort. 


Ltiteratu.re*—Cvmmeutaries  :    Keil  and  Delitzsch,      Laiiye, 
Speaker^s,  Pulpit,  Streane,  OreUi,  PJumptre. 


THE    LAMENTATIONS    OF 
JEREMIAH. 

I.  'Saine,~Ai]tah=  Hoir  ?  The  ]]ook  is  so  called  in 
the  Hebrew  JJible  from  its  opening  word.  Tn  the  LXX, 
Peshito-Syriac  and  Vulgate  it  is  called  The  Lamenta- 
tions of  Jeremiah,  or  simply  Lamentations,  whence  tlie 
English  name. 

II.  Position,- Being  poetical  (see  p.  01),  the  Book 
in  the  Hebrew  Hible  stands  in  the  Hagiographa  just  be- 


154  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

fore  the  Book  of  Ecclesiastes.  The  Peshito-Syriac  and 
Vulgate  place  the  Book  immediately  after  the  Book  of 
the  Prophet  Jeremiah,  from  which,  in  the  LXX,  it  is 
separated  by  the  Book  of  Baruch.  The  A.  V.  also  puts 
it  after  the  Prophecy  of  Jeremiah,  it  being  connected 
therewith  by  unity  of  authorship,  and  unity  in  historical 
matter. 

III.  Theme.— The  Book  of  Lamentations  is  an  elegy, 
a  dirge,  written  over  the  desolation  of  Jerusalem.  It 
has  for  its  theme  the  calamities  that  befell  the  people  of 
Judah  and  Jerusalem  in  consequence  of  the  siege  and 
capture  of  Jerusalem  by  the  Chaldeans  B.  C.  586. 

IV.  Structure.— The  Book  of  Lamentations  has  a  re- 
markably executed  alphabetical  arrangement.  In  the 
first  four  chapters  the  verses  are  arranged  alphabeticall3\ 
In  the  first  and  second  chapters  each  verse  consists  of 
three  members,  and  the  verses  begin  severally  with  the 
successive  letters  of  the  Hebrew  alphabet.  In  the  third 
chapter  the  verses  consist  of  single  members,  and  three 
verses,  each  having  the  same  initial  letter,  are  assigned 
to  each  successive  letter  of  the  alphabet,  so  that  the 
chapter  contains  in  all  sixty-six  verses.  The  fourth 
chapter  is  similar  in  structure  to  the  first,  except  that 
each  verse  has  two  members  only.  The  fifth  and  last 
chapter  is  not  alphabetical,  but  consists  nevertheless  of 
twenty-two  verses,  each  formed  by  two  somewhat  short 
members. 

V.  Authorship— Date.— There  is  no  statement  in  the 
Old  Testament  as  to  the  authorshii^  of  the  Lamentations. 
The  LXX,  the  Vulgate  and  the  most  ancient  Jewish 
traditions  ascribe  the  Book  to  the  Prophet  Jeremiah. 
The  evidences  furnished  by  the  Book  itself  confirm 
rather  than  disprove  the  tradition ;  for 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  155 

1.  The  same  spirit,  deeply  sympathetic  in  national 
sorrow,  and  ever  ready  to  give  unrestrained  utterance  to 
its  emotions,  manifests  itself  strongly  both  in  the  La- 
mentations and  in  Jeremiah. 

2.  In  the  Lamentations  the  national  calamities  are  re- 
ferred to  the  same  causes  as  in  Jeremiah;  e.  g.,  the 
national  sins,  the  guilt  of  prophets  and  priests,  the  peo- 
ple's false  confidence  in  the  help  of  weak  and  treacher- 
ous allies,  etc. 

3.  Similar  representations  and  figures  occur  in  both 
Lamentations  and  Jeremiah;  e.  (/.,  as  to  the  virgin 
daughter  of  Zion,  the  prophet's  eyes  flowing  with  tears, 
the  appeal  for  vengeance  to  the  righteous  Judge,  the 
expectation  that  the  nations  who  exulted  in  the  fall  of 
Jerusalem  would  be  visited  by  a  like  desolation,  etc. 

4.  Mau}^  similarities  of  expression  peculiar  to  the  La- 
mentations and  Jeremiah. 

From  the  vividness  that  characterizes  the  Book  it 
would  seem  that  it  must  have  been  written  soon  after 
the  events  of  which  it  treats. 

VI.  Divisions  and  Contents*—!.  Ch.  1.  In  language 
of  deep  pathos  the  author  describes,  and  gives  expres- 
sion to  his  sorrow  for  the  desolations  and  miseries  of 
Judah  and  Jerusalem  on  account  of  their  sins. 

2.  Ch.  2.  He  emphasizes  the  cause  of  the  country's 
sufferings,  viz.,  Jehovah's  just  anger  that  has  cast  off 
his  j)eoi)le,  his  land,  and  his  sanctuarj^ 

3.  Ch.  3.  He  sets  fortli  his  own  and  tlie  people's  in- 
tense sufferings,  while  at  the  same  time  he  expresses 
hope  and  confidence  in  (4od,  in  (iod's  compassion,  and 
the  purposes  of  grace  wliich  (Uh\  may  hav<'  in  tliis  visi- 
tation. 

4.  Chs.  4,  5.      ZioiTs  })as1  uikI  pi'cscnl  contiasled,  and 


15G  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

the  prayer  of  the  nation  for  Jeliovah's  compassionate 
regard,  and  restoration  to  divine  favor. 


Literature. — Commentaries:    Keil    and    Delitzsch,    Lange, 
Pluinptre,  Cheyne,  Ewald,  Speaker's. 


EZEKIEL. 


I.  Name.—  Yehezkael  =  Ezekiel  =  God  will  strengthen. 

II.  Biography.— Ezekiel  was  the  son  of  Buzi.  He 
was  one  of  the  captives  who  were  carried  with  Jehoia- 
chin  in  597  B.  C.  into  Babylonia,  and  was  settled  with 
others  at  Tell-abib,  by  the  river  Chebar.  He  was  a 
j)riest,  and  as  such  belonged  to  the  aristocracy  of  Jeru- 
salem, who  constituted  the  majority  of  the  first  captivity 
under  Jehoiachin.  He  was  married,  as  mention  is  made 
of  the  death  of  his  wife  in  the  ninth  yesiY  of  the  captivity. 
Ch.  24: 18.  He  had  a  house  of  his  own  on  the  Chebar 
in  the  land  of  his  captivity.  Chs.  3:24;  8:1.  There 
is  no  account  of  his  death. 

III.  Ministry.— Ezekiel  received  his  prophetic  call, 
and  began  his  prophetic  ministry  in  the  fifth  year  of 
Jehoiachin's  captivity,  B.  C.  592.  Ch.  1:5.  He  con- 
tinued to  exercise  his  prophetic  ministry  for  at  least 
twenty-two  years,  the  latest  date  in  his  Book  (29:17) 
being  twenty-two  years  after  his  call,  z.  e.,  B.  C.  570. 
Whether  he  prophesied  for  a  longer  period  is  not  known. 
Ezekiel  probably  began  his  prophetic  ministry  in  the 
thirtieth  year  of  his  age.  Ch.  1:1.  He  exercised  his 
prophetic  ministry  among  the  Jews  who  had  been 
brought  from  Judea,  in  the  captivity  of  Jehoiachin,  by 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  157 

Xebiicliaduezzar,  King  of  Babylon,  and  dispersed  in 
different  i)arts  of  his  dominions.  This  deportation  in 
the  reign  of  Jehoiacliin  was  the  second  deportation  of 
exiles.  A  colony  of  exiles  had  located  near  the  river 
Chebar,  either  a  tributary  of  the  Euphrates,  or  one  of 
the  great  canals  constructed  by  Nebuchadnezzar.  Ezekiel 
was  dwelling  in  the  midst  of  this  colony  of  exiles,  when, 
in  the  fifth  year  of  the  captivity  of  Jehoiachin,  the 
heavens  were  opened  to  him,  and  he  saw  visions  of  God, 
and  the  divine  word  was  communicated  to  him. 

IV.  Authorship— Date.— The  genuineness  of  the  Book 
of  Ezekiel  is  admitted  by  all  critics,  with  scarcely  an 
exception.  The  Book  throughout  is  uniform,  closely 
connected,  while  the  contents  furnish  abundant  evi- 
dences of  the  prophet's  age  and  authorship.  Driver  re- 
marks,— "The  dates  of  the  several  prophecies  are  in 
many  cases  stated  with  precision.  No  critical  question 
arises  in  connection  with  the  authorship  of  the  Book, 
the  whole  from  beginning  to  end  bearing  unmistakably 
the  stamp  of  a  single  mind." 

V.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  prophecies  of  Eze- 
kiel were  delivered  partly  before  and  partly  after  the 
destruction  of  Jerusalem  by  Nebuchadnezzar.  This  fall 
of  Jerusalem  constitutes  their  central  point.  Before 
this  calamity  Ezekiel's  chief  object  was  to  call  to  re- 
pentance those  who  were  living  in  careless  securit}';  to 
warn  them  against  indulging  in  the  false  hope  that,  by 
the  help  of  the  Egyi)tians,  the  Babylonian  yoke  would 
be  shaken  off  (17:  15,  17);  and  to  assure  them  tliat  the 
destruction  of  Jerusalem  was  inevitable  and  rapidly  ap- 
proaching. After  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  Ezekiel's 
chief  object  Avas  to  comfort  the  exiled  Jews  by  promises 
of  future  deliverance  and  restoration  to  their  own  land. 


158  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Betweeu  the  call  to  repentance  in  the  first  part,  and  the 
comfort  given  by  the  promises  in  tlie  last  part,  there  oc- 
cur the  proi^hecies  relative  to  foreign  nations  in  the 
middle  part  of  the  Book.  The  l>()ok  therefore  falls  into 
three  principal  divisions,  viz., 

1.  Chs.  1-24.  The  call  to  repentance,  and  the  ap- 
proaching fall  of  Jerusalem. 

2.  Chs.  25-32.     Prophecies  on  foreign  nations. 

3.  Chs.  33-48.     Israel's  future  restoration. 

The  contents  of  the  Book  may  be  briefly  indicated  as 
follows  : 

1.  Chs.  1-3.  Ezekiel's  call  and  commission  to  be 
Prophet  stated  both  in  literal  and  symbolic  form. 

2.  Chs.  4,  5.  The  impending  destruction  of  Jerus- 
alem portrayed  symbolically ;  and  closing  with  an  ex- 
position, in  unmetaphorical  language,  of  Jerusalem's 
guilt  and  imminent  judgment. 

3.  Ch.  6.  Jerusalem  and  Judali  alike  guilty  of  idol- 
atry that  can  only  be  eradicated  by  the  desolation  and 
depopulation  of  their  territory. 

4.  Ch.  7.  A  final  denunciation  of  the  kingdom,  and 
the  certainty  of  the  coming  disaster. 

5.  Chs.  8-11.  Vision  of  the  guilt  and  punishment  of 
Jerusalem.     Sixth  year  of  the  exile  of  Jehoiachin  =  591 

B.  C. 

6.  Chs.  12-14.  The  certainty  of  the  fall  of  Jerusalem 
further  established.  Its  cause,  the  nation's  sinfulness. 
Only  the  righteous  delivered. 

7.  Chs.  15-17.  Allegories,  showing  from  different 
points  of  view  the  nation's  ripeness  for  judgment,  where- 
in Israel  is  compared  to  a  vine-branch,  to  an  adulteress, 
while  Ch.  17  setting  forth  first  the  result  to  be  expected 
from  Zedekiah's  disloyalty  to  his  Babylonian  masters, 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  150 

doses  with  a  propliecy  of  the  restoration  of  the  Davidie 
kingdom  in  the  future. 

8.  Ch.  18.  The  prophet  empliasizes  the  doctrine  that 
ever}^  one  is  rewarded  according  to  his  own  doings,  as 
against  the  conix^hiint  of  the  people  that  they  were  suf- 
fering for  the  sins  of  their  ancestoi's. 

9.  Ch.  10.  A  lamentation  on  the  "princes,"  /.  e., 
the  Jewish  kings,  and  on  the  fall  of  the  kingdom. 
Two  allegories;  in  the  first  the  Davidic  stock  is  com- 
pared to  a  lioness,  her  two  whelps  being  Jehoahaz  and 
Jehoiachin,  whose  fates  are  described;  and  in  the  second 
it  is  compared  to  a  vine  planted,  now  uprooted,  its  rods 
(Jehoahaz  and  Jehoiachin)  destroyed,  itself  planted  in 
the  wilderness  (=  the  exiles  with  Jehoiachin),  and  fire 
going  out  of  the  branches,  destroying  the  fruit  (=  the 
suicidal  jpolicy  of  Zedekiah). 

10.  Oh.  20.  While  Israel's  idolatry  continues  Jehovah 
will  not  hearken,  but  the  purifying  judgments  must 
come. 

11.  Ch.  21.  Jeliovah's  sword  drawn  against  Jerus- 
alem. 

12.  Ch.  22.  Jerusalem's  guilt,  not  only  idolatrj'  but 
moral  corruption  and  extending  to  all  classes. 

13.  Ch.  23.  Under  an  allegory  similar  to  Ch.  IG  the 
prophet  describes  the  past  history  of  Samaria  and  Jeru- 
salem, representing  the  two  kingdoms  by  two  women, 
harlots,  Oholah  and  Oholibah. 

14.  Ch.  24.  The  date  is  the  ninth  j^ear  of  the  exile, 
B.  C.  588,  the  tenth  day  of  the  tenth  month,  being  the 
da}^  on  which  Jerusalem  was  invested  by  the  Chaldeans, 
2  Ki.  25:1;  Zech.  8:10.  The  chapter  contains  a  par- 
able setting  forth  the  siege  of  Jerusalem,  now  commenc- 
ing,  and  next  the  final  issue  of  the    siege,    viz.,  the 


160  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

forced  evacuation  of  Jerusalem  by  its  inhabitants  on 
account  of  their  sins.  The  chapter  closes  with  an  ac- 
count of  the  sudden  death  of  the  Prophet's  wife,  wliich 
is  made  the  medium  of  a  lesson. 

15.  Chs.  25-32.  Prophecies  on  foreign  nations,  viz.^ 
Amnion,  Moab,  Edom,  the  Philistines,  Tyre,  Sidon,  and 
Egypt. 

16.  Chs.  33-39.  The  restoration  of  the  land  and  peo- 
ple; including  (a)  Ch.  33.  The  prophet.  (6)  Ch.  34. 
The  advent  of  the  Messianic  Kingdom,  (c)  Chs.  35,  36. 
The  land,  (r/)  Ch.  37.  The  people,  (e)  Chs.  38,  30. 
Jehovah's  final  triumph  over  the  world. 

17.  Chs.  40-48.  The  constitution  of  the  restored 
Theocracy;  including  (a)  Chs.  40-43.  The  Temple,  {h) 
Chs.  44-46.  The  Temple  and  the  People,  (c)  Chs. 
47,  48.  The  land  to  be  occupied  by  the  restored  Dias- 
pora.    (Date  twenty-fifth  year  of  the  exile^572  B.  C.) 

VI.  Theology.— Ezekiel  emphasizes  in  particular  the 
glory  and  the  holiness  of  God. 

1.  The  fundamental  doctrine  of  Ezekiel's  theology 
was  the  glory  of  God.  God's  glory  is  the  Old  Testa- 
ment expression  for  the  revealed  Presence  of  God 
among  his  people.  God's  glory  corresponds  to  his  name, 
and  his  name  is  tlie  summary  of  his  nature,  so  far  as 
he  has  revealed  it.  See  1:28;  3  :  23 ;  8:4;  9:3;  10:4, 
18,  19;  43:2-7;  44:4,  etc. 

2.  Jehovah's  name  which  is  the  correlative  of  his 
glory  is  the  basis  and  the  summit  of  everything.  All 
Jehovah's  relations  and  dealings  with  Israel  have  been 
and  are  and  will  be  for  his  name's  sake.  They  are 
designed  to  manifest  his  one  unchangeable  nature.  See 
20:9,  i4,  22;  36:22,  etc. 

3.  Jehovah  is  holy,  and  will  demonstrate  his  holiness. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  161 

ITis  holiness  is  liis  essential  Deity.  It  has  been  pro- 
faned by  his  ])eople.  He  will  sanctify  it  again  in  Israel 
and  aniouii'  tlie  nations.  See  20:  41;  2^:26;  o0:23; 
;)S:  ■>:),  etc. 

VII.  Messianic.     'I'he  Messianic  sections  in  the  IJook 
of  Ezekiel  are  as  follows: 

1.  Ezek.    11:14-21.     .fehovali   tlie   Sanctnary  of  Ilis 
I*eopIe. 

2.  Ezek.  17:22-24.     The  Cedar  Sprout. 

3.  Ezek.  21:  24-27.     The  Riohtfnl  King. 

4.  Ezek.  34:  11-31.     The  Faithful  Shepherd. 

5.  Ezek.  3() :  22-30.     The  Purification. 
().   Ezek.  37:7-14.     The  Resurrection. 

7.  Ezek.  37:21-28.     The  Reunion. 

8.  Ezek.  Chs.  38,  39.     The  Judgment  of  Gog. 

7.   Ezek.  Chs.  40-48.     The  Holy  Land  of  the  Restor- 
ation. 


Liitenxtiire.—  Coi/Dnentdi'ies:  Keil  mid  Delitzsch,  Lange,  Ore  Hi, 
lUt:d(j,  Fdirbairii^  Hengstenherg,  /Speaker's,  Pulpit, 


DANIEL. 

I.  ^iin\e.—I)(i)i(!jf'l=D(uiiel  =  ijod  my  .Indgx'.  The 
Book  takes  its  name  from  its  author,  Daniel,  who  is  its 
chief  historical  charactei-,  and  whose  prophecies  it  con- 
tains. 

II.  Biography— Ministry.— Daniel  was  probably  born 
in  Jerusalem.  He  was  of  nol)le  if  not  of  royal  birth. 
1:3.  He  was  cai-ried  away  captive  from  .lernsalem  to 
Uahxlon,  a1  ihc   lirsl    invasion   of  Judali  by  Xel)ucha(l- 

[11] 


162  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

iiezzar,  in  the  third  year  of  the  reign  of  Jehoiakini.  1:1. 
The  entire  period  of  his  exile,  which  terminated  onl}' 
with  his  life,  was  spent  at  Babylon  and  its  vicinity, 
where  he  continued  to  occupy  various  positions  of  honor, 
and  to  receive  divine  communications.  He  lived  and 
ministered  during  the  reigns  of  Nebuchadnezzar  and  his 
successors,  and  down  to  the  third  3  ear  of  Cyrus.  10: 1. 
The  time  of  his  death  is  uncertain. 

III.  Position.— The  Book  of  Daniel  is  written  partly 
in  Hebrew,  partly  in  Chaldee.  (See  p.  3.)  In  the  He- 
brew Bible  the  Book  is  now  included  in  the  Hagio- 
grapha.  This  however  has  not  always  been  its  posi- 
tion in  the  Hebrew  Bible.  (See  below.)  Its  proper 
place  is  as  in  the  A.  V.,  with  the  Prophets,  after  Eze- 
kiel. 

IV.  Unity.— Eichhorn  and  Bei'thold  ascribed  the  Book 
of  Daniel  to  several  authors.  The  unity  of  the  Book  is 
now  generally  conceded,  i.  e.,  it  proceeded  from  a  single 
author.  That  this  author,  whom  we  take  to  be  Daniel 
himself,  should  in  the  first  part  of  the  Book  speak  of 
himself  in  the  third  person,  and  in  tlie  rest  of  the  Book 
speak  of  himself  in  the  first  person,  is  perfectly  con- 
sistent when  the  nature  of  the  contents  of  the  Book  is 
considered,  for  the  first  part  of  the  Book  is  historical, 
while  the  second  part  is  prophetical. 

V.  Genuineness.— About  A.  D.  300,  Porphyr}',  a 
pagan  philosoi^her  belonging  to  the  school  of  the  Xeo- 
Platonists  devoted  the  whole  of  the  twelfth  book  of  his 
fifteen  against  Christianity,  in  the  attempt  to  show 
that  the  Book  of  Daniel  is  spurious,  and  that  it  was 
written  in  the  time  of  Antiochus  Epiphanes,  B.  C,  175- 
164.  After  that  the  genuineness  of  the  Book  was  not 
seriously  assailed  until  iii   the  seventeenth  century  by 


INTKOPUCTION     OUTIJNKS.  IGlj 

Spinoza,  a  DiitH,  Jew;  in  tlie  eiol.teenth  contnrv  hy 
Anthony  (V)llins,  an  English  Deist;  and  then  followed 
Kiehhorn,  IJleek,  Ewald,  Hitzig  and  others,  too^ther 
Nvilh  some  of  the  eritics  of  the  present  day  in  tlie  same 
line.  While  modern  criticism  does  not  aitoo-ether  reject 
the  Book  of  Daniel  as  spurious,  still  its  authorship  by 
Daniel  is  denied,  wliile  it  is  supposed  to  have  been  com- 
posed under  the  persecution  of  Antiochus  Epiphanes 
B.  C.  US  or  167.  The  grounds  for  this  view  and  an- 
swers (o  the  same  are 

1.   The  position  of  the  Book  in  the  Jewish  C'anon,  not 
among  the  prophets,  but  in  the  Hagiographa,  and  anmn^- 
the   latest  in   the  Hagiographa.     But  this  implies  that 
the  arrangement  of  the  Books  in  the  Hebrew  CVmon  was 
the  same  when  the  Canon  was  originally  formed   in  the 
time  of  Nehemiah,  as  it  is  now.     This  is  denied.     In 
the  time  of  Josephus,   Origen   and  Jerome,   Daniel  was 
classified  among  the  prophets.     It   was  not  till  about 
the  time  of  Jerome  that  the  Rabbles  of  the  school  of 
Tibei'ias  re-arranged  the  Books  of  the  C^anon,  and  re- 
moved Daniel  from  the  prophets,  and  placed  him  in  the 
Hagiographa.     It  is  very  apparent  that  their  anti-Mes- 
sianic  views  led  them  to  do  this.     Besides  if  Daniel  was 
written  in  the  time  of  Antiochus  P:piphanes,  it  could  no 
more  have  been  admitted  in  the  Hagiographa  either  for 
that  division  was  already  closed. 

2.  It  is  objected  that  Jesus,  the  son  of  Sirach  who 
wrote  about  200-180  B.  C,  in  his  enumeration  of  Israel- 
itish  worthies,  is  silent  as  to  Daniel.  ^lYue,  but  he  is 
silent  as  to  others  also,  and  so  the  objection  is  without 
weight.  The  son  of  Sirach  mentions  e.  (j.  Enoch,  3Ioses, 
Joshua,  but  omits  Jephthah,  Gideon,  Samson ;  mentions 
Zerubbabel  and  Nehemiah,   but  omits  Ezra  and  Mor- 


164  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

decai,  etc.  On  the  other  hand,  other  Apocryphal  Books 
confirm  the  fact  that  Daniel  was  the  principal  and  onh^ 
prophet  of  the  time  in  which  he  lived,  and  that  tlie 
Book  which  claims  to  be  written  by  him  and  to  which  they 
refer  is  gennine;  thus,  1  Maccabees,  Book  of  Baruch, 
Song  of  the  Three  Children,  Susanna,  Bel  and  the 
Dragon. 

3.  It  is  alleged  that  there  are  especially  Greek  words 
in  Daniel  that  require  us  to  put  the  composition  of  the 
Book  at  a  late  date.  But  at  the  most  there  are  only 
tw^o  or  three  words  that  can  be  referred  to  a  Greek 
origin,  and  these  words  names  of  musical  instruments. 
But  when  we  remember  what  was  the  inventive  genius 
of  the  Greeks  in  music,  and  what  were  the  extensive 
commercial  relations  of  the  Greek  colonies  more  than 
600  years  B.  C,  it  is  difficult  to  see  why  we  are  com- 
pelled to  put  the  date  of  the  composition  of  Daniel  down 
to   175    B.   C.    because   of   two   or   three  Greek  words 

in  it. 

4.  It  is  alleged  that  there  are  historical  errors  in 
Daniel.  That  this  charge  is  entirely  unfounded  see 
more  fully  Pusey's  Daniel  the  Prophet,  Keil  and  De- 
litzsch  commentary,  Harman's  Introduction,  Sayce's 
Fresh  Light  from  the  Ancient  Monuments,  etc. 

On  the  other  hand  the  historical  reality  of  Daniel  and 
the  genuineness  of  his  Book  receive  confirnmtion  from 

1.  The  testimony  of  the  prophet  Ezekiel,  e.  g.  14:  14, 
20;  28:3.  When  Ezekiel  used  this  language  Daniel 
had  been  in  Babylon  eighteen  years. 

2.  The  testimony  of  Daniel  who  a  number  of  times 
throughout  his  Book  claims  to  be  its  writer. 

3.  The  testimony  of  Christ  to  "  Daniel  the  prophet," 
e.  (J.  Matt.  24:15. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  iC.f) 

4.  The  tostiinony  of  its  admission  into  tlie  Canon. 

5.  The  testimony  of  the  Ai)oei'ypha,  Joseplius  and 
others. 

().  The  huignaiie  of  the  Hook  of  Daniel  exactly  i-ep- 
resents  Daniel's  age  and  position. 

7.  Tlie  exact  historical  knowledge  displayed  in  the 
Book  confirms  the  authorship  by  Daniel. 

8.  Confirmed  by  archaeological  researches. 

YI.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  Book  of  Daniel 
falls  into  two  principal  divisions,  viz., — 

I.  Chs.  1-G.  Hidorical ;  giving  an  account  of  im- 
portant events  at  Babj  Ion  in  the  author's  time. 

II.  Chs.  T-12.  Prophetical  ;  containing  prophecies 
respecting  future  empires,  the  Messiah's  kingdom,  and 
the  resurrection  of  the  dead. 

A  more  detailed  chronological  analysis  is  the  follow- 
ing:— 

1.  Ch.  1.  Introduciory.  Nebuchadnezzar  the  king. 
B.  C.  605. 

2.  Ch.  2.  The  image  dream;  Nebuchadnezzar's  sec- 
ond 3'ear.      B.  C.  G03. 

3.  Ch.  3.  The  fiery  furnace;  Nebuchadnezzar's 
twentieth  year.     About  1>.  C.  580. 

4.  Ch.  4.  Nebuchadnezzar's  mania ;  his  thirtietli  3'ear. 
B.  C.  570. 

5.  Ch.  5.  Fall  of  ]>abylon.  I>.  C.  538.  Belshazzar 
regent. 

(1.  Ch.  (;.  The  T. ion's  den.  J)arius  the  Mede.  B.C. 
538. 

7.  Ch.  7.  The  four  wild  beasts.  B.  C.  555.  Bel- 
shazzar regent. 

8.  Ch.  8.  A'ision  of  the  ram  and  he-goat.  B.  C.  553. 
Belshazzar  regent. 


166  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

0.  C'h.  1).  The  seventy  weeks.  15.  C.  538.  Darins 
the  ]\[ede. 

10.  Clis.  10-12.  Final  vision— the  a])oealypse.  1>.  C. 
534.     Cyrus  King-. 

VII.  Theology.— The  doctrines  of  the  Book  of  Daniel 
are  closely  connected  with  the  writings  of  the  exile,  and 
form  a  last  step  in  the  development  of  the  ideas  of  Mes- 
siah. Especiall}'  emphasized  are  the  doctrines  of  the 
Messiah,  of  angels,  of  the  resurrection  of  the  dead,  and 
the  judgment  of  the  world. 

VIII.  Messianic— The  special  Messianic  sections  of 
the  Book  of  Daniel  are 

1.  Dan.  2:31-45  and  7:  2-27.  The  Kingdom  of  the 
Son  of  Man. 

2.  Dan.  9:24-27  and  12:1-13.  The  Seventy  Weeks 
— Tlie  Last  Times. 


loiter ature.— Commentaries :   Pusey,     Keil    and    DeUtzscJi, 
Lange,  OreUi,  Speaker's,  PuJpit. 


HOSEA 


I.  ISame.— iJas7/f^//((  =:lIosea  =  Salvation.  The  Book 
is  so  called  from  the  name  of  its  author. 

II.  Biography.— Hosea  floui'ished  in  the  Pre- Assyrian 
period,  and  belonged  to  the  Kingdom  of  Israel.  His 
time  is  about  790-724  B.  C.  A  long  life  of  activity  of 
about  sixty  years  extending  from  the  latter  part  of  the 
reign  of  Jeroboam  II.  into  the  earliei-  part  of  the  reign 
of  Hezekiah.  He  was  the  son  of  Beeri,  and  probably  a 
native  of  the  Kingdom  of  Israel,  in  which    kingdom  he 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  167 

exercised  his  prophetical  office.     Nothin*^  further  is  ac- 
curately known  as  to  his  personal,  unofficial  liistory. 

III.  Miuistry.— Ilosea's  ministry  was  exercised  in  and 
for  the  benetit  of  the  Kingdom  of  Israel,  or  simply 
Ephraim  as  he  frequently  calls  the  Northern  Kingdom, 
a  rebuking  designation.  According  to  1 :  1  ITosea's  pro- 
phetical activity  was  of  long  duration,  one  of  the  long- 
est:— he  saw  Jeroboam's  kingdom  still  in  its  greatness, 
saw  the  rapid  and  anarchical  changes  of  dynasty  that 
followed  in  the  Northern  Kingdom,  saw  four  successive 
reigns  in  the  Soutliern  Kingdom,  and  saw  the  beginning 
of  the  Assj'rian  Period.  Delivered  orall}',  Hosea's 
prophecies  were  probabl^^  committed  b}^  him  to  writing 
near  the  close  of  his  prophetical  career,  about  725  B.  C. 
Judali  is  mentioned  to  be  censured  with  Israel,  and  again 
in  contrast  to  Israel  as  the  house  Jehovah  would  bless 
and  deliver. 

IV.  Chronology.— The  prophets  contemporary  with 
Hosea  were  ^Vmos  and  Isaiah.  Contemporar}^  Kings  of 
Judah  were  l^zziah,  Jotham,  Ahaz,  llezekiah.  Con- 
temporary kings  of  Israel  from  Jeroboam  II.  to  subjec- 
tion of  Ilosliea  b}^  bhalmaneser,  see  Table  of  Kings  p. 
70,   71. 

V.  Composition.— Hosea  is  generally  conceded  to  be 
the  author  of  the  Book  bearing  his  name.  The  Book  is 
composed  of  the  essential  contents  of  discourses  de- 
livered by  the  Prophet  at  various  times.  It  is  however 
impossible  to  indicate  the  precise  limits  of  each  of  these 
individual  discourses,  or  to  give  them  any  exact  chrono- 
logical order.  This  however  argues  for  the  unity  of  the 
Book  as  written  and  transmitted,  a  unity  further  con- 
firmed ])y  the  orderly  advance,  according  to  plan,  from 
wrath  and  tlircatening  to  mercy  and   promises;  by   the 


168  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

clearl}'  defined  strophical  arrangement  of  the  Book ;  and 
by  "  The  Word  of  the  Lord  *'  in  the  superscription  unit- 
ing the  whole. 

Hosea's  style  is  concise,  abrupt,  poetical,  powerful  in 
imagery.  There  are  peculiar  idioms  and  unusual  con- 
structions. The  symbolical  narrative,  (hs.  1-3,  is  prose, 
the  rest  poetico-ihythmical.  The  general  character  of 
the  prophecy  is  censure  but  terminating  with  promises 
of  ^Messianic  import. 

A  number  of  coincidences  between  the  prophecies  of 
Ilosea  and  the  Pentateuch  show  an  acquaintance  with 
the  latter.  Hosea  also  refers  a  number  of  times  to  the 
prophecies  of  Amos.  A  closer  resemblance  exists  be- 
tween Ilosea  and  the  greater  prophets  than  between  the 
greater  pro[)hets  and  any  other  of  the   minor  prophets. 

VI.  Historical. —The  history  of  the  times  of  Ilosea  is 
similar  to  that  of  Hosea's  elder  contemporary  Amos. 
Only  in  Hosea  the  corrupt  condition  of  the  Northern 
Kingdom  is  increased  and  aggravated  to  the  extreme. 
After  the  reign  of  Jeroboam  II.,  when  Ilosea  began  to 
prophesy,  the  succession  of  kings,  six  in  number,  was 
for  the  most  part  a  succession  of  royal  murders,  and 
anarchy  in  the  State.  Ungodly  alliances  with  heathen 
nations  were  made,  the  rival  factions  in  Israel  invoking 
or  buying  the  support  alternatel}'  of  Assjria  and  Egypt. 
Thus,  after  an  interregnum  of  eleven  years  Jeroboam  II. 
was  succeeded  by  his  son  Zechariah,  who,  after  a 
reign  of  six  months,  was  murdered  by  Shallum.  Shal- 
lum  after  a  month's  reign  was  overthrown  and  assassin- 
ated b3^  ]\Ienahem  who  sought  to  strengthen  himself  l)y 
bujdng  the  support  of  the  Assyrian  monarch  Tighitli 
Pileser.     2  Ki.    15:17-22;  Hos.   8:0.     About  the 


same 


time  another  faction  was  seeking  aid  from  Egyi)t.   Mena- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  IGO 

hem  was  succeeded  by  his  sou  Pekahiah,  who  was  mur- 
dered by  his  successor  Pekah,  formerly  eut>aged  witli 
Reziu,  Kiiii>-  of  Damascus,  iu  atta(*kiui»'  the  Davidic 
dynasty  in  Jerusalem.  Isa.  Cli.  7.  Pekah  was  deposed 
and  murdered  by  his  successor  Iloshea,  the  Assyrian 
kini>-  Tiglath  PiU^ser  conspirin«>-  with  him  in  this.  After- 
wards Hoshea  broke  with  the  Assyrian  power,  and 
opened  treasonable  negotiations  with  So,  kin"' of  Egypt, 
-I  Ki.  17:4,  wilh  tiie  result  that  Shalinanesei',  Tiglath 
Pileser's  successor,  laid  siege  to  Sanmria,  which  after 
holding  out  for  three  years,  capitulated  to  Sargon,  who 
transi)orted  large  numbers  of  Israelites  to  different  parts 
of  Assyria,  thus  bringing  the  Northern  Kingdom  of 
Israel  to  an  end.  In  matters  of  religion  as  in  nmtters 
of  state,  corruption  pi-evailed : — ingratitude,  violence, 
idolatry,  immorality.  Jehovah  had  been  forsaken  for 
I>aal;  devotion  was  given  to  sensuous  Canaanitish  cults; 
the  worldliness  of  the  priests,  and  the  sensuality  of 
the  leaders  intensified  the  public  and  gross  moral  cor- 
ruption; confidence  was  placed  in  enemies  instead  of 
(TO(i;'the  claims  of  law  and  religion  were  set  at  nought; 
schisms,  homicides,  fornications,  perjury,  theft,  bribery, 
impiet}'  fill  up  the  dark  catalogue  of  Israel's  sins,  the 
swift  and  bloody  forerunners  of  Israel's  imixMiding  de- 
struction. 

VII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— According  to  its  sub- 
ject-nmtt(M-  the  IJook  has  a  tiireefold  division. 

I.  Clis.  l-)).      The  Indictment. 

II.  C1is.  4-i:;.      41ie  Argument. 

III.  Ch.  14.     The  Petition. 

In  the  Indict  incut,  (hs.  1-;),  Isi'acl  is  arraigned  for 
unfaithfulness  to  .Icho\ah,  which  unfaithfulness  is  sym- 
bolicall\'    I'epresented.     Thus   (a)   Chs,  1:2 — 2:1.     The 


170  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

prophet  is  directed  to  take  to  himself  an  unchaste  wife, 
Gomer,  thus  to  represent  the  unfaithfuhiess  of  Israel  to 
Jehovah.  The  three  children  borne  b}^  the  prophet's 
unchaste  wife  are  given  symbolical  names: — Jezreel  = 
God  will  scalier,  that  is,  in  view  of  the  vengeance  to  be 
exacted  of  the  house  of  Jehu  on  the  spot  where  formerly 
Jehu  had  slain  the  house  of  Ahab.  2  Ki.  Chs.  10,  11. 
Lo  Ru]iania]i=  Not  mercy,  that  is,  unfaithful  Israel 
should  be  left  without  mercy  or  pardon.  Lo  Amml  = 
Not  my  people,  that  is,  Jehovah  had  rejected  them.  The 
rejection  how^ever  is  not  final  for  a  promise  follows  set- 
ting forth  the  union  again  of  Judah  and  Israel,  and  the 
restoration  to  the  divine  favor,  {h)  C\\.  2:2-23  The 
prophet's  interpretation  of  his  symbolical  narrative  in 
1:2-2:1.  Israel's  coming  punishment  and  its  cause, 
%yiz.,  ingratitude  and  idolatry;  this  punishment  being 
also  a  means  of  reformation  resulting  in  the  restoration 
of  Israel  to  her  Divine  Husband,  when  Jezreel,  repre- 
senting Israel,  shall  verify  the  full  meaning  of  the  name, 
and  they  shall  become  planted  of  God  again  in  the 
earth,  for  they  shall  obtain  mercy  and  become  his  peo- 
ple, (c)  Ch.  3.  As  in  Ch.  1  Hosea  again  represents  the 
part  of  Jehovah  toward  his  people.  His  love  for  and 
conduct  towards  an  adulterous  wife,  are,  he  declares, 
symbols  of  Jehovah's  love  for  the  unfaithful  Israelites, 
and  the  means  used  by  Jehovah  to  bring  them  back  to 
godliness,  viz.,  the  withholding  from  them,  for  a  time, 
civil  and  religious  institutions. 

In  Clis.  4-13,  the  Argument,  sets  forth  Israel's  guilt 
and  punishment.  Thus  (a)  Chs.  4-7.  Israel's  flagrant 
moral  corruption  augmented  by  the  worldliness  and 
sensuality  of  the  nation's  priests  and  leaders,  resulting 
in  a  national  decline  that  can  only  end  in  a  national 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  171 

fall,  (h)  Ch.  8.  AnnouiRHMnonl  of  jud lament  about  to 
be  executed  on  the  Xortliei'ii  Kingdom,  together  with  its 
cause,  idolatry  and  schism ;  a  judgment  tliat  has  indeed 
already  commenced  to  be  executed,  and  tliat  Israel  has 
brought  upon  itself  by  its  heatlienish  alliances  and  I'e- 
ligious  abuses,  (c)  C'hs.  0:1 — 11:11.  A  more  minute 
description  of  the  coming  judgment,  viz.,  disaster,  ruin, 
exile;  with  an  intimation  of  its  cause,  r/,c.,  national  in- 
gratitude and  sin,  with  a  closing  refei-ence  as  to  the  pos- 
sibility of  restoration.  ((/)  Chs.  11:12 — lo:lG.  Again 
Israel's  sin,  and  how  they  had  witb.stood  tlie  influence 
of  ancestral  example,  of  the  effoits  and  entreaties  of 
Jehovah,  and  therefore  judgment  must  be  executed. 

In  Ch.  14,  the  Petition,  there  is  a  closing  appeal  to 
repent,  whereupon  Jehovah  would  come  to  them  again 
in  rich  blessings. 

VIII.  Theology.— The  fundamental  and  uppermost 
doctrine  in  Hosea's  theology  is  Jehovah's  love; — the 
mighty  and  indesti'uctible  love  of  Jehovah  for  Israel, 
which  will  not  be  satisiied  until  it  has  brought  all  Israel 
into  hai'mony  with  itself.  (4od's  love  for  his  people  is 
the  prominent  thought,  and  God's  loving  kindness  the 
})rominent  expression  Ilosea  uses  to  set  forth  the  natural 
alliliidc  of  Jeho\ah  to  his  i)e()ple,  and  man's  natural 
attitude  to  his  fellow-man,  as  the  reflection  of  that  love. 
Ilo.sea  emphasizes  also  a  deep,  spiritujd  rei)entance,  a 
radical  change  of  heart,  as  the  condition  of  restoration. 
And  while  Hosca  like  Amos  describes  the  future  as  a 
time  of  restored  prosperity  and  fertility,  he  especially 
emphasizes  that  the  chief  blessedness  of  that  time  will 
consist  in  thepei'fect  fellowship  of  love  and  life  between 
God  and  his  people. 


172  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

IX.  Messianic— The  Messianic  element  in  Hosea  is 
mainly  connected  with  the  promised  restoration  of  Israel 
in  the  last  times,  and  after  a  long  period  of  exile,  and 
as  set  forth  chiefly  in  the  first  three  chapters.  Briefly 
this  Messianic  element  embraces: — 1.  The  restoration  of 
the  Northern  Kingdom  of  Israel  after  a  long  period  of 
exile.  2.  The  reunion  of  Israel  and  Judah  into  one 
nationality.  3.  The  submission  and  obedience  of  this 
reunited  people  to  David  their  King,  which  finally  can 
refer  only  to  the  Messiah.  4.  The  natural  world  is  to 
share  in  the  promised  blessing  of  that  period.  5.  All 
this  is  to  take  place  in  "the  latter  days,"  i.  e.,  the  Mes- 
sianic or  closing  portion  of  the  Messianic  period. 


Liiterature*  — Commentaries  :    Keil    and   Delitzsch,     Pusey, 
Lange,  Orelli,  S2:)eaker's,  Pulpit,  Eioald. 


JOEL. 


I.  Name.—  Yo'el  =  Joel  =  Jehovah  is  (4od .  The  Book 
is  so  called  from  the  name  of  its  author. 

II,— Biography.— Joel  flourished  in  the  Pre- Assyrian 
period,  and  belonged  to  the  Kingdom  of  Judah.  His 
time  limits  are  B.  C.  890-84(1.  Probably  flourished  be- 
tween B.  C.  800-850,  or  in  the  earlier  part  of  the  reign 
of  Joash.  lie  was  the  son  of  Pethuel,  and  lived  in 
Judah.  Nothing  furtlier  is  known  of  his  personal  un- 
official history. 

III.  Ministry.— Joel  ministej-ed  in  Judah.  Tliere  is 
no  allusion  to  Israel.     Probably  resided  and   ministered 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  Ho 

ill  Jenisalein.  There  is  a  presumption  that  he  was  a 
priest,  lie  exercised  i^reat  ])()wer  in  the  nation,  lie 
not  only  exhorts  but  ini])eratively  deniaiuls  repentance 
on  the  part  of  the  nation,  aiul  witli  tlie  evident  assur- 
ance that  lie  will  be  obeyed. 

IV.  Contemporaries.— King- of  Judah,  Joash.  K'uv^s 
of  Israel,  Jehu  and  Jehoahaz.  High  Priest,  Jehoida. 
Prophets,  Jonah  and  Amos.  Philistines  and  Phcenicians 
are  referred  to  as  enemies  dealing  in  Jewish  slaves. 
Kdoniites,  from  the  same  stock,  also  enemies,  inde- 
pendent, subdued  later.  Sabeans  of  Arabia  Felix. 
Greeks  of  Asia  Minor.     No  reference  to  Assyria. 

Y.  Composition,— Authorship,   Date,   etc.     It  is  gen- 
erally jidmitted   that  Joel  is  the  author   of    the    Book 
bearing  his  name.     The  unity  of  the  Book  is  attested  in 
all  its  parts  and  contents,  in  subject-matter,  style,  etc. 
A  question  has  arisen  in  respect  to  the  date  of  the  com- 
position of  the  Book.     It  must  be   placed   either  very 
early  or  very  late.     In  support  of  the  earlier  date,  /.  e., 
about  B.  C.  860-850,  there  are  these  arguments.     1.  The 
position  of  Joel  in  the  series  of  the  Minor  Prophets  raises 
a  presumption  in  favor  of  this  early  date.     2.  There  is 
no  mention  of  Syria,  Assyria  and  Babylon  among  the 
enemiesof  Judah,  a  fact  which  points  to  a  time  when  these 
nations  had  not  yet  come  into  conflict  with  Judah.     On 
the  other  hand  Amos  threatens  the  Syrians  with  punish- 
ment, and  foresees  that  Israel  will  fall  a  prey  to  Assyria, 
so  that  Joel  antedates  Amos.     3.  The  times  and  condi- 
tion of  affairs  described  in  Joel  precisely  suit  this  earlier 
date  and  the  reign  of  Joash,   while  they  do   not  at  all 
apply  to  the  later  date;  thus,   e.   ry.,    the  influence    ot 
the  priests,   the  regularity  of  the  temple  services,  tl 
spiritual  nature  of  religion,  the  absence  of  any  denun 


le 


174  INTRODUCTION     OUTl.INES. 

elation  of  i)aiiiculfir  sins,  etc.  4.  Tlie  earlier  date 
agrees  with  the  references  to  foreign  nations,  the  latter 
does  not.  o.  ^Vnios  makes  nse  of  Joel.  That  Joel  and 
not  Amos  is  the  original  is  evident  from  tlie  fact  that 
the  passages  in  qnestion  are  tirndy  embedded  in  the  eon- 
text  of  Joel,  and  belong  to  his  eirele  of  ideas,  whereas 
they  are  not  in  Amos.  Compare  Jo.  o :  Ki  with  Am.  1:2; 
Jo.  2 :  12  with  Am.  4 :  (5,  etc.  6.  The  argument  from 
style  favors  the  early  ratlier  than  the  late  date. 

VI.  Historical.— The  historical  occasion  of  the  Book 
of  Joel  was  a  terrible  visitation  of  Judah  by  locusts  and 
drought.  This  visitation  wasnotprophetico-allegorical, 
but  present  and  actual.  Joel  describes  the  destruction 
effected,  views  it  as  the  beginning  of  a  great  judgment 
day  of  Jehovah,  calls  upon  the  priests  to  appoint  a  day 
for  national  humiliation  and  prayer.  This  was  evidently 
done,  and  by  divine  authority,  as  he  promises  the  peo- 
ple richest  blessings  for  the  present  and  future,  and 
complete  deliverance  from  all  their  enemies. 

VII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  Book  has  a  tw^o- 
fold  division : — 

I.  Chs.  1:1—2:  17.     Plagues. 

II.  Chs.  2 :  19—3 :  21.     Promises. 

The  two  parts  are  joined  together  b^^  the  historical 
statement  in  2: 18. 

1.  Plagues.  The  plagues  are  a  divine  judgment.  The 
plague  of  locusts  and  drought.  This  chapter  is  not  a 
prediction.  The  narrative  of  the  locusts  is  not  an  alle- 
gory, or  a  fignrative  description  of  the  hosts  of  war.  It 
is  the  historical  record  of  that  which  actually  took  place. 
1 : 4  does  not  describe  different  insects,  but  all  locusts 
appearing  in  different  and  successive  portions  of  a  sea- 
son or  year.     Hence  the  severity  of  the  judgment,  ex- 


INTROOUrTTON     OUTTJNES.  175 

tending  over  an  entire  year.  The  description  of  tlie 
locusts  is  accurate  as  well  as  graphic,  'i'hose  atlflictiHl 
b}'  the  plague  are  called  upon  to  mourn  the  desolation 
of  the  land.  The  worst  feature  of  the  plague  is  the 
necessit}^  for  suspending  the  daily  sacrifices.  Therefore 
the  priests  required  to  mourn  and  the  people  to  join 
them,  (b)  Ch.  2:  1-1?.  The  plague  a  token  of  a  coming- 
judgment  daj^  of  Jehovah.  The  locusts  Jehovah's  armj^ 
doing  his  will.  Threatened  judgment  may  be  averted 
by  repentance.     Hence  humiliation  and  prayer. 

2.  Promises.  (a)  For  the  present  (2:18-27),  God 
will  deliver  hispeoi^le;  evil  repaired;  new  blessings.  {h\ 
For  the  future  (2:19 — 3:21),  promises  of  greater 
things.  The  day  of  the  Lord  coming  with  salvation  to 
Israel,  terror  to  Israel's  foes.  This  day  introduced  by 
the  outpouring  of  God's  spirit.  Signs  in  heaven  and 
earth.  Safety  in  Zion.  Nations  found  gnilty  and  pun- 
ished. Gathering  in  the  Valley  of  Jehoshaphat.  Na- 
tions destroyed.  Israel's  eternal  salvation  and  blessed- 
ness. 

VIII.  Theology.— The  doctrines  emphasized  by  Joel 
are 

1.  Jehovah's  judgeship  over  the  whole  earth. 

2.  Repentance  and  obedience  avert  punishment. 

3.  The  blessedness  of  the  redeemed. 

IX.  Messianic— General  in  character.  The  Messianic 
salvation  is  bound  up  in  the  existence  of  the  Kingdom 
of  Judah.  The  Messiah  is  not  defined  as  of  any  distinct 
human  x^ersonality,  but  Jehovah  is  specified  as  the  au- 
thor of  salvation.  The  promise  of  the  outpouring  of 
God's  spirit  finds  its  essential  fulfilment  in  the  Christian 
Church  only,  especially  in  the  first  establishment  of  it, 
though  at  first  the  promise  related  to  Judah.     It  is  indi- 


no  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

cated  that  members  of  otlier  Jiations  shall  also  partake 
in  the  Messiaiiie  promise. 


Literature. — Co)nine)i furies:     Keil    (ind    DcUtzsch,     Lunge, 
Pusey.  OrelU. 


AMOS. 

I.  Name.— ^4 /?«o.s  =  Burden.  The  J>ook  is  so  called 
from  its  author. 

II.  Biography. —xlmos  lived  in  the  Pre-Assj-rian 
period.  He  was  a  native  of  the  Kingdom  of  Judah,  but 
ministered  in  the  Kingdom  of  Israel.  His  time  is  B.  C. 
810-782.  Latter  part  of  this  period  marks  the  time 
Amos  prophesied;  i.  e.,  latter  part  of  Jeroboam's  and 
early  part  of  Uzziah's  reign,  these  kings  being  contem- 
poraries about  twenty-seven  years.  See  table  p.  70,  71. 
Amos  was  a  native  of  Judah,  and  of  the  town  of  Tekoa, 
twelves  miles  south  of  Jerusalem. 

III.  Ministry.— The  prophetic  ministry  of  Amos  was 
in  and  to  the  Kingdom  of  Lsrael.  ^)nl\'  the  passages 
2:4,  5  and  6:1  directly  concern  Judah  and  Jerusalem. 
The  execution  of  his  mission  was  in  liothel  whose  priests 
hegreath'  offended  by  his  prophetic  utterances;  so  much 
so  that  Amaziah  the  priest  sent  word  to  King  Jeroboam 
that  Amos  was  conspiring  against  him,  al  the  same  time 
exhorting  Amos  to  flee  into  Judea  and  proi)hesy.  The 
prophecies  of  .Vmos  delivei'ed  oral^V  were  probably  com- 
mitted to  writing  after  his  return  to  the  Kingdom  of 
Judah. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  177 

IV.  Contemporaries.— King  of  Jiulali,  Tzziah,  and 
of  Isiael,  Jeroboam  II.  See  Table  p.  70,  Tl.  Prophets 
Joel  and  .Jonah.  High  Priest  at  Bethel,  Amaziah.  Snr- 
lonnding  nations  introduced  are  Damascus,  Philistia, 
T^'re,  Edoin,  Annnon,   Moab. 

V.  Composition. -Amos  is  generally  conceded  to  be 
the  author  of  the  Book  bearing  his  name,  and  the  unity 
of  the  Book  is  likewise  generally  admitted.  All  this  is 
evident  not  alone  from  the  superscription,  but  from  quo- 
tations made  from  the  Book,  the  relation  and  interde- 
pendence of  parts,  historical  unity  and  continuity,  sub- 
ject, style,  etc.  Though  not  by  profession  or  descent  a 
prophet,  but  a  shepherd,  still  Amos  like  the  shepherd 
David  was  not  uncultured.  His  writings  show  marked 
literary  finish  and  force.  His  shepherd  life  was  of  great 
suggestiveness  to  him  in  the  language  and  imagery  em- 
ployed. He  is  remarkably  ordei-ly  in  his  literary  con- 
structiveness  and  development;  e.  ^.,  the  seven  sur- 
rounding peoples  taken  up  in  turn,  and  the  series  of 
predictions,  each  constructed  after  the  same  pattern, 
setting  forth  their  sins  and  doom.  So  following  this  the 
three  successive  chapters  :5,  4,  5,  each  beginning  with 
"  Hear  this  word."  And  so  the  series  of  symbolic  visions 
in  the  last  three  chapters.  The  symbolism  or  imageiy 
of  Amos  is  extensixe  and  varied,  lie  makes  large  use 
of  the  Pentateuch.  On  llie  other  hand  extensixe  use 
was  made  of  Aiuos  by  the  pi-ophets  following,  especially 
Ilosea  and  Jeremiah. 

VI.  Historical.-  'Die  historical  occasion  of  the  pi-o- 
pheey  ol"  Amos  was  tiie  low  moral  and  religions  status 
of  the  limes,  as  observable  and  notorious  not  only  in 
the  surrounding  nations  but  especially  in  the  Xoi-thern 
Kiniidom  of  Israel.      Idolatry,  injustice,  oppression,  cor- 

[12  i 


178  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

raptioii,  iiuchastit}',  formalism  call  forth  rebukes,  ad- 
monitions, and  threatenings  of  divine  punishment  and 
overthrow.  Tlie  terrors  of  impending  judgment  close 
with  tlie  announcement  of  the  final  exaltation  of  the 
Theocracy. 

VII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  Boolv  of  Amos 
consists  of  two  principal  parts,  riz.^ — 

1.  Chs.  1-0.  Prophetical  disconrses  of  a  threatening 
character. 

2.  Chs.  7-9.  Visions  and  symbols  followed  by  their 
interpretation,  and  other  prophetical  annonncements. 

Part  first,  Chs.  1-6,  coiitain  (a)  1:1  Preliminary  his- 
torical statement,  (h)  Threatening  discourses  against 
the  surrounding  nations,  riz.,  Syrians  of  Damascus 
(1:2-5);  the  chief  cities  of  the  Philistines  (1:6-8); 
Tyre  (1:0,  10);  Edom  and  its  chief  cities  (1:11,  12); 
the  Ammonites  (l:lo-lo);  Moab  (2:1-3).  These  na- 
tions are  charged  witli  cruelty  against  the  Israelites,  and 
their  destruction  is  threatened,  (c)  A  charge  of  diso- 
bedience and  idolatry  against  Judah  and  the  judgment 
therefor,  (r/)  The  statement  concerning  Judah  forms  a 
transition  to  the  principal  prophecies  that  follow  on  to 
6:  14  all  directed  against  Israel  (excepting  perhaps  the 
single  allusion  to  the  careless  in  Zion  in  6:1).  These 
discourses  of  Amos  against  Israel  are  directed  against 
their  moral  and  religions  crimes  such  as  idolatry,  un- 
chasity,  worldliness,  the  oppression  of  the  poor  by  the 
rich,  corruption  in  the  administration  of  jnstice,  and 
formalism  in  the  service  of  Jehovah.  He  follows  these 
censnres  with  warnings  to  turn  to  Jehovah,  and  with 
threatenings  of  divine  punibliment,  overthrow,  depor- 
tation, captivity  in  a  land  beyond  Damascus. 

Part  second,  Chs.  7-9,  contain  ((/)  7: 1-9.    Vision  rep- 


INTKODUCTIOX     Ol'TUNES.  170 

resoiitiiiii'  the  oNcrtln-ow  of  Israel  and  of  the  house  of 
Jeroboam.  Locusts,  fire  and  a  phnubline  tlie  fii^ures 
eniplo3'eil  to  represent  this  overthrow.  (h)  7:10-17. 
Hostility  of  Ania/iah  to  Amos;  Amos  warns  Amaziali, 
and  announces  Israel's  eaptivity.  {c)  8:1-3.  Vision 
of  a  basket  of  fruit  showing-  Israel  to  be  ripe  for  de- 
struction. ((])  8:4-1-1:.  The  punishment  of  those  who 
oppressed  tlie  poor,  cari-ied  on  a  shauK'ful  trade,  .uave 
thetnselves  to  idolatry,  and  upon  whom  Jehovah  would 
bi'inu- atHiction.  moui'nin_i>-,  hun^ci-  and  Ihirst.  (r)  9:1- 
l(t.  \'isi()n  of  the  Lord  stand inii'  on  the  altar.  He  ordei's 
a  desli'uction  fiom  which  tliere  is  no  e.sca[)e.  Jehovah 
will  blot  out  the  sinfid  kingdom,  sinners  shall  perish, 
the  house  of  Israel  shall  be  dispersed  amonL>'  the  nations 
but  the  house  of  Jacob  shall  not  alto_i>ether  be  destroyed. 
(/)  0:11-15.  CMosiuiJ'  promise  tliat  Jehovah  will  rein- 
state the  fallen  tabernacle  of  David;  Israel  shall  [)os.sess 
the  remnant  of  Edom,  and  the  nations  called  by  Jelio- 
vah\s  name;  the  land  shall  be  abundanth'  blest;  the 
scattered  ones  of  the  people  restored;  the  overthrown 
cities  I'ebuilt;  the  Tlieocracy  re-established. 

A^III.  Tlieolog-y.  The  fundamental  doctrine  in  the 
theoloiiy  of  Amos  is  the  sovei'eii^'nty  of  Jeiiovah  in  natui-e 
and  in  histoi-y.  His  conce|)tion  of  (iod  is  i'emarkal)le 
for  its  i)ui'e,  ethical  monotheism.  As  to  man  he  is  a  sin- 
ner, whose  sins  are  otfensi  veto  God  to  whom  he  must  turn 
forsaking  hissins.  An  intimate,  wM)rkini>',  sj)ii'itual  union 
must  be  estal)lished,  and  in  which  alone  is  to  be  found 
blessedness.  The  prophet's  views  of  religion  are  marked 
by  a  deep  spirituality.  The  alternative  of  not  seeking 
Bethel,  Gilgal  or  Beersheba  is  not  the  seeking  of  Jerusa- 
lem   but    th(.'    seekinii'    of    Jehovah,    and   so  li\-e.      The 


180  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

alternative  of  idolatrous  service  is  not  ceremonial  service, 
but  the  service  of  heart  and  life. 

IX.  Messianic— The  Messianic  element  in  the  Book 
of  Amos  is  composed  of  the  promise  that  forms  the  con- 
clusion to  the  Book,  viz.,  in  9:  11-15,  which  sets  forth 

1.  vv.  11,  12.  The  Restoration  of  the  Davidic  King- 
dom. 

(a)  v.  11.     Its  divine  up-building. 
{b)  V.  12.     Its  divine  out-building. 

2.  v.  13.  The  Restoration  of  the  cursed  but  chosen 
land. 

(a)  V.  13'.     Constant  productivit}'. 
(h)  V.  13\     Abundant  productivity. 

3.  vv.  14,  15.     The  Restoration  of  the  Diaspora. 
(a)  V.  14.     Re-colonization. 

(6)  V.  15.     Immoveable  Possession. 


Literature.  —  Commentaries  :    Keil  and  Delitzsch,  Lange, 
Pusey,  Orelli. 


OBADIAH 


I.  Name.  — 06«f///a/^  =  Obadiah=  Servant  of  Jeho- 
vah.   The  Book  is  so  called  from  the  name  of  its  author. 

H.  Biography  and  Ministry.— Obadiah  who  flour- 
ished in  the  Pre-x4ssyrian  period  belonged  to  the  King- 
dom of  Judah.  He  lived  and  prophesied  during  the 
reign  of  King  Jehoram,  B.  C.  890-850.  Of  the  prophet 
hiniself  nothing  further  is  positively  known. 

HI.  Composition.— Obadiah  is  generally  admitted  to 
be  the  author  of  the  Book  bearing  his  name  : — the  small- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  181 

est  of  the  prophetic  Books.  Question  lias  arisen  how- 
ever in  regard  to  the  date  of  the  composition  inasmuch 
as  it  seems  to  be  necessary  to  place  Obadiah  as  the 
earliest  of  the  prophets,  or  assign  his  prophecy  a  date 
about  the  time  of  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  by 
Nebuchadnezzar.  The  weight  of  argument  is  in  favor 
of  the  early  date,  and  for  the  following  reasons  : — 

1.  The  comparison  of  Obadiah's  prophecy  with  Jer. 
49  :  7-22,  also  against  Edom.  Examining  these  two  pro- 
phecies it  is  evident  that  one  has  copied  or  quoted  the 
other.  If  Jeremiah  is  regarded  as  the  original  then  we 
have  the  anomaly  of  a  prophet  appearing  with  a  single 
chapter  of  matter,  called  a  vision,  principally  borrowed 
from  a  great  prophet  living  just  before  him.  Certainly 
that  makes  Obadiah's  prophetic  status  somewhat  ques- 
tionable. On  the  other  hand,  if  Obadiah  is  the  original, 
there  is  nothing  strange  in  Jeremiah's  borrowing  from 
him  in  his  own  great  prophetic  Book,  just  as  he  has  bor. 
rowed  from  Isaiah.  Moreover  the  prophec}^  in  Obadiah 
is  a  well-arranged  whole,  whereas  in  Jeremiah  the  same 
matter  is  broken  up  and  given  in  a  less  forcible  and 
obvious  order.  For  the  above  reason  it  is  also  highly 
improbable  that  both  Jeremiah  and  Obadiah  are  bor- 
rowing from  a  still  older  prophet. 

2.  The  capture  of  Jerusalem  to  which  Obadiah  refers 
cannot  be  that  made  by  Nebuchadnezzar,  for  he  carried 
away  the  people  of  Jerusalem  to  Babylon.  The  language 
of  Obadiah  refers  to  a  very  different  captivity,  see  ver.  20. 
This  undoubtedly  refers  to  the  capture  of  the  city  in  the 
reign  of  Jehoram,  about  B.  C.  887,  when  the  Philistines 
and  the  Arabians  made  an  irruption  into  Judah  and 
Jerusalem,  and  took  captives,  and  carried  off  valuable 
property  (2  Chron.  21 :  16,  17).     To  this  Joel  also  seems 


182  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

to  refer  (3:4-6).  He  represents  the  child) en  of  Judah 
and  Jerusalem  as  sold  to  the  Grecians.  The  captivity 
of  Jerusalem  in  Sepharad  (Obad.  20) — a  district  in  or 
about  Asia  Minor — seems  to  be  that  of  a  part  of  the  peo- 
ple carried  away  at  that  time.  It  therefore  seems  best 
to  refer  the  plunderini^;  of  Jerusalem,  to  which  reference 
is  made  in  Obadiah,  to  the  reign  of  Jehoram,  and  the 
prophecy  to  the  time  immediateh'  subsequent,  about 
B.  C.  880. 

3.  This  earl}^  date  for  Obadiah  agrees  with  the  allu- 
sions to  his  prophecy  in  Joel,  and  with  tlie  references  to 
Edom  in  Amos.  Joel  was  evidently  familiar  with  the 
words  or  wi'itings  of  Obadiah,  e.  (j.  compare  Joel  2:32 
with  Obad.  IT;  Joel  3:3  with  Obad.  11;  Joel  3:7,  8, 
with  Obad,  15;  Joel  3:  1?  with  Obad.   11,  17,  etc. 

IV.  Historical. -The  histoi'ical  occasion  of  the  pro- 
piiecy  of  Obadiah  was  some  recent  capture  of  Jerusalem, 
in  which  the  Edomites  had  been  guilty  of  the  grossest 
insult  and  injury  to  Judah.  It  does  not  appear  that 
they  were  themselves  the  principal  assailants,  but  they 
had  shown  a  most  unbrotherly  spirit  by  their  nuilignant 
delight  at  Judairs  calamity,  by  sharing  in  the  i)lunder 
of  the  city,  by  intercepting  the  fugitives,  and  slaught- 
ering them  or  surrendering  them  to  be  sold  as  slaves. 

V.  Divisions  and  Contents.— 1.  vv.  1-10.  The  na- 
tions are  summoned  by  Jehovah's  messengers  to  make 
war  upon  Edom.  He  has  detei'niined  to  humble  Edom's 
pride.  Edom  will  be  plundered  by  enemies,  deserted  by 
allies,  and  its  counsellors  and  heroes  overthrown  ;  all  be- 
cause of  Edom's  inhuman  treatment  of  his  brother  Jacob. 

2.  vv.  ]  1-1-4.  For  in  the  day  of  Judah's  humiliation 
and  calamity,  Edom  maliciously  exulted,  and  shared  in 
the  plunder. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  183 

3.  vv.  15-21.  But  Jehovairs  day  of  ,jii(l.ij:inont  for  all 
the  nations  is  at  hand,  and  Edoni  will  not  escape  a  just 
retribution.  A  remnant  will  remain  in  Jerusalem;  Je- 
rusalem will  no  more  be  defiled  l)\'  inv^aders;  Judah  and 
Israel  will  possess  Edom  and  Philistia;  Jehovah's  King- 
dom will  be  forever  established. 

VI.  Theoloj*-.v— Messianic— Obadiairs  theology  em- 
phasizes 

1.   Jehovah's  (MUMuies  shall  be  defeated. 

'2.   Jehovah's  people  shall  prevail. 

'A.  Jehovah's  Kingdom  shall  be  established. 

The  Messianic  thought  is  contained  in  the  closing 
words  of  the  prophecy  which  set  forth  the  final  I'esult  to 
which  all  Israel's  history  pointed,  riz.,  the  K'nuidom 
slidJI  he  Jp](oraJi\s. 


JLiteratlire. — Commentaries:    Keil     and    Delitzaeh,     Pusey, 
Lange.  Orelli. 


JONAH. 

I.  Name.— Fo//(//i  =  Jonah  :=  A  Dove.  I'he  Book  is 
so  called  from  the  name  of  its  author. 

II.  Biography.— Jonah,  who  flourished  in  the  Pre- 
Assyrian  period,  belonged  to  the  Kingdom  of  Israel. 
He  lived  and  ministered  during  the  reign  of  Jeroboam 
II.  He  was  the  son  of  Amittai,  and  was  born  about 
B.  C.  859.  lie  was  a  native  of  Gath-IIepher,  a  town  of 
Lower  Galilee  in  Zebulon.    The  only  incident  of  Jonah's 


184  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

life  recorded  outside  of  this  Book,  and   its  New  Testa- 
ment reference  is  mentioned  in  2  Ki.  14:25. 

III.  MiDistry.— Jonah's  prophetic  ministi-y  covered 
quite  a  long'  period,  probably  not  less  than  825-790 
1>.  C.  His  visit  to  Nineveh  was  only  a  single  event  in 
his  official  career.  He  doubtless  lived  a  life  of  faithful 
prophetical  activity  in  the  ungodly  and  idolatrous  king- 
dom of  the  Ten  Tribes.  This  certainly  seems  to  be 
implied  by  the  (rau'  =  und^  with  which  the  Book  begins, 
as  if  other  calls  and  ministrations  had  preceded  this  one. 
A  single  allusion  to  his  ministry  in  the  Kingdom  of  Israel 
is  that  in  2  Ki.  14:  25  where  he  foretold  to  Jeroboam  H. 
the  success  of  his  wars  for  the  restoration  of  the 
boundaries  of  Israel  upon  which  Hazael,  King  of  Syria, 
had  encroached.  He  is  sent  on  a  mission  unique  in  the 
history  of  the  ancient  economy,  r/>. ,  to  preach  judg- 
ment and  repentance  to  the  Gentile  Ninevites,  Not 
from  fear,  but  from  exclusiveness  (4:  2)  he  attempted  to 
fiee  to  the  commercial  port  of  Tarsus  in  C'elicia.  Ar- 
rested by  a  miracle  he  returned,  obeyed,  preached. 
The  failure  of  his  prophecy  on  Nineveh  was  only 
apparent  while  it  was  reall}"  a  signal  success.  The 
royal  edict  calls  the  Ninevites  to  repentance,  while 
discontented  Jonaii  is  rebuked. 

IV.  Contemporaries.— King  of  Israel,  Jeroboam  II. 
Kings  of  Judah,  Amaziah  and  Uzziah.  Prophets,  Joel 
and  Amos. 

V.  Composition.— Not  only  is  Jonah  historical,  but 
the  Book  that  bears  his  name  is  also  historical.  It  is 
not  fiction,  allegory,  myth  or  legend,  but  an  account  of 
that  which  actuall}'  took  place,  genuine  history,  of  deep 
prophetico-symbolic  and  typical  significance.  Ancient 
Jews  and  Christians  regarded  the  Book  as  i-eal   history. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  185 

The  Book  of  Tobit  SO  regards  it  (14:4,  8).  In  makinj^- 
Joiiali  and  his  history  a  type  of  his  own  resurrection, 
Christ  affixes  the  seal  of  his  authority  to  the  Book. 
Still  while  the  Book  records  an  actual  history,  it  is  not 
solely  or  chiefly  history.  The  compilers  of  the  Canon 
considered  the  Book  a  prophetical  one.  'J'he  historical 
omissions  are  too  great  for  the  Book  to  be  simj)ly  a  pure 
history.  The  J^ook  is  prophetical,  and  oidy  those  his- 
torical events  are  fuinished  which  are  required  as  the 
basis  of  the  prophetical  teaching.  Moreover  the  unity 
of  the  Book  is  actually  and  externally  indivisible.  Tlie 
word  ''second"  in  3 :  1  connects  both  halves  in  the 
most  intimate  manner.  While  Jonah  is  not  distinctly 
declared  to  be  the  author  of  the  Book,  still  that  is  in  all 
probability  the  fact.  He  probably  wrote  the  I>o()k 
shortly  after  his  return  from  Nineveli.  Ilis  i)rayer  of 
thanksgiving  in  Ch.  2,  uttered  from  the  bowels  of  the 
fish,  and  reproduced  essentially,  though  not  perhaps 
literalh ,  afterward,  follows  the  Psalms  in  stiucture  and 
is  filled  with  reminiscences  of  passages  from  the  Psalms. 
That  Jonah  should  be  the  author  of  the  Book  and  still 
speak  of  himself  in  the  third  person  is  in  strict  accoid- 
ance  with  the  manner  of  the  other  prophets  who  also 
speak  of  themselves  in  the  third  person  except  when 
they  speak  of  God's  revelations  to  them.  The  so-called 
Aramaisms  of  the  Book  are  all  genuine  Hebrew  words 
or  forms  except  the  one  Aramaic  name  for  the  decree  of 
the  King  of  Xineveh  which  Jonah  naturally  heard  in 
Nineveh  itself.  The  abbieviated  form  of  the  relative  pio- 
noun  Ishl  or  sh  for  (islier)  in  1:7  by  no  means  indicates 
an  exilic  or  post-exilic  date,  as  this  abbreviated  form  of 
the  relative  is  found  not  only  in  The  Song  of  Songs,  and 
in  Deborah's  Song  (Judge  o:?),  but  is  also  found  on  a 


186  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

beautifully  preserved  weight,  recently  discovered  on  the 
site  of  Samaria,  which  hears  an  inscription  in  characters 
pointing  to  the  8th  century  B.  C,  and  where  preciseh' 
this  same  form,  shI,  of  the  relative  occurs. 

VI.  Historical.— The  narrative  of  the  Book  indicates 
history.  Not  all  the  details  but  the  principal  facts  in 
this  history  are  given.  The  immediate  occasion  of  this 
history  of  Jonah's  mission  to  Nineveh  was  the  great 
wickedness  of  Nineveh,  and  the  just  judgment  of  God 
to  be  visited  therefor,  or  repentance  shown  through  the 
preaching  of  Jonah.  Its  historical  scope,  however,  em- 
braces the  entire  heathen  world,  and  the  true  attitude 
of  Israel,  of  the  people  of  (4od  in  all  times,  to  the  world. 

VII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  Book  contains 
two  principal  divisions,  united  by  the  historical  state- 
ment in  )5 :  1,  viz., 

1.  Chs.  1,  2.     The  :Man. 

2.  Chs.  o,  4.     The  Mission. 

In  the  contents  we  have  1.  Ch.  1.  The  Prophet 
Jonah  receives  divine  orders  to  proceed  to  Nineveh,  and 
declare  judgment  against  it  for  its  great  wickedness. 
Foreseeing,  according  to  4:  2,  a  possible  repentance  on 
the  part  of  the  Ninevites,  and  a  consequent  sparing 
and  blessing  on  the  part  of  God,  and  selfishly  consider- 
ing God's  spiritual  blessings  to  be  exclusively  for  the 
benetit  of  Israel,  Jonah  attempts  to  evade  the  divine 
command  b}^  fleeing  to  Tarshish.  A  storm  rises,  the 
heathen  crew  pra}',  and  sleeping  Jonah  is  awakened. 
The  crew  regard  the  storm  as  a  sign  of  divine  wrath, 
and  cast  lots  to  detect  the  guilty  person.  The  lot  falls 
upon  Jonah,  who  confesses,  and,  upon  his  own  advice, 
is  cast  into  the  sea.  2.  Ch.  2.  A  large  fish  sw^allows 
Jonah,  but  he  is  preserved  in  life  and  thanks  God.     On 


INTRODUCTION     OUTLINES.  187 

the  third  day  he  is  vomited  out  on  the  land.  3.  Ch.  3. 
Tile  divine  eoniniand  eonies  ai>ain  to  Jonaii,  wlio  obeys, 
and  in  Xineveli  proclaims  its  destruction  foi'  its  sins. 
Headed  by  the  Kin<>-,  tiie  Xinevites  observe  a  public 
fast,  whereupon  Jehovah  determines  to  withdraw  ins 
threatening.  4.  Ch.  4.  Jonali,  seliish  of  the  divine 
blessings,  and  feeling  that  tiie  effect  of  the  divine  pur- 
pose to  remit  the  calamity  wM)uld  put  him  in  a  false 
light,  is  displeased.  His  displeasui'e  is  increased  by  the 
incident  of  tlie  i)lant  tliat  shot  up,  shaded  him,  and 
then  was  destroyed  in  tiu^  night,  'i'lie  next  day's  heat 
angers  liim.  lie  pities  tlic  plant — Jehovah  pities  tlie 
city. 

VIII.  Theolog-y.— Tlic  leaching  of  Jonali  is  manifest, 
r/x., 

1.   Sin  incurs  the  divine  judgment. 
'I.    Repentance  secures  tiie  divine  remission, 
o.    (4od"s  s|)iritual  blessings  are  for  tlie  world. 
4.   'rhe_\-   wlio    iiav<'   must    give  tliose   Ijlessings  oi-  be 
punislied. 

IX.  Messiauic.  — Tlie  iJook  of  Jonali  is  a  symbolical 
one  after  the  analogy  of  Isa.  Ch.  ■'),  and  Kzek.  Ch.  10. 
The  IJook  is  t>  i)ical  especially  in  Ch.  'i  whei-e  Jonali  is 
a  type  of  Chi-ist  according  to  Mat.  rl:  4().  'I'he  Hook  is 
proi)hetical  and  symbolical.  Jonah  repi-esents  Isi-ael. 
Nineveh  represents  the  heathen  woi'ld  as  afterwards  did 
Babylon  and  P^dom.  Israel  has  the  mission  of  preach- 
ing God's  Woi'tl  to  the  heathen  woi'ld.  He  seeks  to  flee 
from  his  calling,  (rod  I'eproves  and  punishes  Israel, 
because  he  in  whom  all  the  lamili<'s  of  the  earth  were 
to  be  blessed  had  neglected  his  vocation.  Israel  is 
restored  and  recominissione'd  to  preach  that  the  heathen 
world  shall  perish.      Israel  doubts,  delays,  despairs  and 


188  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

therefore  God  corrects  Israel.  But  as  the  sparing  of 
Niiieveli  came  before  the  correction  of  Jonah,  so  the  type 
as  to  the  future  is  that  the  multitude  of  the  heathen 
world  shall  be  gathered  in  before  the  Jewish  people  who 
must  first  be  humbled  and  broken.  In  the  fulfilment 
of  his  mission  Jonah  is  a  type  of  Israel,  and  Israel  a 
type  of  Christ.  Mat.  12:  40.  As  the  sparing  of  Jonah 
and  his  preaching  of  repentance  vv'as  a  sign  to  the  Nin- 
evites  which  must  bring  them  to  faith  or  judgment,  so 
the  preservation  of  Christ  in  the  grave,  and  the  preach- 
ing of  the  Risen  One  were  a  sign  to  the  world  of  judg- 
ment and  of  faith. 


Ltitersiture, —  Commeyitaries:    Keil    and    Delitzsch,     Lange, 
Pfifiey.  Orelli,  Fairbairii,  Wright,  Peroivne,  Kalisch. 


MICAH. 

I.  Name.-Jfeeca/i=Micah  =  Who  is  like  Jehovah  ? 
The  Book  is  so  called  from  the  name  of  its  author. 

II.  Biography.— Micah  who  belonged  to  the  King- 
dom of  Judah,  lived  in  the  Assyrian  period.  His  date  is 
about  758-710  B.  C.  He  was  a  younger  contemporary 
of  Isaiah  and  Hosea.  In  1:1  he  is  called  ' '  the  Morash- 
tite,"  /.  e.,  he  was  a  native  of  Moresheth,  a  dependency  of 
Gath,  in  the  maritime  plain,  about  twenty  miles  south- 
west of  Jerusalem.  Like  Amos,  Micah  was  a  country- 
man, a  "  man  of  the  people,"  born  of  obscure  parentage, 
his  father's  name  not  being  mentioned.  As  in  the  case 
of  many  of  the  other  prophets  little  is  known  of  the  eir- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  189 

ciimslances  of  Micjih's  life  other  than   as  indicated  in 
liis  prophecy. 

III.  Ministry.  -According  to  the  superscription  1:1, 
Micali  prophesied  under  the  reigns  of  Jotham,  Ahaz  and 
Hezekiah,  kings  of  Judah  Micah's  time  limits  would 
therefore  be  about  B.  C.  756-697,  /'.  e.,  a  period  of  fifty- 
nine  years.  The  minimum  limit  of  his  ministry  would 
be  sixteen  years,  i.  e.,  from  the  death  of  Jotham  to  the 
accession  of  Hezekiali.  But  the  prophecy  itself  fur- 
nishes a  more  accurate  estimate  of  the  duration  of 
Micah's  prophetic  ministry  inasmuch  as  1:6  was 
evidently  uttered  prior  to  the  fall  of  Samaria  which  took 
place  in  B.  C.  722,  while  according  to  the  notice  in 
Jeremiah  26:  17  sg.,  Micah  3: 12  was  spoken  during  the 
reign  of  Hezekiah.  Micah's  prophetic  message  was 
directed  both  to  Israel  and  Judah,  but  for  the  most 
part  to  his  country  Judah.  While  Isaiah  the  statesman- 
prophet  at  the  capital  rebuked  the  courses  and  foretold 
the  destinies  of  nations,  kings  and  nobilities,  at  the 
same  time  emphasizing  in  an  unrivaled  manner  the 
great  truths  of  religion  and  uttering  glorious  promises, — 
Micah  on  the  other  hand  spoke  as  a  man  of  the  people, 
in  sympathy  with  the  common  people  in  their  sufferings, 
attacking  the  wrong  like  Isaiah,  but  otherwise  less 
interested  in  matters  of  state,  foreign  policies,  etc.  His 
ministry  therefore  was  more  exclusively  that  of  an 
ethical  and  religious  teacher.  At  the  same  time  Micah 
had  a  powerful  influence  at  the  capital,  and  gave 
weightiest  evidence  of  his  prophetic  ministry  as  a 
religious  teacher  inasmuch  as  he  was  largely  instru- 
mental, according  to  Jer.  26:17  sq.,  compared  with 
Mic.  3:  12,  in  effecting  the  reformation  under  Hezekiah. 

IV.  Contemporaries. — Kings    of    Judah, — Jotham, 


190  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Ahaz  and  Ilezekiah.  Kings  of  Isi'ael,  —  l^ekali  and  Ho- 
shea.  Proplu'ts,  Isaiali  and  Ilosea.  Assyria  referred 
to  as  an  invading,  eonqnering  and  deporting  foe. 

V.  Authorship. -Micali  is  generally  conceded  to  be 
the  author  of  the  Book  bearing  his  name.  The  cliief 
opposition  to  this  view  is  raised  by  a  few  who  attribute 
Chs.  6,  7  to  an  anonymous  autlior.  l>ut  from  their  con- 
tents these  cliapters  not  only  may  liave  been  written 
under  the  reigns  of  Ahaz  or  Manasseh,  but  in  every 
respect  the  most  suitable  time  for  their  production  is 
the  reign  of  Ahaz,  rather  than  the  reign  of  Manasseh, 
when  true  prophets  were  silenced,  or  any  subsequent 
time.  More  recent  criticism  assigns  the  passage  7:7-20 
to  the  Exile,  so  that  according  to  this  view  there  is  a 
gap  of  a  century  between  7:0  and  7:7.  lUit  there  is  no 
difficulty  whatsoever  in  this  passage  pi'ccluding  it  from 
being  tiie  work  of  a  prophet  who  might  know  and  fore- 
tell that  the  exile  must  happen.  Besides,  a  prophecy 
can  hardly  be  conceived  of  as  ending  so  abruptly  as 
would  be  the  case  at  7  :<). 

VI.  Historical.— The  sins  of  .ludfdi  and  Israel  consti- 
tuted the  historical  occasion  of  Micah's  [)rophecy.  Tliese 
sins  W'ere  against  the  fundamental  laws  of  social  moral- 
ity, transgressions  of  tlie  elementary  i)rinciples  of  justice 
and  mercy.  The  very  foundations  of  society  were  being- 
upheaved  and  overtlirown.  It  is  es[)ecially  the  social 
sins  of  his  time  that  Micali  attacks  with  passionate  en- 
ergy. The  accumulation  of  vast  estates  by  wealthy 
nobles;  the  unscru[)ulously  [)owerful  defrauding  the 
honest  poor  and  dispossessing  him  of  his  ancestral  land 
and  home;  governors  and  judges  fleecing  the  people 
whom  they  were  sworn  to  protect;  exacting  creditois 
tearing  the  garment  from  a  man's  shoulders;    exorbi- 


INTRODUCTION     OUTLINES.  191 

tant  taxation  ami  private  extortions;  the  dictates  of 
natural  piety  iiiiiored  and  the  most  sacred  relations  of 
life  viohited;  strong-  fortifications  and  statel}^  palaces 
constructed  of  human  lives  and  cemented  with  human 
blood ;  everywhere  appalling  social  selfishness,  corrup- 
tion, fierceness.  These  are  the  sins  that  Micah  de- 
nounces, and  upon  them,  the  people,  for  the  commission 
of  these  sins  he  denounces  the  judgments  of  God, — 
humiliation,  overthrow,  anguish,  exile,  dispersion.  Bui 
Micah  also  preaches  promise;  and  be3^ond  this  blackness 
of  darkness  dawns  the  sure  hope  of  restoration,  reunion, 
and  glorification. 

VII.— Divisions  and  Contents.  — Tpon  the  basis  of  its 
subject  matter  the  Book  of  ]\licah  is  best  divided  into 
three  parts,  as  follows: — 

I.  Chs.  1,  2.  Reproof  doniinant  but  closing  with 
promise. 

II.  Chs.  3-5.  Pi'oinise  dominant  but  closing  with  re- 
proof. 

III.  Chs.  6,  7.  The  legal  controversy  and  conclu- 
sion : — will  it  be  reproof  or  promise  'i 

I.   Chs.  1,  2.     Reproof  and  promise;  including 

1.  Ch.  1.  Jehovah  the  Judge.  (<:0  1  :  1 .  Supersci-ij)- 
tion.  (6)  1  :  2-5.  Jehovah  the  Judge  of  Israel  is  about 
to  appear,  (r)  1  :  (>,  T.  Samaria  will  be  destroyed,  (f/) 
1:8,0.  The  catastrophe  will  i-each  Jerusalem.  (p) 
1:10-10.  'Various  towns  of  the  Lowland,  whei-e  the 
prophet's  own  home  is,  will  be  overwhelmed. 

2.  Ch.  2.  Judcih's  woe  and  Jehovah's  i)romise.  (f/) 
2:1-5.  The  violent  deeds  of  Judalfs  nol)les  demand 
punishment.  (6)  2:(i,  7.  They  would  silence  true  i)r()- 
phets   and   listen   to  false  ones,     (r)  2:8-11.     As  they 


192  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

eject  the  poor  SO  shall  they  tlioniselves  be  exiled,  (d) 
2  :  12,  13.  The  exiled  and  dispersed  flock  of  Israel  will 
one  da}^  be  reassembled,  and  i>()  forth  from  captivity  in 
a  second  exodus,  led  by  their  Kiniz:  ^vith  Jeliovah  at  his 
side,  to  restoration.  Compare  Ex.  13:21;  Psa.  110:5; 
Isa.  52:12. 

II.  Chs.  3-5.     Promise  and  reproof;  including? 

1.  Ch.  3.  The  censure  of  rulers,  (a)  3:1-1P.  Judges, 
prophets  and  priests  dishonor  their  office,  (b)  3:11''. 
Their  false  reliance  upon  Jehovah,  (c)  3:12.  Their 
ungodliness  the  cause  of  Jerusalem's  impending  ruin. 

2.  Ch.  4.  The  center  of  salvation  and  the  humilia- 
tion to  Zion.  (rt)  4: 1-5.  But  in  the  ending  of  the  days 
Jerusalem  will  be  the  center  of  instruction,  obedience 
and  peace,  {b)  4:6-8.  The  dispersed  will  be  reassem- 
bled, the  eternal  reign  of  Jehovah  inaugurated,  and  the 
Davidic  Kingdom  restored.  (c)  4:9,10  Zion's  im- 
mediate future  is  humiliation  and  exile.  ((/)  4:11-13. 
Zion's  ultimate  future  will  be  victory  over  the  nations. 

3.  Ch.  5.  Exaltation  from  Bethlehem,  (a)  5:1.  Israel 
and  her  ruler  must  be  reduced  to  extremity  and  insult. 
(b)  5:2-0.  But  from  l>ethlehem  shall  come  forth  a 
Ruler  of  David's  house  to  rule  over  a  reunited  people, 
and  repel  the  Ass^^rian  invader,  (c)  5:7.  Israel  will 
be  a  source  of  blessing  to  some.  ((/)  5:8,  1).  Israel 
will  be  a  source  of  destruction  to  others.  (e)  5: 10-15. 
Israel  will  be  purified  and  vengeance  executed  on  the 
disobedient. 

III.  Chs.  r>,  7.  Controversy  and  conclusion.  The 
representation  is  that  of  a  legal  suit  between  Jehovah 
and  his  people  Israel.  Jehovah  is  plaintiff,  Israel  is  de- 
fendant. 

1.   Chs.    0:1 — 7:13.     The    controversy.      {<i)  r,  :1,2. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  193 

Kxoi'diiiin.  {l>)  Vt:o-5.  Jehoxah  slates  liis  case,  (c) 
0:  6,  7.  The  people  admits  its  sin,  and  asks  how  Jeho- 
vah can  be  propitiated.  ((/)  (3 :  8.  'I'he  prophet  answers. 
(e)  6:  9-10.  Jehovah  speaks  denouncini>- tlie  wickedness, 
and  threatening  punishment.  ( /)  T  :  l-d.  Tlie  pro- 
phet speaks  in  tlie  name  of  the  true- Israel  lamenting  the 
corruption.  {(/)  T:'^-10.  They  will  bear  the  punish- 
ment contident  that  .lehoNah  will  vindicate  his  righteous- 
ness, (h)  7:11-1:5.  In  answer  is  heard  the  divine  pi'oc- 
lamation   of  Zion's  restoration. 

2.  Ch.  7:  14-20.  The  conclusion.  {(/);:U-i:.  The 
prophet  prays  for  this  restoration  of  Zion,  and  Jeho- 
vah promises  to  effect  it.  (?>)  7:18-20.  The  prophet 
concludes  b}-  expressing  a  perfect  trust  in  Jehovah's 
]^ardoning  mere}'  and  unchanging  faithfulness. 

VIII.  Theology.— The  theological  doctrines  of  Micali 
are  similar  to  those  of  Isaiah.  In  the  main  they  set 
forth 

1.  The  regeneration  of  Israel  through  judgment. 

2.  The  establishment  of  Jehovah's  Kingdom  under 
the  ideal  King  of  David's  line. 

0.  The  evangelization  of  the  nations  through  that 
Davidico-Messianic  Kingdom. 

In  regard  to  man  Micah  emphasizes 

1.  Man  must  follow  justice  toward  his  neighbor. 

2.  He  must  also  show  mere}',  and  not  only  show  it, 
but  love  mercy. 

3.  Man  must  walk  humbly  with  his  God;  live  such  a 
life  of  fellowship  with  God  as  implies  an  identity  of 
will  and  purpose. 

IX.  Messianic— Israel  is  to  be  scattered  in  judgment, 
but  it  will  be  restored  again  in  mere}- .  The  ideal  of  the 
Theocracy   will   be   realized.     Jehovah    shall    reign    in 

[13] 


194  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Zioii  forever.  A  Prince  of  the  house  of  David  will  rule 
over  a  reunited  Israel.  He  is  to  spring  from  Bethlehem. 
The  Kingdom  of  God  will  be  established  in  peace  and 
righteousness.  This  Messianic  production  in  Micah  is 
in  the  main  threefold,  and  for  the  most  part  contained 
in  Chs.  4 : 1 — 5  :  5*,  as  follows : 

1.  Ch.  4:1-7.     The  linal   Messianic  period.     Comp. 
Isa.  2 :  2-4. 

2.  Ch.   4:8-13.       The    Davidico-Zionitic    dominion. 
Comj).  Am.   9:9-15. 

3.  Ch.  5 : 1-5*.     The  Ruler  from  Bethlehem.     Comp. 
Isa.  9:0;  Zech.  9:9. 


Literature. — Commentaries:    Keil    and   Delitzsch,     Pusey, 
Lange,  Orelli,  Cheyne. 


NAHUM. 

I.  ^ame.—Nahoorn  =  Nahum  =  Consolation.       The 
Book  derives  its  name  from  its  author. 

II.  Biog-rapliy.— Xahum  flourished  during  the  As- 
syrian j)eriod  and  in  the  Kingdom  of  Judah.  He  was 
a  native  of  Elkosh,  probably  a  town  in  Galilee.  He 
probably  belonged  to  the  Northern  Kingdom  of  Israel, 
and,  upon  the  invasion  and  deportation  of  the  Ten 
Tribes,  escaped  into  the  territory  of  Judah  taking  up 
his  residence  in  or  near  Jerusalem.  Nahum  flourished 
and  prophesied  between  B.  C.  065-607. 

III.  Ministry.— Nahum's  prophetic  ministrj"  was  car- 
ried on   in  the  Kingdom  of  Judah,  and  in  the  second 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  105 

half  of  Hezekiah's  reign.  It  was  a  It  or  the  capture  of 
No-amon  (Thebes,  in  Upper  Kgypt)  by  Asshurbanipal. 
And  it  preceded  the  (lest  met  ion  of  Xineveli  by  the  liaby- 
lonians  and  Medes.  Tlie  subject  or  burden  of  Xaiiunrs 
propliecy  was  the  fall  and  destruction  of  the  Assyrian 
capital  Nineveh.  Wliil<^  llie  ])r()plie('y  of  Jonah  a.^ainsl 
Nineveh  was  follow (m1  ))y  the  remission  of  (iod's  ,judi>- 
nients,  the  prophecy  of  Nahuni  aiiriinsl  Nincvcli  was 
followed  by  the  execution  of  (iod's  judmnents. 

lY.  Contemporaries.— Kiui"'  of  Judah,  llezekiah. 
Prophets,  Isaiah  and  ^licah.  iVssyrians  who  had  anni- 
hilated the  Kin.i>doni  of  Israel,  and  humiliated  the  King- 
dom of  Judah.     Egyptians. 

V.  Composition.— Nfdiuni  is  generally  admitted  to 
have  been  the  author  of  the  Book  bearing  his  name. 
The  genuineness  of  the  Book  has  never  been  called  into 
question.  There  is  a  peculiarity  in  the  superscription 
in  that  it  makes  the  announcement  of  the  subject  pre- 
cede the  announcement  of  the  author.  There  is  how- 
ever nothing  inconsistent  in  this,  liesides,  the  prophet 
uses  several  Avords  and  forms  of  words  that  are  almost 
peculiar  to  himself.  He  uses  several  words  that  occur 
elsewhere  only  in  .loh.  He  uses  a  striking  expression 
also  in  2 :  10  that  only  occurs  besides  in  Joel  2  :  G,  while 
the  first  clause  of  1:15  is  nearly  word  for  word  the  same 
as  that  of  Isa.  52:  7.  Nahum  occupies  one  of  the  high- 
est places  in  Hebrew  literature,  while  he  more  nearly 
approaches  Isaiah  than  any  of  the  other  Prophets.  He 
possesses  a  peculiai'  power  of  representing  several  i)hases 
of  an  idea  in  the  briefest  sentences,  as  in  liis  descrip 
tion  of  God,  of  the  conquest  of  Nineveh,  and  the 
capture  of  Thebes. 

As  to  the  date  of  the  composition,  it  must  have  been 


196  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

according  to  3:  8-11  after  the  capture  of  Thebes  by  As- 
shurbanipal  which  took  place  shortly  after  B.  C.  664; 
and  on  the  other  hand,  as  Nineveh  is  represented  as 
still  standing,  it  must  have  been  before  the  destruction 
of  that  city  by  the  Babylonians  and  Medes  in  B.  C.  607. 

VI.  Historical.— The  historical  occasion  of  Nahum's 
prophecy  was  the  approaching  fall  of  Nineveh.  On  ac- 
count of  its  great  wickedness  and  corruption  Nahuni 
predicts  the  fall  of  the  Assyrian  capital.  This  took  place 
not  long  thereafter  when  a  coalition  of  Necho,  King  of 
Egypt,  Cyaxares,  King  of  Media,  Nabopolassar,  King 
of  Babylon,  was  formed  against  Assyria,  and  the  Medes 
and  Babylonians,  after  defeating  the  Assyrian  forces, 
laid  siege  to  Nineveh  which  after  two  years  capitulated. 

VII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— 1.  Ch.  1.  The  ap- 
pearance of  Jehovah  in  judgment;  his  faithfulness 
toward  those  who  are  faithful  to  him ;  the  description  of 
the  coming  fall  and  irretrievable  destruction  of  the  As- 
syrian capital. 

2.  Ch.  2.  Description  of  the  assault  upon  Nineveh, 
the  entrance  effected,  the  scenes  of  carnage  and  tumult 
that  follow,  the  flight  of  the  inhabitants,  and  the  sub- 
sequent deserted  and  silent  condition  of  the  city. 

3.  Ch.  3.  Nineveh's  cruelty,  avarice,  insidious  policy, 
corruption,  the  cause  of  her  own  ruin.  Jehovah  is 
against  her ;  overthrow  awaits  her ;  and  amid  the  rejoic- 
ings of  those  who  have  suffered  by  her,  her  empire  shall 
forever  pass  away. 

VIII.  Tlieology.— The  theological  teaching  of  Nahum 
emphasizes 

1.  God's  moral  government  of  the  w^orld. 

2.  The  certain  destruction  of  this  world's  kingdoms 
built  on  the  foundation  of  force  and  falsehood. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  197 

3.  The  certain  triumph  of  the  Kingdom  of  God   up- 
built on  the  foundation  of  truth  and  riii^hteousness. 


liiteratiire.  —  Commentarieti  :    Keil    and   Delitzficit,    Lange, 
Pusey,  OrelJi. 


HABAKKUK. 

I.  Name.— iJ(r/??aA-A-ooA'  =  Habakkuk  ^  Embraced.  The 
Book  is  so  called  from  the  name  of  its  author. 

II.  Biography  and  Ministry.— Ilabakkuk  belonged 
to  the  Kingdom  of  Judah.  lie  flourished  and  i3rophe- 
sied  during  the  reign  of  Jehoiakim,  and  towards  the  be- 
ginning of  the  Chaldean  suf)remacy,  /.  e.  B.  C.  608-590. 
Nothing  is  known,  outside  of  apocraphal  sources,  of  the 
personal  history  of  this  prophet,  and  his  prophecy  gives 
us  no  information  respecting  himself.  The  subject  of 
his  prophec}'  is  tlie  overthrow  of  Judah  by  the  Chal- 
deans, and  then,  in  turn,  the  overthrow  of  the  Chaldean 
monarchy, — each  power  for  its  sins. 

III.  Composition.— Some  modern  critics  maintain  that 
Chs.  1 : 1-2 :  8  is  the  only  part  of  the  Book  which  is  to 
be  assigned  to  Ilabakkuk ;  that  2  :  9-20  is  an  addition  of 
post-exilic  times;  and  Ch.  3  a  praj^er  of  the  post-exilic 
congregation  in  time  of  distress,  possibly  w  ritten  by  the 
author  of  2  :  9-20,  or  taken  from  some  Psalm-collection 
used  in  the  Temple.  But  against  this  j)osition,  the  unity 
of  the  Book,  and  its  authorship  by  the  prophet  Ilabak- 
kuk, are  both  generalh'  admitted,  on  account  of  the 
close  relation  between  the  several  parts,  the  progress  of 
the  thought  throughout,  and  the  organic  connection  of 


198  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

the  whole.  As  to  tlie  date  of  the  eoiupositioii  of  the 
prophec}',  the  balance  of  probability  favors  a  date  shortl}^ 
before  the  defeat  of  Pharaoh-Necho  at  Carcheinish, 
B.  C.  GOo,  bj^  which  defeat  the  supreinacj'  of  the  dial- 
deans  was  assured. 

IV.  Historical.  -The  historical  occasion  of  Habak- 
kiik's  prophecy  was  the  rise  of  the  Chaldean  power,  and 
its  emploj- ment  b}^  Jehovah  as  an  instrument  to  inflict 
deserved  chastisement  upon  ungodly  Judah.  When 
the  reformer-king,  Josiah,  fell  in  the  fatal  battle  of 
Megiddo,  the  hopes  of  Judah  perished.  Passing  over 
his  eldest  son  Jehoiakim,  the  people  made  Jehoahaz 
king.  After  a  reign  of  only  three  months,  Jehoahaz 
was  deposed  by  Pharaoh-Necho,  who  was  now  for  a  short 
time  supreme  over  the  countries  from  the  Euphrates  to 
the  Nile.  Xecho  placed  Jehoiakim  on  the  throne  in- 
stead of  Jehoahaz.  Jehoiakim  was  selfish,  desi^otic, 
godless.  The  nobles  all  too  willingly  followed  Jehoia- 
kim's  example,  so  that  in  a  short  time  the  old  evils  of 
Manasseh's  reign  broke  out  afresh.  In  the  meantime 
the  Chaldeans  were  mustering  and  marching  threaten- 
ingly' in  the  north.  Reports  of  their  fierceness  and  re- 
sistlessness  reached  Jerusalem.  Fear  and  doubt  settled 
on  many  a  mind  and  heart  in  Judah.  AVould  a  riglit- 
eous  Ood  permit  such  an  insatiable  invader  to  overwhelm 
Judah  ?  At  such  a  critical  moment  Ilabakkuk  appears 
upon  the  scene  of  his  i)roplietic  message. 

V.  Divisions  and  Contents.— 1.  Ch.  1.  (a)  vv.  2-4. 
Habakkuk  expostulates  with  Jehovah  for  permitting 
evil  to  go  so  long  unchecked  in  Judah.  (h)  vv.  o-ll. 
Jehovah  replies  by  pointing  to  and  describing  the  Chal- 
deans whom   he  has  raised  up    to  chastise  the   guilt}- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  11)9 

nation,     (c)  vv.   12-17  Ilabakkuk  is  amazed  that  Jeho- 
vah can  use  as  his  instruments  those  cruel  Chaldeans. 

2.  Ch.  2.  (a)  vv.  1-4.  In  answer  to  Ilabakkuk's 
challenge  of  the  divine  rectitude,  Jehovah  declares  that 
the  Chaldeans  carr}^  in  themselves  the  seed  of  their  own 
ruin,  while  the  righteons  possess  tlie  i)rinciple  of  life. 
(b)  vv.  5-20.  The  truth  that  the  Chaldean  bears  in 
himself  the  germ  of  his  own  ruin  is  expanded  and  proven 
in  the  description  of  the  Chaldean's  drunkenness,  ambi- 
tion, iust  for  conquest,  cruelty,  injustice,  bloodshed, 
despotism,  intrigue,  idolatrJ^  (c)  Verse  20  contrasts 
the  living  God  with  heathen  idols,  and  so  forms  the 
transition  to 

3.  Ch.  3.  (a)  V.  2.  Habakkuk  has  heard  the  an- 
nouncement of  God's  judgment  on  Israel,  and  the  final 
doom  of  the  Chaldeans.  But  the  prophet  fears  that  a 
delay  of  the  latter  will  prove  too  severe  a  test  of  faith, 
and  therefore  prays  that  the  time  may  be  shortened,  (b) 
vv.  3-15.  The  answer  to  tlie  prophet's  prayer  is  given 
in  the  fuller  revelation  of  Jehovah's  working  in  the 
world,  which  is  expressed  by  the  description  of  His  Ad- 
vent to  redeem  his  people  and  judge  their  enemies,  (c) 
vv.  10-19.  Meditating  upon  this  transcendent  Theo- 
phany  the  prophet  determines  to  rejoice  and  rest  all  as- 
surance in  Jehovah. 

VI.  Theology.— The  Apostle  Paul  has  adopted  the 
second  clause  of  Hab.  2 : 4,  as  one  of  the  watchwords  of 
his  theology, — "  But  the  just  shall  live  by  his  faith,"  or 
"  in  his  faithfulness."  The  essence  of  Habakkuk's  the- 
ology is 

1.  Faitli  in  God  and  his  supreme  government. 

2.  Patience  in  waiting  on  God  and  his  working. 

3.  Rejoicing  in  God  alway. 


200  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

VII.  Messianic— The  Messianic  element  in  Habak- 
kuk  appears  for  the  most  part  in  2 :  4,  14  and  Ch.  3,  set- 
ting forth  the  righteous  life,  the  coming  glor}^,  and  the 
advent  of  Jehovah  for  the  redemption  of  his  people. 


Literature.  —  Commentaries  :    Keil  and  Delitzsch,  Lange, 
Piisey,  Orelli. 


ZEPHANIAH. 

I.  'Saine,—SefanyaJi  =  Zephaniah  =  Whom  Jeliovah 
hid.     The  Book  derives  its  name  from  its  author. 

II.  Biography  and  Ministry.— Zephaniali,  who  lived 
in  the  Chaldean  period,  belonged  to  the  Kingdom  of 
Judah.  According  to  the  superscription,  1:1,  he  was 
the  great-grandson  of  Amariah,  who  was  the  son  of 
Hezekiah.  This  Hezekiah  was  probably  King  Hezekiah, 
which  would  make  Zephaniah  belong  to  the  royal  family. 
He  probably  lived  and  ministered  in  Jerusalem.  Zeph- 
aniah's  prophetic  ministry  falls  between  B.  C.  639-609, 
and  during  the  reign  of  Josiah.  He  was  a  contemporary 
of  Jeremiah. 

III.  Composition.— Zephaniah  is  generally  conceded 
to  be  the  author  of  the  Book  bearing  his  name.  As  to 
the  date  of  the  composition  of  Zephaniah's  i)rophecy,  it 
doubtless  belongs  to  the  beginning  of  Josiah's  reign, 
and  before  the  great  reformation  effected  by  that  king. 
From  allusions  to  the  condition  of  morals  and  religion 
in  Judah  in  1 :  4-6,  8,  9,  12 ;  3 : 1-3,  7,  it  may  be  con- 
cluded with  certainty  that  the  period  of  Josiah's  reign 
during  which  Zephaniah  wrote  was  prior  to  the  great 
reformation  of  his,  Josiah's  eighteenth  year  (B.  C.  621), 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  '^Ol 

in  which  tlie  idohitroiis  i)raetices  coiuleniiiocl  b}-  Zeph- 
aniah  were  abolished  by  Josiah.  The  design  of  Zeph- 
aniah's  prophecy  is  to  announce  (4od's  judgment,  and 
the  moral  condition  that  necessitated  it. 

IV.  Historical.— The  historical  occasion  of  Zeph- 
aniah's  x>i*opliecy  seems  to  have  been  the  irruption  of 
those  mysterious,  marauding  hordes  of  Scythians  who 
poured  down  over  Western  Asia  from  the  steppes  of  tlie 
North,  spreading  consternation  and  devastation  in  their 
path.  As  Joel  saw  the  locust  plague  to  be  a  visitation 
of  judgment  from  Jehovah,  so  Zephaniah  viewed  the 
desolating  invasion  of  the  Scythians.  It  was  a  visita- 
tion wherein  Jehovah  was  manifesting  his  jiower,  judg- 
ing the  nations,  and  summoning  his  people  to  repent- 
ance. 

V.  Divisions  and  Contents.— Tlie  l>ook  has  a  three- 
fold division. 

1.  Ch.  1.  Tlie  menace.  The  prophecy  opens  with 
an  announcement  of  far-reaching  destruction,  but  es- 
peciall}^  directed  against  the  idolatei\s  in  .Tudali  and 
Jerusalem.  Jehovah's  day  of  sacrifice  is  at  hand;  the 
victims,  the  Jewish  people,  and  nations  the  "  sancti- 
fied "  (1  Sam,  Ifiro),  invited  guests.  Three  classes  to 
be  judged; — court  oiTicials,  merchants  and  those  sunk 
in  irreligious  indifterentism.  The  "Day  of  Jehovah" 
further  developed  and  described. 

'I.  Chs.  2:1-3:7.  The  admonition,  'i'lie  prophet 
urges  his  people  to  repent  and  so  escape  the  doom  which 
wall  overtake,  he  declares,  in  succession  the  Philistines, 
Moab,  Ammoii.  Kthiopia,  Nineveh.  Then  again  the 
prophet  turns  to  address  JcM'usalem,  describe  her  sins, 
and  her  heedlessness  to  warning. 

3.    Ch.  3:8-20.      The  promise.      The   j)i-()ph<>t   exhorts 


202  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

the  faithful  in  Jerusalem  to  wait  patientl}^  on  Jehovah 
whom  all  nations  will  yet  serve,  while  the  faithful,  cleav- 
ing to  God,  will  dwell  in  safety  upon  their  own  land,  and 
be  made  to  rejoice  in  the  coming  restoration  of  Jeho- 
vah's presence. 

VI.  Theology.— Zephaniah  emphasizes  the  supreme 
lesson  that  Jehovah  is  King  and  Judge;  that  judgment 
is  impending;  and  that  judgment  will  be  universal. 
Force  and  violence  are  temporarj^;  truth  and  righteous- 
ness shall  abide.  Out  of  the  fury  and  fall  of  world  em- 
pires the  faithful  remnant  shall  see  established  the  uni- 
versal empire  of  Jehovah. 

VII.  Messianic— Zephaniah  has  no  prophecy  of  a 
distinct  personal  Messiah.  Jehovah  is  the  Saviour.  He 
will  effect  redemption.  The  terrible  judgments  impend- 
ing will  issue  in  salvation  for  Israel  and  the  world.  The 
Messianic  element  in  Zephaniah's  prophecy,  contained 
for  the  most  part  in  3 :  8-20,  is  remarkable  as  contain- 
ing a  prediction  of  the  conversion  not  only  of  the 
heathen  nations,  but  even  of  those  who  execute  the  di- 
vine judgments  upon  Israel. 


Literature. — Commentaries :   Keil    and    Delitzsch,    Lange, 
Pusey,  Orelli. 


HAGGAI 


I.  Name.— llaggai  =  Festal.      The   Book   derives    its 
name  from  its  author. 

II.  Biography  and  Ministry.— Haggai,  like  Zechariah 
and  Malachi,  lived  and  ministered  in   the  Post-Exilian 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  203 

period.  The  date  of  his  ininistiy  lla«i:^ai  states  very 
definitely  in  1:1  where  lie  dechires  that  the  word  of  the 
Lord  came  to  him  on  the  first  day  of  the  sixth  month  of 
the  second  year  of  the  reign  of  Darius  (Ilystapes), 
B.  C.  520.  All  the  other  communications  belong  also 
to  the  second  year  of  the  reign  of  Darius,  and  fall 
within  the  limits  of  four  months.  Apart  from  his  pro- 
phecy, Ilaggai  is  mentioned  in  Ezra  5:1,  2  as  prophesy- 
ing to  the  Jews  while  they  were  rebuilding  the  temple, 
after  the  return  from  Babylon  in  tlie  second  year  of 
Darius,  and  as  helping  Zerubbabel  and  Joshua  the  son 
of  Jehozadak,  the  higli  priest,  in  their  work.  Ilaggai 
and  Zechariah  were  contemporaries  in  the  prophetic 
ministry.     Compare  Hag.  1:  1  and  Zech.  1:1. 

III.  Composition.— Haggai  is  generally  conceded  to 
be  the  authcu'  of  the  Book  bearing  liis  name.  His  style 
is  simple,  practical,  and  goes  directly  to  the  point.  His 
prophetic  message  is  addressed  to  the  restored  captives, 
and  its  design  is  to  incite  them  to  duty  and  encoui'age 
them  in  duty,  particularly  in  the  matter  of  rebuilding 
the  temple, — their  national  sanctury  and  living  evidence 
of  their  national  religion. 

IV.  Historical.— The  decree  of  Cyrus  pcnnitting  the 
Jews  to  return  to  their  own  land  (Kzi-a  Ch.  1.),  and  to 
rebuild  the  temple  at  .Jerusalem,  was  followed  by  the 
joyful  compliance  of  a  considerable  number,  some  50, 000 
in  all.  who  set  out  to  return  to  their  Holy  Land.  The 
leaders  of  the  returning  exiles  were  Zei-ubbabel  the  son 
of  Shealtiel,  and  Joshua  the  son  of  Jehozadak.  Zerub- 
babel, as  the  actual  oi-  legal  heir  of  Jehoiachin,  was  the 
rei)resentative  of  the  house  of  David,  and  had  l)een  aj)- 
])ointed  governor  of  Judah  by  Cyrus  (Kzi*.  5:  14).  Joshua, 
who    held   the   odiee  ol'    High    Pri<'st,    \Nas  grandson    of 


204  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Seraiah,  the  last  High  Priest  who  had  ministered  in  the 
Temple  at  Jerusalem  before  its  destruction.  The  work 
of  rebuilding  began  with  the  erection  of  the  altar  in  its 
ancient  place,  and  the  commencement  of  the  erection  of 
the  Temple.  But  with  the  death  of  Cyrus  the  emigra- 
tion of  exiles  to  Judah  ceased,  and  under  the  reign  of 
some  of  the  successors  of  Cyrus,  particularly  Cambyses 
and  Pseudo-Smerdis,  the  work  on  the  Temple  and  city 
was  suspended.  Great  obstacles  to  the  continuance  and 
completion  of  the  work  were  encountered,  owing  to  the 
jealousies  of  the  inhabitants  of  Samaria  and  Edom,  and 
constant  misrepresentations  at  the  court  of  Persia.  Ezra 
Ch.  4.  So  for  some  fifteen  years  the  work  of  rebuild- 
ing was  arrested,  till  in  the  second  3'ear  of  the  reign  of 
Darius  it  w^as  resumed  under  the  prophetic  ministry  of 
Haggai  and  Zechariah. 

V.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  proj^hecy  of  Hag- 
gai consists  of  four  sections,  communications,  arranged 
chronologically. 

1.  Ch.  1.  In  the  second  year  of  Darius,  the  first  day 
of  the  sixth  month,  Haggai  appeals  to  the  people  no 
longer  to  postpone  the  work  of  rebuilding  the  Temple, 
declares  that  the  failure  of  their  crops  is  due  to  their 
having  failed  to  rebuild  the  house  of  the  Lord,  and  that 
the  pleasure  and  liiesence  of  Jehovah  will  attend  them 
in  x:>erforming  this  work. 

2.  Ch.  2  : 1-9.  In  the  same  3^ear  on  the  twenty-first 
day  of  the  seventh  month  the  jjrophet  again  addresses 
the  people  with  words  of  encouragement  assuring  them 
that  this  second  temple,  though  inferior  in  splendor  to 
the  first,  shall  have  greater  glory  than  it,  and  that  Jeho- 
vah will,  shake  all  nations,  and  the  most  excellent  of  the 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  205 

nations  sliall  come  lo  it,   and  the   liouse   shall    be   filled 
with  glory.     Comp.  Heb.  12:26,  27. 

3.  Ch.  2:10-19.  In  the  same  year  on  the  twenty- 
fourth  day  of  the  ninth  month  the  prophet  addresses 
the  pi'iests  declaring  thai  so  long  as  the  Temple  remains 
unbuilt  the  people  are  unclean,  and  hence  the  seasons 
are  unfruitful. 

4.  Ch.  2:20-23.  On  the  same  day,  Ilaggai  encourages 
Zerubbabel,  the  civil  head  of  the  restored  community, 
and  representative  of  David's  line,  with  the  assurance 
that  in  the  approaching  overthrow  of  the  thrones  and 
kingdoms  of  the  earth,  he  will  receive  special  tokens  of 
Jehovah's  favor, 

VI.  Tlieolog-y  and  Messianic— The  theological  teach- 
ing of  Ilaggai  emphasizes 

1.  The  obedience  of  Jehovah's  people  will  ever  secure 
Jehovah's  co-operation. 

2.  Jehovah  will  overrule  all  convulsions  among  the 
nations  of  the  earth  to  effect  his  purposes,  and  bring  in 
his  reign  of  peace. 

The  Messianic  portion  is  contained  in  Ch.  2  :  G-9,  21- 
23  wherein  Ilaggai  predicts  that  heaven  and  earth  will 
be  shaken;  Kingdoms  overthrown;  instruments  of  war 
destroyed ;  nations  bring  their  treasures  to  the  house  of 
Jehovah,  whose  latter  glory  will  be  made  greater  than 
the  former;  while  Zerubbabel,  the  servant  of  Jehovah, 
will  become  His  signet,  according  to  which  it  is  evident 
that  the  Jewish  governor  is  made  a  type  of  Christ. 


l,iteriitnre,—Coviuieiit(trien :    Kcil    and    DclitzscJi,     Langc, 
Pusey,  Orelli. 


200  INTEODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


ZECHARIAH. 

I.  'Same,— Zechanj ah  =  Zechsivmh=  \y horn  Jehovah 
remembers.     The  Book  derives  its  name  from  its  author. 

II.  Biography.— According-  to  1:1  of  his  prophec}' 
Zechariali  was  tlieson  of  Berechiah,the  son  of  Iddo.  From 
Neh.  12:  IG  it  appears  that  Zechariah  was  a  priest,  and 
that  he  went  up  from  Babylon  to  Jerusalem  with  Zerub- 
babel.  In  KvA'd  5:1,  2  he  is  spoken  of  as  prophesying 
along  with  Ilaggai,  and  aiding  in  the  rebuilding  of  the 
Temple.  In  this  passage  he  is  called  simply  Iddo,  i:>rob- 
ably  because  his  father  was  already  dead  when  Ezra 
wrote,  and  liis  grandfather  was  his  nearest  living  ances- 
tor. Zechariah  lived  and  ministered  between  B.  C.  520- 
510.  IIow  mucli  longer  he  lived,  and  whether  his  pro- 
phetic ministry  extended  over  a  greater  period  than  four 
or  five  years,  is  not  known.  Haggai  was  Zechariah's 
contemporary  prophet;  Joshua  was  High  Pi-iest ;  Zerub- 
babel  was  governor  of  the  restored  community  of  Jews 
in  Judah ;  Tattenai  was  general  Persian  governor  of 
the  province;  and  Darius  was  king. 

III.  Ministry.— According  to  2:4  Zechariah  was  a 
young  man  when  he  was  called  to  the  prophetic  office.  In 
the  beginning  of  his  prophecy  he  states  that  the  word 
of  the  Lord  came  to  him  in  the  eighth  month  of  the  sec- 
ond year  of  Darius,  two  months  after  Haggai  received 
his  first  divine  communication.  Besides  this  Zechariah 
gives  two  other  dates  of  divine  communications,  viz., 
the  twenty-fourth  day  of  the  eleventli  month  in  the 
same  year  (Oh.  1 :  7),  and  the  fourth  day  of  the  ninth 
month  of  the  fourth  year  of  Darius  (Ch.  7:1); — these 
J' ears  were  B.  C.  520  and  518.     As  in  the  case  of  Hag- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  207 

gai  so  witli  Zechariah,  tlie  first,  local,  present  and  prac- 
tical object  of  their  preaching  was  to  incite  and  encour- 
age the  people  in  rebuilding  the  Temple  service.  This 
preaching  of  these  two  prophets  had  its  desired  efiect. 
The  rebuilding  of  the  Temple  progressed  rapidlj-.  Tat- 
tenai,  the  Persian  governor,  referred  the  matter  of  the 
rebuilding  to  Darius,  but  did  not  interfere  with  the 
work.  The  reference  to  Darius  led  to  the  discovery  of 
the  decree  of  Cyrus  in  the  archives  at  P>batana;  and 
Darius  issued  a  new  decree  directing  Tattenai  to  furnish 
materials  for  the  work,  aud  to  provide  the  Jews  with 
animals  and  other  requisites  for  sacrifice.  In  less  than 
four  and  a  half  years  from  the  recommencement  of  the 
work  the  Temple  was  completed  and  dedicated  on  the 
third  day  of  the  twelfth  month  of  the  sixth  j^ear  of 
Darius  B.  C.  51(5.  But  it  must  be  remembered  that 
while  Haggai  and  Zechariah  in  the  exercise  of  their  pro- 
phetic ministry  directed  their  words  and  efforts  primarily 
to  the  rebuilding  of  the  Temj)le,  and  the  restoration  of 
the  Temj)le  service,  still  it  was  by  no  means  with  a 
formal,  ceremonial,  unspiritual  conception  of  that 
service,  and  by  no  means  in  any  spirit  of  national  ex- 
clusiveness  and  religious  bigotry.  These  prophets  them- 
selves predicted  that  the  glory  of  that  Temple  was  to  be 
its  catholicity.  They  saw  not  only  the  nations  of  their 
time  bringing  offerings  for  the  rebuilding  of  that  Temple, 
but  like  Isaiah  and  Micah,  they  saw  all  the  nations  of 
the  future  flowing  thither  to  the  worship)  of  Jehovah. 
There  in  that  i3lace  they  saw  was  to  be  consummated 
the  final  reconciliation  of  num  to  (Tod  and  man  to  man. 
Looking  forward  to  that  coming  Messianic  reconciliation 
Haggai  preaches,  "  In  this  place  will  I  give  peace,  saith 
Jehovah  of  hosts."     And  Zechariah  points  the  finger  of 


208  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

prophecy  forward,  be^-ond  the  material  Temple  of  Zer- 
ubbabel,  to  the  glorious  outlines  of  a  spiritual  Temple, 
which  the  priestly  King  of  David's  line  will  build. 

IV.  Composition.— Zechariah  is  the  author  of  the  en- 
tire Book  that  bears  his  name.  It  isgenerall}^  conceded 
that  this  Zechariah  is  the  author  of  Chs.  1-8.  But  in 
modern  times  some  critics  have  violently  assailed  the 
genuineness  of  Chs.  9-14.  Their  position  is  that  CUis. 
9-11  was  the  work  of  a  prophet  who  flourished  shortlj^ 
after  the  death  of  Jeroboam  II.;  and  that  Chs.  12-14 
are  to  be  assigned  to  another  writer  who  lived  between 
the  death  of  Josiah  at  ^Megiddo  B.  C.  G09  and  the  Fall 
of  Jerusalem  in  B.  C.  o8(').  The  general  argument  em- 
ployed to  prove  this  position  is  that  there  are  historical 
references  in  Chs.  9-14  that  seem  to  imply  that  the 
Xorthern  Kingdom  of  Israel  and  the  Southern  Kingdom 
of  Judah  still  exist,  and  historical  references  that  seem 
to  ijoint  to  conditions  antedating  the  Fall  of  Jerusalem ; 
f.  r/.,  9:1-7,  10,  13;  10:2,  10,  11;  11:4,  14,  15,  etc.  On 
the  other  hand  it  is  replied  and  argued, — (1)  That  Chs. 
9-14  give  unmistakable  indications  of  a  i)ost-exilic  date. 
Thus,  in  9:11,  12  and  10:0-11,  the  exile  not  only  of 
P^phraim  but  of  Judah,  appears  to  be  presupposed.  In 
9:9,  11,  12  Judah  has  been  partly  restored  to  its  land, 
and  is  to  expect  more  complete  restoration.  In  10:6 
sq.,  Ephraim,  still  in  exile,  is  to  be  brought  back  and 
reunited  to  Judah.  In  9 :  8  it  is  represented  that  the 
land  of  Judah  has  been  overrun  by  a  foreign  enemy, 
and  the  temple  desecrated.  In  9 : 9  Judah  is  repre- 
sented as  being  without  a  king,  and  is  therefore  bidden 
to  rejoice  at  the  approaching  advent  of  the  Messianic 
King.  (2)  Other  admittedly  Exilian  and  Post-Exilian 
prophets  and   writings  seem  also  to  imply  the  still  con- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  209 

tinned  existence  of  the  two  Kingdoms,  as  nmch  as 
Zechariah  hinivSelf.  Thns,  e.  r/.,  note  Jer.  ^U  :  18-20, 
27,  31.  And  yet  in  spite  of  this,  Ephrainiliad  gone  into 
captivity  a  luindred  years  befoi-e  this,  (o)  If  these  Clis. 
9-14,  or  more  particnlarly  12-14  were  written  not  long- 
before  the  Babylonian  captivity  how  comes  it  that  there 
is  no  mention  made  in  them  of  the  Chaldeans  who  were 
then  on  the  point  of  destroying  Jernsalem  '?  Jeremiah 
writing  at  that  time  is  full  of  predictions  respecting  the 
destruction  of  the  city  by  the  Chaldeans.  (4)  It  is  true 
that  in  the  last  part  of  the  Book  are  found  j)redictions 
relative  to  the  captivity  of  Jerusalem ;  but  the  entire 
description  makes  it  totally  unsuitable  to  refer  this  to 
the  destruction  and  captivity  of  Jerusalsm  by  the  Chal- 
deans. It  evidently  refers  to  times  long  subsequent  to 
that  event,  and  is  closely  connected  with  the  advent  of 
the  Messiah. 

V.  Historical.— See  under  III  Mmidry. 

VI.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  Book  of  Zechar- 
iah is  divided  into  two  parts;  viz.,  Pari  1.  Clis.  1-8, 
and  Part  2.   Chs.  9-14.     Part  1.   C1is.  1-8  includes 

1.  Ch.  1:0.  Introduction;  a  warning  voice  from  the 
past. 

2.  Chs.  1 : 7-6 :  8.  A  series  of  visions  designed  for 
encouragement  as  to  the  present,  and  instruction  as  to 
the  future;  including  ((0  1 :  7-17.  Vision  of  the  divine 
chariots  and  horses  in  the  valley  of  myrtles  represent- 
ing a  time  of  peace  and  opportuniiy  for  rebuilding  the 
city  and  temple,  {h)  1:18-21.  Four  horns,  symboliz- 
ing the  nations  opposed  to  Israel,  have  their  strength 
broken  b}'  four  smiths,  (c)  Ch.  2.  The  man  with  the 
measuring  line.  The  significance  is  that  the  coming 
Jerusalem  will  be  of  too  wide  an  extent  to  be  confined 

[14] 


210  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

by  walls,  will  have  an  unlimited  population,  will  have 
Jehovah  for  its  defence,  and  many  nations  will  join 
themselves  to  Israel,  (d)  Ch.  3.  Joshua,  the  High 
Priest  appears  before  the  altar  burdened  with  the  sins 
of  the  people.  Satan  accuses  him,  but  he  is  acquitted, 
and  given  rule  over  the  Temple,  with  the  right  of 
priestly  access  to  Jehovah.  He  receives  the  promise  of 
the  advent  of  Messiah,  and  restored  blessing,  {e)  Ch. 
4.  The  vision  of  the  golden  candlestick  and  the  two 
olive  trees,  symbolizing  that  all  obstacles  should  be  re- 
moved, and  the  restored  community,  the  chosen  people 
of  God,  should  ever  receive  sufficient  supplies  of  divine 
grace.  (/)  5:1-4.  The  vision  of  the  fljing  roll  sym- 
bolizing that  the  swift  curse  of  God  shall  exterminate 
sinners,  and  the  land  should  be  purified,  (g)  5:5-11.. 
Israel's  guilt,  personified  as  a  woman,  is  cast  into  an 
ephah-measure,  heavily  covered,  transported  to  Baby. 
Ionia,  where  it  is  to  remain,  as  in  fact  it  did,  idolatry 
having  ceased  in  Israel  with  the  return  from  the  exile, 
(/i)  6 :  1-8.  The  vision  of  the  four  chariots  seems  to  re- 
fer to  the  time  of  the  end,  and  the  execution  of  God's 
judgments  in  the  earth. 

3.  Ch.  6:9-15.  Symbolical  action.  The  prophet  is 
commanded  to  crown  the  High  Priest,  Joshua.  By  this 
act  the  two  offices  of  priest  and  king  were  united  in  his 
person,  and  he  became  the  type  of  One  greater  than 
himself  who  was  still  to  come,  the  royal  priest,  the 
Branch  of  the  house  of  David,  the  Messiah. 

4.  Chs.  7,  8.  Prophecies  didactic  and  predictive; 
didactic  relating  to  present  obedience,  justice,  mercj^, 
truth ;  and  predictive  relating  to  near  and  remote  bless- 
ings. 

Part  2.     Chs.  9-14,  includes 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  211 

1.  Ch.  9:1-8.  SuiTonnding  iKilions  destroyed;  Jeho- 
vah protects  his  people;  eiieinies  shall  no  more  invade 
their  land. 

2.  Chs.  9:9 — 10:12.  The  humble,  suffering',  peace- 
ful, delivering,  strengthening,  victorious  advent  of  the 
Messianic  King. 

3.  Ch.  11.  ^Vn  allegory,  describing  the  rejection  of 
the  divinely  appointed  Good  Shepherd  by  His  ungrate- 
ful flock,  and  the  fatal  consequences  to  the  flock. 

4.  Chs.  12-14.  Contain  prophecies  resi)ecting  Judah 
and  Jerusalem  and  the  Messiah's  Kingdom.  They  treat 
of  Israel's  restoration,  redemption  and  re-establishment 
as  God's  center  for  earthly  and  universal  blessing.  Judg- 
ment, repentance,  forgiveness  and  purifying  are  all 
secured  to  Israel  through  the  gracious  work  of  the  Mes- 
siah. The  last  chapter  introduces  the  universal  peace 
and  blessing  and  glory  by  the  personal  return  of  the 
Messiah,  Jesus  Christ. 

VII.  Theology— Messianic— Zechariah's  teaching  em- 
phasizes especially 

1.  An  obedient,  spiritual  service  of  Jeliovah  on  the 
part  of  a  holy  peoi^le. 

2.  The  redemption  of  Israel  and  the  nations  through 
the  workings  of  the  spirit  and  grace' of  Jehovah. 

3.  The  final  and  universal  Messianic  sovereignty  of 
Jehovah  over  the  whole  earth. 

Messianic  prophecy  in  Zechariah  is  especially  remark- 
able for  its  fulness.     It  treats  of 

1.  Chs.  2,  8.     The  Glory  of  the  New  Jerusalem. 

2.  Chs.  3:8—4:14  and  0:9-15.  The  Coronation  of 
the  Priest-King. 

3.  Chs.  9:9,  10.     The  King  of  Peace. 

4.  Ch.  11 :  7-14.     The  Rejected  Shepherd. 


212  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

5.  Oh.  12: 1-9.     The  Unique  Day. 

6.  Chs.  12 :  10—13 :  9.     The  Smitten  Shepherd. 

7.  Ch.  14.     The  final  Conflict,  Triumph  and  Empire. 


Ltitersiture. —Commentaries :     Keil    and   Delitzscli,   Lange, 
Pusey,  Oi^elli,  Wright. 


MALACHI 


I.  Name.— Malachi  =  My  Messenger.  Probably  a  con- 
tracted form  of  Malachiyah  =  Messenger  of  Jehovah. 
SoAbi  (2  Ki.  18:2)  is  contracted  from  Abijah  (2  Chr. 
29:1). 

II.  Biography  and  Ministry.  — Respecting  the  per- 
son and  life  of  ^lalachi,  the  last  of  the  Old  Testament 
prophets,  nothing  is  known  outside  the  Book  that  bears 
his  name.  The  date  of  Malachi's  ministry  probably 
falls  in  the  years  B.  C.  435-410.  Nehemiah,  cup  bearer 
to  Artaxerxes  at  Susa,  having  heard  that  the  gates  of 
Jerusalem  had  been  burnt,  and  breaches  made  in  its 
walls  (Neh.  1  :  2,  3),  obtained,  a  few  months  later,  the 
desire  of  his  heart,  viz.^  the  permission  of  Artaxerxes 
to  go  to  Jerusalem  and  restore  tlie  imi^aired  citj-.  Ar- 
rived at  Jerusalem  he  not  only  repaired  the  walls  and 
gates  of  the  city,  but  complaint  having  been  made  to 
him  of  serious  social  evils  and  religious  delinquencies, 
he  effected  various  radical  reforms.  Then  Xehemiah  was 
recalled  to  the  Persian  Court.  When  once  more  he  re- 
turned to  Jerusalem,  /.  e.,  upon  his  second  visit  (see 
chronolog}^  under  Ezra),  he  found  that  many  of  the  re- 
forms he  had  effected  ui^on  his  first  visit  had  been  un- 
done.    Malachi  probably  exercised  his  i:)rophetic  minis- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  213 

try  during  the  interval  between  Neliemiali's  first  and 
second  visits  to  Jerusalem,  and  possibly  for  a  time  while 
Nehemiah  was  making  his  second  visit.  This  date 
agrees  better  with  the  terms  of  1 :  8  where  the  allusion 
to  the  governor  points  to  the  presence  of  a  foreign  gov- 
ernor rather  than  Nehemiah  who  refused  to  avail  himself 
of  his  official  allowances.  Neh.  5:14sr/.  Besides,  the 
evils  that  Nehemiah  found  on  his  second  visit  are  for 
the  most  part  precisely  the  same  as  those  denounced  by 
Malachi.  Nehemiah  found  selfishness  and  irreverence 
on  the  part  of  the  high  priest ;  a  general  neglect  of  the 
temple  service;  a  failure  to  pay  the  tithes;  a  violation 
of  the  Sabbath ;  and  mixed  marriages.  And  so  we  find 
Malachi  denouncing  the  negligence  of  the  priests  and 
people  in  the  matter  of  the  temple  service ;  the  robber}' 
of  God  by  the  withholding  of  tithes  and  oiferings;  the 
divorce  of  Israelite  wives  and  contracting  marriages 
with  foreign  wx)men.  Nehemiah  does  not  speak  of  di- 
vorce, and  Malachi  does  not  speak  of  Sabbath  breaking, 
but  otherwise  the  correspondence  is  so  close  as  to  lead 
to  the  conclusion  that  they  belong  to  the  same  date. 

III.  Composition.— Malaclii  is  generally  conceded  to 
be  the  author  of  the  lk)ok  bearing  his  name.  Standing 
midway  between  the  old  age  and  the  new  age,  Malachi's 
style  at  once  bears  a  strong  resemblance  to  the  manner 
of  the  older  prophets,  while  it  also  bears  marks  of  the 
transitional  state.  He  has  peculiarities  of  expression. 
His  diction  shows  the  decline  of  poetic  prophecy.  He 
is  less  rhetorical  while  being  none  the  less  argumenta- 
tive. His  chief  literary  characteristic  is  a  dialectic 
treatment  by  nutans  of  (juestion  and  answer.  He  states 
briefly  the  truth  that  is  necessaiy  to  be  enforced;  then 
he  states  the  objection  that   this  truth   is  likely  to  pro- 


214  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

voke;  and  finally  he  refutes  the  objection,  substantiates 
his  original  proposition,  and  pronounces  in  connection 
therewith  warning  or  promise. 

IV.  Historical.— See  under  II  Biography  and  Min- 
istry. 

V.  Divisions  and  Contents.— 1.  Oh.  1:1-5.  Malachi 
addresses  Israel.  As  in  the  case  of  his  prophetic  prede- 
cessors, the  basis  of  his  appeal  to  Israel  is  Jehovah's  re- 
lation to  the  nation.  Jehovah  had  loved  them;  had 
chosen  Jacob  and  rejected  Esau.  The  proof  of  this  lay 
in  the  contrasted  experiences  and  destinies  of  Israel  and 
Edom.  Israel  had  been  restored  to  his  own  land,  but 
Edom's  heritage  lay  desolate  beyond  restoration. 

2.  Chs.  1 :  6 — 2 :  9.  Israel  is  utterly  indifferent  of  Jeho- 
vah's love  for  them,  and  utterly  neglectful  of  Jehovah's 
due  from  them.  Hence  Malachi's  prophecy  consists 
largely  of  a  reproof  of  the  sins  of  his  contemporaries. 
The  first  reproof  is  addressed  to  the  priests.  They 
offered  or  permitted  the  people  to  offer  blemished  or  un- 
clean animals  for  sacrifice,  and  so  the  service  of  Jeho- 
vah had  been  brought  into  contempt.  Still  Jehovah's 
name  was  held  in  honor  throughout  the  world,  and 
acceptable  worship  was  being  offered  him  among  the 
Gentiles.  But  these  priests  who  had  corrupted  them- 
selves and  the  offerings  were  threatened  with  curse 
and  punishment.  Their  course  had  been  just  the  oppo- 
site of  the  Levite  as  the  keeper  of  divine  knowledge 
and  the  interpreter  of  the  Law. 

3.  Ch.  2:10-16.  The  prophet's  next  reproof  is  ad- 
dressed to  the  iDCople.  He  denounces  them  on  account 
of  the  heartlessness  and  heinousness  of  their  conduct 
in  divorcing  their  Israelite  wives,  and  contracting  for- 
eign marriages. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  215 

4.  Chs.  2:17 — 3:G.  There  were  sceptics  among  the 
people  who  denied  the  divine  government  and  justice, 
and  who  doubted  whether  God  won  hi  ever  come  to  judge 
between  the  evil  and  the  good.  To  these  sceptics  the 
prophetic  message  is  addressed  that  the  time  speedily 
approaches  when  Jeliovah,  the  Judge  whom  they 
thouglitlessly  seek  shall  suddenly  come  to  his  temple  in 
the  person  of  the  Angel  of  the  Covenant.  He  will  sepa- 
rate between  the  righteous  and  unrighteous,  and  purify 
the  ungodly  nation. 

5.  Ch.  3  :  7-21  (3 :  7—4 :  3).  They  had  robbed  God  by 
withholding  tithes  and  offerings,  and  so  had  been  visited 
of  God  with  a  judgment  upon  their  lands  and  products. 
But  a  blessing  was  promised  in  the  future  if  they  would 
faithf uU}"  discharge  these  duties  in  a  God-fearing  sei'vice. 
They  complained  that  it  was  vain  to  serve  God.  ]5ut 
the  time  would  come  when  God  would  discriminate  be- 
tween those  who  served  him  and  those  who  served  him 
not.  Destruction  would  be  the  portion  of  the  one, 
blessing  and  trium]3h  the  portion  of  the  other. 

6.  Ch.  3:22-24  (4:4-6).  The  prophecy  concludes 
with  an  appeal  to  obey  the  requirements  of  the  Mosaic 
Law,  and  with  a  promise  of  the  advent  of  Elijah  the 
prophet  to  move  the  people  to  repentance  against  the 
da}^  of  Jehovah,  and  so  avert  the  curse  which  otherwise 
might  smite  the  earth. 

VI.  Theolog-y  and  Messianic— Tlie  theological  doc- 
trines emphasized  by  Malachi  are 

1.  Jehovah's  love  for  his  people. 

2.  Jehovah's  requirement  of  supreme  obedience. 

3.  Jehovah  cometh. 

The  Messianic  element  in  Malachi  is  contained  in  its 
closing  section,    viz.,    2:17 — 3:24(2:17 — 4:0).     iJotii 


216  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

treat  of  the  coming  of  the  messenger,  the  second  Elijah, 
to  prepare  the  way  for  the  coming  of  the  Lord,  himself 
the  Angel  of  the  Covenant.  The  messenger  who  should 
come  and  prepare  the  way  for  the  advent  of  the  Lord 
in  3:  1,  is  one  and  the  same  with  Elijali  tlie  prophet  in 
3:  23  (4:  5),  the  mediator  between  the  old  and  the  new, 
tlie  herald  of  the  day  of  judgment,  and  this  messenger 
and  second  Elijah,  was,  according  to  our  Lord's  teach- 
ings, John  the  Baptist.  In  teaching  us  tliat  John  is 
the  messenger  of  3:1*,  and  the  second  Elijah,  Christ 
teaches  us  also  that  he  himself  is  the  Lord,  Jehovah, 
and  the  Angel  of  the  Covenant.  The  messenger  of 
3:V  is  to  be  distinguished  from  the  messenger  the 
Angel  of  the  Covenant  of  3 :  1^,  As  the  Angel  of  Jeho- 
vah was  strictly  Jehovah  himself  to  Israel  of  old,  so 
the  Angel  of  the  Covenant  is  the  Lord,  Jehovah,  Mes- 
siah who  cometli  for  judgment  and  for  mercy. 


Literature. — Commentaries :    Keil  and    Delitzsch,    Laiiye, 
PiiHey.  OrcUi. 


BS1141.L29 

Introduction  outlines  of  the  books  of 

Princeton  Theological  Semmary-Speer  Library 


1    1012  00038  3184 


